Manual CTC - Enus

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CONPROVE
TEST
CENTER
(CTC)
SOFTWARE USE MANUAL
CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA
CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Statement of Responsibility
The information contained in this tutorial is constantly checked. However, differences in the description cannot
be completely excluded; therefore, CONPROVE disclaims any responsibility for errors or omissions contained
in the information transmitted.
Suggestions for improving this material are welcome, simply by contacting the email
suporte@conprove.com.br
The manual contains knowledge obtained from the resources and technical data at the time of writing.
Therefore CONPROVE reserves the right to make changes to this document without prior notice.
This document is intended to be a guide only, the manual of the equipment to be Test set should always be
consulted.
WARNING!
The equipment generates high current and voltage values during its operation.
Improper use of the equipment can result in material and physical damage.
Only persons with adequate qualifications should handle the instrument. It is observed that the user must have
satisfactory training in maintenance procedures, a good knowledge of the equipment to be Test set and also be
aware of safety rules and regulations.
Copyright
Copyright © CONPROVE. All rights reserved. The disclosure, total or partial reproduction of its content is not
authorized, unless they are expressly allowed. Violations are subject to sanctions by law.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CTC Software Usage Manual
March 2022
Copyright per CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA, 2022.
All rights reserved.
Prohibited the total or partial reproduction.
No part of this work,

Including the software and manual,
It may be appropriate and / or stored in electronic systems
And any other means
Without authorization from
CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA.
These software were developed and produced in Brazil

By CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA, under the responsibility of the
electrical engineer
Paulo Sérgio Pereira, CREA 11.348

Phone (34) 3218-6800 / Fax (34) 3218-6810
Street Visconde de Ouro Preto, 77
District Custódio Pereira – CEP 38.405-202
Uberlândia – MG – Brasil

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Version control
Version Descriptions Date Author Reviewer

1.0 Initial release 30/04/2021 MRC
1.1 Added information about precisions 07/03/2022 MRC
1.2 Added auxiliary source precision 07/04/2022 MRC
1.3 Changed minimum requirements 05/05/2022 MRC

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Summary
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................42
1.1 Minimum software requirements ..............................................................................42
2 Hardware and Software – Operating instructions for CE-6003/CE-6006/CE-6707/CE-
6710/CE-7012/CE-7024 .........................................................................................................44
2.1 Important information ...............................................................................................44
2.2 Description of the CE-6003 panel .............................................................................44
3 Software - Instructions on installing the Conprove Test Center (CTC) ..........................63
3.1 Installing CTC applications.......................................................................................64
3.2 Installing PS Simul (demo version) ..........................................................................66
3.3 Installing the Tutorials ..............................................................................................69
3.4 Installing I/O Drivers ................................................................................................71
4 Conprove Test Center (CTC) – Application Manager for CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-6707
/ CE-6710 /CE-7012 / CE-7024 – General Notes...................................................................75
4.1 General characteristics ..............................................................................................75
4.2 GENERAL ................................................................................................................76
4.2.1 MANUAL................................................................................................................................... 76
4.2.2 AUXILIARY SOURCE ............................................................................................................. 76
4.2.3 CALIBRAC ................................................................................................................................ 76
4.2.4 TEST PLAN ............................................................................................................................... 76
4.2.5 GERAÇÃO REMOTA ............................................................................................................... 76
4.3 PRIMARY .................................................................................................................76
4.3.1 CT ............................................................................................................................................... 76
4.3.2 VT ............................................................................................................................................... 77
4.3.3 TRANSFORMER ....................................................................................................................... 77
4.3.4 RESISTANCE ............................................................................................................................ 77
4.3.5 PMASTER .................................................................................................................................. 77
4.4 SECONDARY ..........................................................................................................77
4.4.1 DIFERENC................................................................................................................................. 77
4.4.2 DIRECPOT................................................................................................................................. 77
4.4.3 DISTANC ................................................................................................................................... 78
4.4.4 MASTER .................................................................................................................................... 78
4.4.5 PSB-OoS..................................................................................................................................... 78
4.4.6 RAMPA ...................................................................................................................................... 78
4.4.7 RESTHARM .............................................................................................................................. 78
4.4.8 SEQUENC .................................................................................................................................. 79
4.4.9 SYNCHRONISM ....................................................................................................................... 79
4.4.10 SOBRECOR ............................................................................................................................... 79
4.4.11 TRANSIENT .............................................................................................................................. 79
4.4.12 VOLTSPHZ ................................................................................................................................ 79
4.4.13 TRANSDUT ............................................................................................................................... 80
4.4.14 MEDIDOR ................................................................................................................................. 80
4.4.15 POWER QUALITY ................................................................................................................... 80
4.5 OTHER......................................................................................................................80
4.5.1 TRANSIENT VIEW................................................................................................................... 80
4.5.2 VALIDATE PDF REPORTS ..................................................................................................... 80
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.5.3 ANÁLISE ESTATÍSTICA ......................................................................................................... 80

4.6 MEASURAMENT ....................................................................................................80
4.6.1 MULTIM .................................................................................................................................... 81
4.7 SETUP.......................................................................................................................81
4.7.1 PREFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 81
4.7.2 ATUALIZA FIRMWARE.......................................................................................................... 81
4.8 SUPPORT .................................................................................................................81
4.8.1 TUTORIALS .............................................................................................................................. 81
4.8.2 CONTACT ................................................................................................................................. 81
4.8.3 FORUM ...................................................................................................................................... 81
4.8.4 MANUAL................................................................................................................................... 81
4.8.5 QUICK GUIDE .......................................................................................................................... 81
4.8.6 AUTODIAGNÓSTICO .............................................................................................................. 81
4.8.7 REMOTE ACCESS .................................................................................................................... 82
5 Manual – Manual testing software...................................................................................84
5.1 General characteristics ..............................................................................................84
5.2 Quick access toolbar..................................................................................................85
5.3 General Button adjustment range ..............................................................................86
5.4 Home Menu ...............................................................................................................87
5.5 View Menu ................................................................................................................88
5.6 Software Options Menu ............................................................................................89
5.7 Settings screens .........................................................................................................90
5.8 Pre-fault Tab ..............................................................................................................91
5.8.1 Node Output (NO) sub tab .......................................................................................................... 91
5.8.2 Direct Mode ................................................................................................................................ 92
5.8.3 Direct mode features ................................................................................................................... 93
5.8.4 Harmonic Mode .......................................................................................................................... 94
5.8.5 Harmonic mode features ............................................................................................................. 94
5.8.6 Symmetric Components Mode ................................................................................................... 95
5.8.7 Features of Symmetrical Components mode .............................................................................. 96
5.8.8 Phase-to-phase Mode .................................................................................................................. 96
5.8.9 Features Phase-phase mode ........................................................................................................ 97
5.8.10 Power Mode................................................................................................................................ 98
5.8.11 Resources Power mode ............................................................................................................... 98
5.8.12 Fault mode .................................................................................................................................. 99
5.8.13 Fault mode resources .................................................................................................................. 99
5.8.14 Constant Z-I mode .................................................................................................................... 100
5.8.15 Constant Z-I mode features ...................................................................................................... 100
5.8.16 Constant Z-V Mode .................................................................................................................. 101
5.8.17 Features of constant Z–V mode ................................................................................................ 101
5.8.18 Constant Z-source mode ........................................................................................................... 102
5.8.19 Constant Z – source mode features ........................................................................................... 102
5.8.20 Z mode - Smart ......................................................................................................................... 103
5.8.21 Z Mode Features - Smart .......................................................................................................... 103
5.9 Fault Tab .................................................................................................................104
5.9.1 DC Analog Outputs sub tab ...................................................................................................... 104
5.9.2 Binary Outputs sub tab ............................................................................................................. 105
5.9.3 GOOSE Outputs sub tab ........................................................................................................... 105
5.9.4 Time and Advance .................................................................................................................... 106
5.9.5 Monitoring Tab ......................................................................................................................... 106
5.9.6 Timers Tab................................................................................................................................ 107
5.9.7 Input Tab bin., GOOSE and An. DC ........................................................................................ 108
5.10 Waveform tab ......................................................................................................108
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.10.1 Features of the Waveform Tab ................................................................................................. 109

5.11 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................109
5.11.1 Resources of the Phasor Tab..................................................................................................... 110
5.12 Harmonics Tab .....................................................................................................111
5.12.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab .............................................................................................. 112
5.13 Evaluation Tab .....................................................................................................112
5.13.1 Resource of Evaluation Tab...................................................................................................... 113
6 Auxiliary Source ............................................................................................................113
7 Calibrac - Software for calibration of CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-6707/ CE-6710/ CE-
7012 / CE-7024.....................................................................................................................116
7.1 General features.......................................................................................................116
7.2 Calibrating the generating and reading of CE-6003/CE-6006/ CE-6707/ CE-6710/
CE-7012 / CE-7024 ...........................................................................................................116
7.3 Main screen .............................................................................................................117
7.4 Screens Voltage / Current Generation - Amplitude ................................................117
7.5 Screen “Calibrating the delay between the amplifiers”. .........................................122
7.6 Screen “Calibrating Phase Amplitude of Current Amplifiers in Config. Transitory”
125
7.7 Screen “Calibration of Voltage Measurement Inputs” ............................................129
7.8 “Calibrating Transducer Measurement Input” screen .............................................131
7.9 Screen "Calibration Source Assistant” ....................................................................135
8 Test Plan – Software to Perform Various Tests .............................................................139
8.2 Main screen .............................................................................................................140
8.3 Quick access toolbar................................................................................................140
8.4 General Button Adjustment Range .........................................................................140
8.5 Home Menu .............................................................................................................141
8.6 View Menu ..............................................................................................................143
8.7 Software Options Menu ..........................................................................................143
8.8 Inserting test modules..............................................................................................144
9 Remote Generation – Software to control another test set ............................................146
9.2 Main screen .............................................................................................................146
9.3 Quick access toolbar................................................................................................147
10 Meter - Software for testing meters ............................................................................149
10.1 General features ...................................................................................................149
10.2 Quick access toolbar ............................................................................................150
10.3 General Button Adjustment Range ......................................................................151
10.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................152
10.5 Config Hrd icon ...................................................................................................153
10.6 Static Generation ..................................................................................................155
10.7 View Menu ..........................................................................................................156
10.8 Software Options Menu .......................................................................................156
10.9 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................157
10.10 Adjustments screen - Meter - Set Meter ..............................................................158
10.11 Insert / Edit Point Tab ..........................................................................................158
10.12 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................159

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
10.12.1 Resources of the Waveform Tab .......................................................................................... 159

10.13 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................160
10.13.1 Resources of the Phasor Tab. ................................................................................................ 161
10.14 Harmonics Tab .....................................................................................................162
10.14.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab. ......................................................................................... 162
10.15 Test.......................................................................................................................163
10.16 Test Settings .........................................................................................................167
11 Power Quality - Software for testing Power Quality Analyzer ..................................171
11.1 General characteristics .........................................................................................171
11.2 Quick Access Toolbar ..........................................................................................172
11.3 General Adjustment Range Button ......................................................................173
11.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................174
11.5 Display Menu .......................................................................................................175
11.7 Test Tab Insert/Edit Point ....................................................................................176
11.8 Waveform Tab: Group .........................................................................................177
11.8.1 Waveform Tab Features: Group ............................................................................................... 177
11.9 Waveform Tab: Event ..........................................................................................178
11.9.1 Waveform Tab Features: Event ................................................................................................ 179
11.10 Waveform Tab: Detail .........................................................................................180
11.10.1 Waveform Tab Features: Detail ............................................................................................ 180
11.11 Phasors tab ...........................................................................................................181
11.11.1 Phasors Tab Features ............................................................................................................ 182
11.12 Harmonics tab ......................................................................................................183
11.12.1 Harmonics Tab Features ....................................................................................................... 183
11.13 Test.......................................................................................................................184
11.14 Test Points............................................................................................................197
11.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................197
12 CT – Current Transformer Testing Software .............................................................201
12.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................201
12.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................204
12.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................205
12.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................207
12.9 TC Tab .................................................................................................................208
12.9.1 Relationship .............................................................................................................................. 208
12.9.2 Relation to Voltage ................................................................................................................... 210
12.9.3 Ratio Rogowski ........................................................................................................................ 211
12.9.4 Low Power Ratio ...................................................................................................................... 212
12.9.5 Burden ...................................................................................................................................... 213
12.9.6 Magnetization Curve ................................................................................................................ 214
12.9.7 Winding Resistance .................................................................................................................. 215
12.9.8 Insulation sub tab ...................................................................................................................... 216
12.9.9 Polarity ..................................................................................................................................... 217
13 VT - Software for Testing Potential Transformers .....................................................219

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................219

13.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................222
13.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................223
13.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................225
13.9 TP tab ...................................................................................................................226
13.9.1 Ratio ......................................................................................................................................... 226
13.9.2 Relation to Electronic Output ................................................................................................... 228
13.9.3 Burden ...................................................................................................................................... 229
13.9.4 Insulation .................................................................................................................................. 230
13.9.5 Polarity ..................................................................................................................................... 231
14 Transformer – Power Transformer Testing Software.................................................233
14.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................233
14.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................236
14.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................237
14.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................239
14.9 Transformer tab ....................................................................................................240
14.9.1 Relationship .............................................................................................................................. 240
14.9.2 Ratio – 3P ................................................................................................................................. 242
14.9.3 Winding resistance ................................................................................................................... 243
14.9.4 Insulation .................................................................................................................................. 244
15 Resistance – Resistance Software Testing..................................................................246
15.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................246
15.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................249
15.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................250
15.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................252
15.9 Resistance Tab .....................................................................................................253
15.9.1 Micro-ohmmeter ....................................................................................................................... 253
15.9.2 Winding Resistance .................................................................................................................. 255
16 PMaster - Software for testing in TCs, TPS, power transformer and resistance ........257
16.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................258
16.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................261
16.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................262
16.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................264

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9 TC Tab .................................................................................................................265

16.9.1 Ratio ......................................................................................................................................... 265
16.9.2 Voltage Ratio ............................................................................................................................ 267
16.9.3 Ratio Rogowski ........................................................................................................................ 268
16.9.4 Lower Power Ratio ................................................................................................................... 269
16.9.5 Burden ...................................................................................................................................... 270
16.9.6 Magnetization Curve ................................................................................................................ 271
16.9.7 Winding resistance ................................................................................................................... 272
16.9.8 Insulation Sub tab ..................................................................................................................... 273
16.9.9 Polarity ..................................................................................................................................... 274
16.10 TP tab ...................................................................................................................275
16.10.1 Ratio ..................................................................................................................................... 275
16.10.2 Ratio with Electronic Output ................................................................................................ 276
16.10.3 Burden .................................................................................................................................. 277
16.10.4 Insulation .............................................................................................................................. 278
16.10.5 Polarity ................................................................................................................................. 279
16.11 Transformer Tab ..................................................................................................280
16.11.1 Ratio ..................................................................................................................................... 280
16.11.2 Ratio – 3P ............................................................................................................................. 282
16.11.3 Winding resistance ............................................................................................................... 283
16.11.4 Insulation .............................................................................................................................. 284
16.12 Resistance Tab .....................................................................................................285
16.12.1 Micro-ohmmeter ................................................................................................................... 285
16.12.2 Winding resistance ............................................................................................................... 286
17 CE-6003/CE-6006 Hardware Settings Screen ............................................................289
18 Hardware Settings Screen CE-7012/CE-7024............................................................293
19 Direction of analog channels I / O CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-7012 / CE-7024 ..........298
20 Directing Digital Channels (Sampled Values) I/O / CE-7012 / CE-7024 ..................304
21 General Settings ..........................................................................................................304
22 Preferences..................................................................................................................310
23 Firmware.....................................................................................................................312
24 Data Association .........................................................................................................312
25 GOOSE Messages Settings ........................................................................................315
26 Settings Messages Sampled Values (SMV or SV) .....................................................321
27 Multim - Software for instantaneous voltage and current measurements. .................329
27.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................331
27.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................333
27.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................335
27.7.1 Input Tab Bin., GOOSE and An. DC ....................................................................................... 337
27.7.2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 337
27.8 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................338
27.8.1 Resources of the Waveform Tab .............................................................................................. 338

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
27.9 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................339

27.9.1 Resources of the Phasor Tab..................................................................................................... 339
27.10 Harmonics Tab .....................................................................................................340
27.10.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab .......................................................................................... 341
27.11 Evaluation Tab .....................................................................................................341
27.11.1 Resource of the Evaluation Tab ............................................................................................ 342
28 Transient - Software for reproducing measurement files on a transient basis -
COMTRADE Archives ........................................................................................................344
28.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................346
28.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................348
28.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................350
28.8 Sync Adjustment screen .......................................................................................359
28.9 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................361
28.9.1 Sub tab Node Output (NO) ....................................................................................................... 361
28.9.2 COMTRADE/ATP mode ......................................................................................................... 362
28.9.3 Resources of COMTRADE mode – Output targeting .............................................................. 363
28.9.4 Resources of ATP mode – Output targeting ............................................................................. 364
28.9.7 GOOSE Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 366
28.9.8 Time and Advance .................................................................................................................... 366
28.9.9 Waveform Tab .......................................................................................................................... 367
28.9.11 Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 368
28.9.12 Resources of the Phasor Tab................................................................................................. 368
28.9.13 Trajectories Tab .................................................................................................................... 369
28.9.14 Resources of the Trajectories tab .......................................................................................... 370
28.9.15 Harmonics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 370
28.9.17 Synchronoscope tab .............................................................................................................. 371
28.9.18 Plane Z Tab........................................................................................................................... 372
29 Sequenc – Fault Sequence Generation Software ........................................................375
29.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................377
29.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................379
29.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................381
29.9 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................392
29.9.1 Sub Tab Node Output (NO) ...................................................................................................... 392
29.9.2 Direct Mode .............................................................................................................................. 394
29.9.3 Resources of the Direct Mode .................................................................................................. 394
29.9.4 Harmonics Mode ...................................................................................................................... 395
29.9.5 Harmonic modes Resources ..................................................................................................... 396
29.9.6 Inter-Harmonic Mode ............................................................................................................... 397

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.7 Interharmonic Resources .......................................................................................................... 398

29.9.8 Symmetric Components Mode ................................................................................................. 399
29.9.9 Resources of the Symmetric Components Mode ...................................................................... 399
29.9.10 Phase-to-Phase Mode............................................................................................................ 400
29.9.11 Resources of the Phase-to-Phase Mode ................................................................................ 400
29.9.12 Power Mode .......................................................................................................................... 401
29.9.13 Resources of the Power Mode .............................................................................................. 401
29.9.14 Fault Mode ............................................................................................................................ 402
29.9.15 Resources do Fault Mode ..................................................................................................... 402
29.9.16 Constant ZI Mode ................................................................................................................. 403
29.9.17 Resources do Constant ZI Mode ........................................................................................... 403
29.9.18 Constant ZV Mode ............................................................................................................... 404
29.9.19 Resources do Constant ZV Mode ......................................................................................... 404
29.9.20 Modo Z-font Constante......................................................................................................... 405
29.9.21 Z Mode Resources – Constant Source .................................................................................. 405
29.9.22 Z Mode - Smart..................................................................................................................... 406
29.9.23 Resources do Z Mode - Smart .............................................................................................. 406
29.9.24 Standby Mode ....................................................................................................................... 407
29.9.25 Standby Mode Resources ..................................................................................................... 407
29.9.26 Accommodation Mode ......................................................................................................... 408
29.9.27 DC Analog Output Sub Tab ................................................................................................. 409
29.9.28 Binary Outputs sub tab ......................................................................................................... 409
29.9.29 GOOSE Outputs ................................................................................................................... 410
29.9.30 Time and Advance ................................................................................................................ 410
29.9.31 Waveform Tab ...................................................................................................................... 411
29.9.33 Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 412
29.9.35 Trajectories tab ..................................................................................................................... 414
29.9.37 Harmonics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 415
29.9.40 Plane Z Tab........................................................................................................................... 416
30 Rampa – Software to generate signal sequences with ramp incrementation ..............420
30.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................422
30.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................424
30.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................426
30.9 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................437
30.9.1 Sub Tab Node Output (NO) ...................................................................................................... 437
30.9.2 Ramp Mode .............................................................................................................................. 438
30.9.3 Ramp Mode Resources – Module Type ................................................................................... 439
30.9.4 Ramp Mode Resources –Angle Type ....................................................................................... 439
30.9.5 Ramp Mode Resources – Frequency Type ............................................................................... 440
30.9.6 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Angle ........................................................................... 441
30.9.7 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Frequency .................................................................... 442
30.9.8 Ramp Mode Resources – dF/dt................................................................................................. 443
30.9.9 Ramp Mode Resources – Symmetric Components .................................................................. 444
30.9.10 Ramp Mode Resources – Phase to Phase ............................................................................. 445

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
30.9.11 Ramp Mode Resources – Power ........................................................................................... 446

30.9.12 Ramp Mode Resources – Icc and Zlin impedance ................................................................ 447
30.9.13 Ramp Mode Resources –Vcc and Zlin impedance ............................................................... 448
30.9.14 Ramp Mode Resources – SIR and Zlin impedance .............................................................. 449
30.9.15 DC Analog Outputs sub tab .................................................................................................. 450
30.9.16 Outputs Binary sub tab: ........................................................................................................ 451
30.9.17 GOOSE Outputs ................................................................................................................... 451
30.9.18 Time and Advance ................................................................................................................ 452
30.9.19 Waveform Tab ...................................................................................................................... 452
30.9.21 Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 454
30.9.25 Harmonics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 456
30.9.28 Plane Z Tab........................................................................................................................... 458
31 MASTER – Software to Generate Sequences of all Types of Signs ..........................461
31.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................463
31.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................465
31.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................467
31.9 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................478
31.9.1 Node Output (NO) Sub tab ....................................................................................................... 479
31.9.2 Direct Mode .............................................................................................................................. 479
31.9.3 Resources of the Direct Mode .................................................................................................. 480
31.9.4 Harmonics Mode ...................................................................................................................... 481
31.9.5 Harmonic Mode Resources....................................................................................................... 482
31.9.6 Interharmonics Mode ................................................................................................................ 483
31.9.7 Interharmonic Resources .......................................................................................................... 484
31.9.10 Phase-to-Phase Mode............................................................................................................ 486
31.9.11 Resources do Phase-to-Phase Mode ..................................................................................... 486
31.9.12 Power Mode .......................................................................................................................... 487
31.9.13 Power Mode Resources ........................................................................................................ 487
31.9.14 Fault Mode ............................................................................................................................ 488
31.9.15 Fault Mode Resources .......................................................................................................... 488
31.9.16 Constant ZI Mode ................................................................................................................. 489
31.9.17 Constant ZI Mode Resources ................................................................................................ 489
31.9.18 Constant ZV Mode ............................................................................................................... 490
31.9.19 Constant ZV Mode Resources .............................................................................................. 490
31.9.20 Constante Z Source Mode .................................................................................................... 491
31.9.21 Z Mode Resources – Constant Source .................................................................................. 491
31.9.22 Z Mode - Smart..................................................................................................................... 492
31.9.23 Z Mode Resources - Smart ................................................................................................... 492
31.9.24 Standby Mode ....................................................................................................................... 493
31.9.25 Standby Mode Resources ..................................................................................................... 493
31.9.26 Accommodation Mode ......................................................................................................... 494

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.27 Ramp Mode .......................................................................................................................... 495

31.9.28 Ramp Mode Resources – Module Type................................................................................ 495
31.9.29 Ramp Mode Resources – Angle Type .................................................................................. 496
31.9.30 Ramp Mode Resources – Frequency type ............................................................................ 497
31.9.31 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Angle ....................................................................... 498
31.9.32 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Frequency ................................................................ 499
31.9.33 Resources do Ramp Mode – dF/dt ........................................................................................ 500
31.9.34 Ramp Mode Resources – Symmetric Components............................................................... 501
31.9.35 Resources do Ramp Mode – Phase to Phase ........................................................................ 502
31.9.36 Ramp Mode Resources – Power ........................................................................................... 503
31.9.37 Ramp Mode Resources – Icc and Zlin Impedance ............................................................... 504
31.9.38 Resources do Ramp Mode – Impedance Vcc e Zlin ............................................................. 505
31.9.39 Ramp Mode Resources – SIR and Zlin Impedance .............................................................. 506
31.9.40 COMTRADE/ATP Mode ..................................................................................................... 507
31.9.41 COMTRADE mode Resources – Output targeting............................................................... 508
31.9.42 ATP mode Resources – Channel Direction .......................................................................... 509
31.9.43 DC Analog Outputs sub tab .................................................................................................. 510
31.9.44 Binary Outputs sub tab ......................................................................................................... 511
31.9.45 GOOSE Outputs ................................................................................................................... 511
31.9.46 Time and Advance ................................................................................................................ 512
31.9.47 Waveform Tab ...................................................................................................................... 513
31.9.48 Waveform Tab Resources ..................................................................................................... 513
31.9.49 Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 514
31.9.50 Phasor Tab Resources ........................................................................................................... 515
31.9.52 Trajectories tab Resources .................................................................................................... 516
31.9.53 Harmonics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 517
31.9.54 Harmonics Tab Resources .................................................................................................... 517
31.9.56 Plane Z Tab........................................................................................................................... 518
32 Sobrecor - Software for testing overcurrent relays .....................................................522
32.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................524
32.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................526
32.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................528
32.8 Settings Screen –Overcurrent – Definitions ........................................................529
32.9 Settings Screen – Overcurrent Screen – Overcurrent Elements ..........................529
32.10 Overcurrent Chart Tab .........................................................................................532
32.10.1 Resources of the Graphics Tab ............................................................................................. 534
32.11 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................534
32.12 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................535
32.12.1 Resources of the Phasors Tab. .............................................................................................. 536
32.13 Directionality Tab ................................................................................................537
32.14 Test of Pickup ......................................................................................................538
32.15 Time Test .............................................................................................................542
32.16 Test Settings .........................................................................................................546
33 Diferenc - Software for tests on differential relays ....................................................551
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................552

33.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................554
33.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................556
33.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................558
33.9 Systems Tab .........................................................................................................563
33.10 Relay Details Tab (Diagram) ...............................................................................563
33.11 Graphics Tab ........................................................................................................564
33.12 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................566
33.13 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................567
33.14 Test Set ................................................................................................................569
33.15 Point Test .............................................................................................................576
33.16 Search Test ...........................................................................................................579
33.17 Test Settings .........................................................................................................583
34 RestHarm – Software for Harmonic Restriction Tests ...............................................588
34.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................589
34.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................590
34.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................592
34.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................594
34.9 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................596
34.9.1 Resources of the Waveform Tab .............................................................................................. 597
34.10 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................598
34.11 Point Test .............................................................................................................599
34.12 Search Test ...........................................................................................................602
34.13 Crossblock Test....................................................................................................605
34.14 Test Settings .........................................................................................................607
35 DirecPot - Software for testing directional power relays ...........................................612
35.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................614
35.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................616
35.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................618
35.8 Settings Screen – Directional Power – Settings ...................................................618
35.9 Settings Screen – Directional Power – Elements Power Directional ..................619
35.10 Graphics Tab ........................................................................................................620
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
35.11 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................622

35.12 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................623
35.13 Trajectories tab ....................................................................................................624
35.14 Shooting ...............................................................................................................625
35.15 Search Test ...........................................................................................................629
35.16 Route ....................................................................................................................633
35.17 Test Settings .........................................................................................................637
36 Distanc - Software for testing distance relays ............................................................642
36.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................644
36.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................646
36.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................648
36.8 Graphics Tab ........................................................................................................655
36.8.1 Resources of the Graphics Tab ................................................................................................. 657
36.9 Zxt Tab .................................................................................................................657
36.9.1 Resources of the Zxt Tab .......................................................................................................... 658
36.11 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................660
36.12 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................661
36.13 Point Test .............................................................................................................663
36.14 Search Test ...........................................................................................................666
36.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................670
37 PSB_OoS - Software for testing distance relays ........................................................676
37.2 Screen Initial ........................................................................................................677
37.5 Home Menu .........................................................................................................678
37.6 View Menu ..........................................................................................................680
37.8 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................682
37.9 System Tab ..........................................................................................................690
37.9.1 System / System Tab ................................................................................................................ 690
37.9.2 System Tab / Fault .................................................................................................................... 691
37.9.3 System Tab / Evaluation ........................................................................................................... 691
37.9.4 System Tab / Relay Location in the System ............................................................................. 692
37.10 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................692
37.11 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................693

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

37.12.2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 696
37.13 System Simulation Test .......................................................................................696
37.13.1 Synchronous Type System Simulation Test ......................................................................... 696
37.13.2 Asynchronous System Simulation Test ................................................................................ 699
37.14 Trajectory Simulation ..........................................................................................702
37.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................706
38 Synchronism - Software for testing synchronism relay .............................................710
38.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................712
38.5 Display Menu .......................................................................................................714
38.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................716
38.9 Graphics Tab ........................................................................................................721
38.10 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................723
38.11 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................725
38.12 Synchronism Tab .................................................................................................726
38.12.1 Trigger .................................................................................................................................. 727
38.13 Search Test ...........................................................................................................731
38.14 Trajectory .............................................................................................................736
38.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................741
39 VoltsPHertz - Software for testing Overexcitation relays ..........................................746
39.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................748
39.5 Display Menu .......................................................................................................750
39.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................752
39.8 Settings Screen – Volts / Hertz ............................................................................753
39.9 Graphics Tab ........................................................................................................756
39.10 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................757
39.11 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................759
39.12 Time Test .............................................................................................................760
39.13 Search Test ...........................................................................................................764
39.14 Trajectory .............................................................................................................768
39.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................772
40 Transdut - Software for testing transducer .................................................................777

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

40.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................779
40.5 Display Menu .......................................................................................................781
40.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................783
40.8 Settings Screen – Transducer – Transducer Adjustment .....................................783
40.9 Graph Tab ............................................................................................................784
40.10 Errors Tab ............................................................................................................786
40.10.1 Resources of the Errors Tab ................................................................................................. 786
40.11 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................787
40.12 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................788
40.13 Harmonic Tab ......................................................................................................789
40.13.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab. ......................................................................................... 790
40.14 Test.......................................................................................................................790
40.15 Test Settings .........................................................................................................794
41 TransientView - Software for viewing measurement files on a transient basis -
COMTRADE files ................................................................................................................797
41.4 Home Menu .........................................................................................................799
41.5 View Menu ..........................................................................................................801
41.7 Settings Screen .....................................................................................................801
41.9 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................813
41.9.1 Node Output (NO) Sub tab ....................................................................................................... 813
41.9.2 COMTRADE/ATP Mode ......................................................................................................... 814
41.9.3 COMTRADE mode features - Output targeting ....................................................................... 815
41.9.4 ATP mode features - Output targeting ...................................................................................... 816
41.9.7 GOOSE Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 818
41.9.8 Time and Advance .................................................................................................................... 818
41.9.9 Waveform Tab .......................................................................................................................... 819
41.9.11 Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 820
41.9.15 Harmonics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 823
41.9.18 Plane Z Tab........................................................................................................................... 824
42 Statistical Analysis -Software for Statistical Analysis of a data set ...........................827

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

42.2 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................827
42.4 Accessing the File Button options .......................................................................828
42.5 Definition of General Information .......................................................................829
42.6 Tables Tab ............................................................................................................829
42.6.1 Adding new tables - Add Table button ..................................................................................... 829
42.6.2 Deleting Tables - Delete Table button ...................................................................................... 832
42.7 Analysis Tab ........................................................................................................832
42.7.1 “Analysis List” window............................................................................................................ 832
42.7.2 Window List Filters / Weights .................................................................................................. 833
42.7.3 Results Windows ...................................................................................................................... 834
42.8 Report Presentation ..............................................................................................839
43 Autodiagnóstico- Software for analyzing the operation of the Test set .....................842
43.2 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................842
43.3 Save Test File .......................................................................................................842
43.4 Initial File .............................................................................................................843
44 Remote Access - Software Technical Support Conprove gain remote access ...........846
44.2 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................846
44.3 Initial File .............................................................................................................847
45 GPS - CE-GPS operation instructions ........................................................................849
45.1 Description ...........................................................................................................849
45.2 Configure GPS Screen .........................................................................................849
A1 - Introduction ...............................................................................................................851
A2 - Hardware ...................................................................................................................852
A2. 2 Important information: ............................................................................................854

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Picture Index
Figure 1 – Hardware – CE-6003 Panel ............................................................................................................... 45
Figure 4 – Hardware – CE-6710 panel ............................................................................................................... 53
Figure 7 – Installation – Installation Manager .................................................................................................... 63
Figure 8 – Installation – CTC Installation .......................................................................................................... 64
Figure 9 – Installation – CTC license ................................................................................................................. 64
Figure 10 – Installation – CTC destination folder .............................................................................................. 65
Figure 11 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the CTC ................................... 65
Figure 12 – Installation – CTC successfully installed ........................................................................................ 66
Figure 13 – Installation – PS Simul Installation ................................................................................................. 66
Figure 14 – Installation – PS Simul license ........................................................................................................ 67
Figure 15 – Installation – PS Simul destination folder ....................................................................................... 67
Figure 16 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the CTC ................................... 68
Figure 17 – Installation – PS Simul successfully installed ................................................................................. 68
Figure 18 – Installation – Installation off Tutorials ............................................................................................ 69
Figure 19 – Installation – Tutorial destination folder ......................................................................................... 69
Figure 20 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the tutorials ............................. 70
Figure 21 – Installation – Tutorials successfully installed ................................................................................. 70
Figure 22 – Installation – National Instruments installation start screen ............................................................ 71
Figure 23 – Installation – National Instruments destination folder .................................................................... 71
Figure 24 – Installation – Verification if there upgrade to the National Instruments ......................................... 72
Figure 25 – Installation – Message showing that there is no update for National Instruments .......................... 72
Figure 26 – Installation – National Instruments license ..................................................................................... 73
Figure 27 – Installation – National Instruments installation begins ................................................................... 73
Figure 28 – Installation – National Instruments successfully installed .............................................................. 74
Figure 29 – Installation – Message to restart the computer ................................................................................ 74
Figure 30 – CTC Main screen ............................................................................................................................ 75
Figure 31 – Manual – Open Settings when Starting ........................................................................................... 84
Figure 32 – Manual – Main Screen .................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 33 – Manual – Menu – Software Options ............................................................................................... 85
Figure 34 – Manual – General Button Features .................................................................................................. 86
Figure 35 – Manual – Home Menu .................................................................................................................... 87
Figure 36 – Manual – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation .......................................................... 87
Figure 37 – Manual – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units e Layout.............................................................. 88
Figure 38 – Manual – View Menu – Windows and Layout ............................................................................... 89
Figure 39 – Manual – Software Options Menu – General .................................................................................. 90
Figure 40 – Manual – Adjustments button ......................................................................................................... 90
Figure 41 – Manual – Settings screen – General ................................................................................................ 91
Figure 42 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Sub tab NO ................................................................................................... 92
Figure 43 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Direct Mode ........................................ 92
Figure 44 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Resources ............................................................................................... 93
Figure 45 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Resources – Voltages, Currents or Frequency .............................................. 93
Figure 46 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Harmonics mode ................................ 94
Figure 47 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Resources ..................................................................................................... 94
Figure 48 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Formatting features ................................................................................. 95
Figure 49 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Symmetric Components mode ........... 95
Figure 51 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Phase-Phase mode .............................. 96
Figure 53 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Power mode ....................................... 98
Figure 55 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Sub tab NO – Fault mode description .......................................................... 99
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 56 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Resources .............................................................................................. 100

Figure 57 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the constant ZI mode ............................... 100
Figure 58 – Manual – Pre-fault – Resources .................................................................................................... 101
Figure 59 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – NO sub tab – Description of the constant ZV mode .............................. 101
Figure 60 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Resources .............................................................................................. 102
Figure 61 – Manual – Pre-fault – NO sub tab – Description of constant Z-source mode................................. 102
Figure 62 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Resources ............................................................................................. 103
Figure 63 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – NO sub tab – Description of Z mode - Intelligent ................................ 103
Figure 64 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Resources ............................................................................................. 104
Figure 65 – Manual – Fault Tab ....................................................................................................................... 104
Figure 66 – Manual – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – Description General ............................ 104
Figure 67 – Manual – Binary Outputs sub tab – Description General .............................................................. 105
Figure 68 – Manual – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description ........................................................... 105
Figure 69 – Manual – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description ........................................................ 106
Figure 70 – Manual – Monitoring Tab ............................................................................................................. 106
Figure 71 – Manual – Timers Tab .................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 72 – Manual – Entr. Bin., GOOSE and An. DC.................................................................................... 108
Figure 73 – Manual – Waveform Tab .............................................................................................................. 109
Figure 74 – Manual – Waveform tab – Resources ........................................................................................... 109
Figure 75 – Manual – Phasor Tab .................................................................................................................... 110
Figure 76 – Manual – Phasor Tab - Resources ................................................................................................. 110
Figure 77 – Manual – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns .............................................................. 111
Figure 78 – Manual – Harmonics Tab .............................................................................................................. 111
Figure 79 – Manual – Harmonics Tab – Resources.......................................................................................... 112
Figure 80 – Manual – Evaluation Tab .............................................................................................................. 112
Figure 81 – Manual – Evaluation Tab – Resources .......................................................................................... 113
Figure 82 – MonitFaux – Detail of the software settings ................................................................................. 114
Figure 83 – Calibrac – Main screen.................................................................................................................. 117
Figure 84 – Calibrac – “Prepare to Calibrate” screen ....................................................................................... 118
Figure 85 – Calibrac – Adjustment of the reading gain for fundamental frequency ........................................ 119
Figure 86 – Calibrac – Process Correcting Linearity Level 1 .......................................................................... 120
Figure 87 – Calibrac – Adjustment of the multipliers of the 2nd the 50th harm order. ...................................... 120
Figure 88 – Calibrac – Adjusted earnings list .................................................................................................. 121
Figure 89 – Calibrac – Screen “Prepare to Calibrate Voltage Measurement Delay” ....................................... 122
Figure 90 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibration Def. Voltage Measurement” .......................................................... 123
Figure 91 – Calibrac – Stage “Correcting the gap between voltage and current” ............................................ 124
Figure 92 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Def. From V2 to V6 with Ref V1” ................................................ 124
Figure 93 – Calibrac – Process completed screen ............................................................................................ 125
Figure 94 – Calibrac – Calibrac - And tap “Prepare to calibrate Water Factor. of I1 ” .................................... 126
Figure 95 – Calibrac – Step “Calibrating Iq Aqs Factor” ................................................................................. 127
Figure 96 – Calibrac – Step “Prepare for Calibrating Iq Aqs Factor” .............................................................. 128
Figure 97 – Calibrac – Step “Process Completed” ........................................................................................... 128
Figure 98 – Calibrac – Step “Prepare for Calibrate” ........................................................................................ 129
Figure 99 – Calibrac – Stage “Cal. mild Gain of Aqs. and Defas. in Fundamental Frequency” ...................... 130
Figure 100 – Calibrac – Step “Correcting Linearity and Measurement Def.” .................................................. 130
Figure 101 – Calibrac – Stage “Process Completed” ....................................................................................... 131
Figure 102 – Calibrac – “Correcting OffSet” ................................................................................................... 132
Figure 103 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating acquisition gain to level approx. 2V” .......................................... 133
Figure 104 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Acquisition Gain (Negative Response)”...................................... 134
Figure 106 – Calibrac – Stage “Prepare to Calibrate” ...................................................................................... 136
Figure 107 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Level Byte 2” .............................................................................. 136
Figure 109 – Test Plan – Insert Test Plan when starting .................................................................................. 139
Figure 110 – Test Plan – Main screen .............................................................................................................. 140
Figure 111 – Test Plan – Quick Access Bar ..................................................................................................... 140

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 112 – Test Plan – General Button Resources ........................................................................................ 141

Figure 113 – Test Plan – Home Menu .............................................................................................................. 141
Figure 114 – Test Plan – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation ................................................................. 142
Figure 115 – Test Plan – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ................................................... 142
Figure 116 – Test Plan – View Menu – Windows and Layout ......................................................................... 143
Figure 117 – Test Plan – Menu – Software Options......................................................................................... 144
Figure 118 – Test Plan – Adjustments button .................................................................................................. 144
Figure 119 – Remote Generation – Main screen .............................................................................................. 146
Figure 120 – Remote Generation – Resources ................................................................................................. 147
Figure 121 – Meter – Open Settings at Start .................................................................................................... 149
Figure 122 – Meter – Settings Screen .............................................................................................................. 150
Figure 123 – Meter – Quick Access Bar .......................................................................................................... 150
Figure 124 – Meter – General Button Resources ............................................................................................. 151
Figure 125 – Meter – Home Menu ................................................................................................................... 152
Figure 126 – Meter – Home Menu – Hardware e Generation .......................................................................... 152
Figure 127 – Meter – Home Menu – Static generation, Options, Report, Units and Layout ........................... 153
Figure 128 – Meter – Config Hrd – Slave ........................................................................................................ 154
Figure 129 – Meter – Home Menu – Static Generation ................................................................................... 155
Figure 130 – Meter – View Menu – Windows and Layout .............................................................................. 156
Figure 131 – Meter – Software Options Menu – General ................................................................................ 157
Figure 132 – Meter – Adjustments button ........................................................................................................ 157
Figure 133 – Meter –– Meter Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 158
Figure 134 – Meter – Insert / Edit Point Tab .................................................................................................... 159
Figure 135 – Meter – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................................... 159
Figure 136 – Meter – Software Options Menu – General ................................................................................ 160
Figure 137 – Meter – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display .......................................................................... 160
Figure 138 – Meter – Phasor Tab ..................................................................................................................... 161
Figure 139 – Meter – Phasor Tab – Resources ................................................................................................. 161
Figure 140 – Meter – Phasor Tab – Show Columns ......................................................................................... 162
Figure 141 – Meter – Harmonics Tab .............................................................................................................. 162
Figure 142 – Meter – Harmonics Tab – Resources .......................................................................................... 163
Figure 143 – Meter – Main screen – Test ......................................................................................................... 163
Figure 144 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Options ........................................................................................ 164
Figure 145 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Wh-bi d – Meter01 ...................................................................... 164
Figure 146 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Insert / Edit Points ....................................................................... 165
Figure 147 – Meter – Main screen – Test – General Options ........................................................................... 165
Figure 148 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Standardized tests ........................................................................ 167
Figure 149 – Meter – Main screen – Test Settings ........................................................................................... 168
Figure 150 – Meter – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction. Generation Channels ..................................... 168
Figure 151 – Meter – Test Settings – Reference Meter .................................................................................... 169
Figure 152 – Meter – Test mode – Measurement conditions ........................................................................... 169
Figure 153 – Power Quality – Open Settings when Start ................................................................................. 171
Figure 154 – Power Quality – Settings screen.................................................................................................. 172
Figure 155 – Power Quality – Quick Access Toolbar ...................................................................................... 172
Figure 156 – Power Quality – General Button Features ................................................................................... 173
Figure 157 – Power Quality – Home Menu...................................................................................................... 174
Figure 158 – Power Quality – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation......................................................... 174
Figure 159 – Power Quality – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ........................................... 175
Figure 160 – Power Quality – Display Menu– Windows and Layout .............................................................. 176
Figure 161 – Power Quality – Software Options Menu – General ................................................................... 176
Figure 162 – Power Quality – Test tab Insert/Edit Point .................................................................................. 177
Figure 163 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group ..................................................................................... 177
Figure 164 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group – Resources ................................................................. 178
Figure 165 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group – Resources – Display................................................. 178
Figure 166 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event ...................................................................................... 179
Figure 167 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event – Resources .................................................................. 179

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 168 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event – Resources – Display ................................................. 180
Figure 169 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail...................................................................................... 180
Figure 170 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail – Resources ................................................................. 181
Figure 171 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail – Resources – Display ................................................. 181
Figure 172 – Power Quality – Phasor Tab........................................................................................................ 182
Figure 173 – Power Quality – Phasors Tab – Resources .................................................................................. 182
Figure 174 – Power Quality – Phasors Tab – Show Columns .......................................................................... 183
Figure 175 – Power Quality – Harmonics Tab ................................................................................................. 183
Figure 176 – Power Quality – Harmonics Tab – Resources ............................................................................. 184
Figure 177 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test........................................................................................... 184
Figure 178 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Frequency .................. 185
Figure 179 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Frequency ......... 185
Figure 180 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Magnitude .................. 186
Figure 181 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Magnitude ......... 186
Figure 182 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Flicker ........................ 187
Figure 183 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Flicker ............... 187
Figure 184 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Sag ............................. 188
Figure 185 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Sag .................... 188
Figure 186 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Swell .......................... 189
Figure 187 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Swell ................. 189
Figure 188 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Interruption ................ 190
Figure 189 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Interruption ....... 190
Figure 190 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Transients ................... 191
Figure 191 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Transients .......... 191
Figure 192 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Unbalance .................. 192
Figure 193 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Unbalance ......... 192
Figure 194 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Harmonics .................. 193
Figure 195 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Harmonics ......... 193
Figure 196 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Inter-Harmonics ......... 194
Figure 197 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – Definitions – Inter-Harmonics .............................. 194
Figure 198 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Quick Change ............ 195
Figure 199 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Quick Change ......................... 195
Figure 200 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Multi-Incident ............ 196
Figure 201 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Assessment ................ 196
Figure 202 – Power Quality – Test – Test Points ............................................................................................. 197
Figure 203 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test Settings ............................................................................. 198
Figure 204 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test Settings – Direc. Generation Channel .............................. 198
Figure 205 – Power Quality – Trigger Interf. – Trigger Logic ......................................................................... 199
Figure 206 – CT – Open Settings at Star .......................................................................................................... 202
Figure 207 – CT – Main screen ........................................................................................................................ 202
Figure 208 – CT – Quick Access Bar ............................................................................................................... 203
Figure 209 – CT – General Button Resources .................................................................................................. 203
Figure 210 – CT – Home Menu ....................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 211 – CT – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation ............................................................. 204
Figure 212 – CT – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout ....................................................................... 205
Figure 213 – CT – View Menu – Windows and Layout .................................................................................. 206
Figure 214 – CT – Software Options Menu – General ..................................................................................... 207
Figure 215 – CT – Adjustments button ............................................................................................................ 207
Figure 216 – CT – Settings Screen – General .................................................................................................. 208
Figure 217 – CT – Relation and Connection Scheme ...................................................................................... 209
Figure 218 – CT – Sub-tab - Ratio ................................................................................................................... 209
Figure 219 – CT – Voltage Relation and Connection Scheme ......................................................................... 210
Figure 220 – CT – Sub tab - Relation to Voltage ............................................................................................. 210
Figure 221 – CT – Rogowski Ratio and Connection Scheme .......................................................................... 211
Figure 222 – CT – Sub tab - Rogowski Ratio .................................................................................................. 211
Figure 223 – CT – Low Power Ratio and Connection Scheme ........................................................................ 212

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 224 – CT – Sub tab - Low Power Ratio ................................................................................................ 212

Figure 225 – CT – Burden and Wiring Diagram .............................................................................................. 213
Figure 226 – CT – Sub tab– Burden ................................................................................................................. 213
Figure 227 – CT – Magnetization Curve and Connection Scheme .................................................................. 214
Figure 228 – CT – Sub tab - Magnetization Curve........................................................................................... 214
Figure 229 – CT – Winding Resistance and Connection Scheme .................................................................... 215
Figure 230 – CT – Sub tab – Winding resistance ............................................................................................. 215
Figure 231 – CT – Insulation and Connection Scheme .................................................................................... 216
Figure 232 – CT – Sub tab– Insulation............................................................................................................. 216
Figure 233 – CT – Polarity and Connection Scheme ....................................................................................... 217
Figure 234 – CT – Sub tab – Polarity ............................................................................................................... 217
Figure 235 – VT – Open Settings at Start......................................................................................................... 220
Figure 236 – VT – Main screen ........................................................................................................................ 220
Figure 237 – VT – Quick Access Bar............................................................................................................... 221
Figure 238 – VT – General Button Resources.................................................................................................. 221
Figure 239 – VT – Home Menu ....................................................................................................................... 222
Figure 240 – VT – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation ............................................................. 222
Figure 241 – VT – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout ....................................................................... 223
Figure 242 – VT – View Menu – Windows and Layout .................................................................................. 224
Figure 243 – VT – Software Options Menu – General..................................................................................... 225
Figure 244 – VT – Adjustments button ............................................................................................................ 225
Figure 245 – VT – Settings Screen – General .................................................................................................. 226
Figure 246 – VT – Relation and Connection Scheme ...................................................................................... 227
Figure 247 – VT – Sub-aba – Relationship ...................................................................................................... 227
Figure 248 – VT – Relation to Electronic Output and Connection Scheme ..................................................... 228
Figure 249 – VT – Sub tab – Relation with Electronic Output ........................................................................ 228
Figure 250 – VT – Burden and Wiring Diagram .............................................................................................. 229
Figure 251 – VT – Sub tab– Burden................................................................................................................. 229
Figure 252 – VT – Insulation and Connection Scheme .................................................................................... 230
Figure 253 – VT – Sub tab – Insulation ........................................................................................................... 230
Figure 254 – VT – Polarity and Connection Scheme ....................................................................................... 231
Figure 255 – VT – Sub tab – Polarity ............................................................................................................... 231
Figure 256 – Transformer – Open Settings at Start .......................................................................................... 234
Figure 257 – Transformer – Main screen ......................................................................................................... 234
Figure 258 – Transformer – Quick Access Bar ................................................................................................ 235
Figure 259 – Transformer – General Button Resources ................................................................................... 235
Figure 260 – Transformer – Home Menu ......................................................................................................... 236
Figure 261 – Transformer – Hardware, Results and Generation ...................................................................... 236
Figure 262 – Transformer – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout ........................................................ 237
Figure 263 – Transformer – View Menu – Windows and Layout .................................................................... 238
Figure 264 – Transformer – Software Options Menu – General ...................................................................... 239
Figure 265 – Transformer – Adjustments button ............................................................................................. 239
Figure 266 – Transformer – General Screen – Settings.................................................................................... 240
Figure 267 – Transformer – Relation and Connection Scheme ........................................................................ 241
Figure 268 – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio .................................................................................................... 241
Figure 269 – Transformer – Ratio – 3F and Connection Scheme .................................................................... 242
Figure 270 – Transformer – Sub Tab– Ratio – 3P............................................................................................ 242
Figure 271 – Transformer – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme ....................................................... 243
Figure 272 – Transformer – Sub tab– Winding resistance ............................................................................... 243
Figure 273 – Transformer – Insulation and Connection Scheme ..................................................................... 244
Figure 274 – Transformer – Sub tab– Insulation .............................................................................................. 244
Figure 275 – Resistance – Open Settings at Start ............................................................................................. 247
Figure 276 – Resistance – Main screen ............................................................................................................ 247
Figure 277 – Resistance – Quick Access Bar ................................................................................................... 248
Figure 278 – Resistance – General Button Resources ...................................................................................... 248
Figure 279 – Resistance – Home Menu ............................................................................................................ 249

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 280 – Resistance – Hardware, Results and Generation ......................................................................... 249

Figure 281 – Resistance – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout ........................................................... 250
Figure 282 – Resistance – View Menu – Windows and Layout ....................................................................... 251
Figure 283 – Resistance – Software Options Menu – General ......................................................................... 252
Figure 284 – Resistance – Adjustments button ................................................................................................ 252
Figure 285 – Resistance – Settings Screen – General ...................................................................................... 253
Figure 286 – Resistance – Micro-ohmmeter and Connection Scheme ............................................................. 254
Figure 287 – Resistance – Sub tab – Micro-ohmmeter .................................................................................... 254
Figure 288 – Resistance – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme ......................................................... 255
Figure 289 – Resistance – Sub tab – Winding resistance ................................................................................. 255
Figure 290 – PMaster – Open Settings at Start................................................................................................. 258
Figure 291 – PMaster – Main screen ................................................................................................................ 259
Figure 292 – PMaster – Quick Access Bar ....................................................................................................... 259
Figure 293 – PMaster – General Button Resources .......................................................................................... 260
Figure 294 – PMaster – Home Menu ............................................................................................................... 261
Figure 295 – PMaster – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation ..................................................... 261
Figure 296 – PMaster – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout ............................................................... 262
Figure 297 – PMaster – View Menu – Windows and Layout .......................................................................... 263
Figure 298 – PMaster – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................. 264
Figure 299 – PMaster – Adjustments button .................................................................................................... 264
Figure 300 – PMaster – Settings Screen – General .......................................................................................... 265
Figure 301 – PMaster –TC – Relation and Connection Scheme ...................................................................... 266
Figure 302 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Ratio ................................................................................................... 266
Figure 303 – PMaster –TC – Voltage Ratio and Connection Scheme.............................................................. 267
Figure 304 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Voltage Ratio ..................................................................................... 267
Figure 305 – PMaster –TC – Ratio Rogowski and Connection Scheme .......................................................... 268
Figure 306 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab– Ratio Rogowski................................................................................... 268
Figure 307 – PMaster –TC – Low Power Ratio and Connection Scheme ........................................................ 269
Figure 308 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Low Power Ratio ............................................................................... 269
Figure 309 – PMaster –TC – Burden and Connection Scheme ........................................................................ 270
Figure 310 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Burden................................................................................................ 270
Figure 311 – PMaster –TC – Magnetization Curve and Connection Scheme .................................................. 271
Figure 312 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Magnetization Curve .......................................................................... 271
Figure 313 – PMaster –TC – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme ..................................................... 272
Figure 314 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Winding resistance ............................................................................. 272
Figure 315 – PMaster –TC – Insulation and Connection Scheme .................................................................... 273
Figure 316 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Insulation ........................................................................................... 273
Figure 317 – PMaster –TC – Polarity and Connection Scheme ....................................................................... 274
Figure 318 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Polarity ............................................................................................... 274
Figure 319 – PMaster –TP – Ratio and Connection Scheme............................................................................ 275
Figure 320 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Ratio ................................................................................................... 276
Figure 321 – PMaster –TP – Ratio with Electronic Output and Connection Scheme ...................................... 276
Figure 322 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Ratio ................................................................................................... 277
Figure 323 – PMaster –TP – Burden and Connection Scheme ........................................................................ 277
Figure 324 – PMaster –TP – Sub tap – Burden ................................................................................................ 278
Figure 325 – PMaster –TP – Insulation and Connection Scheme .................................................................... 278
Figure 326 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Insulation ............................................................................................ 279
Figure 327 – PMaster –TP – Polarity and Connection Scheme........................................................................ 279
Figure 328 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab– Polarity ................................................................................................ 280
Figure 329 – PMaster – Transformer – Relation and Connection Scheme ...................................................... 281
Figure 330 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio ................................................................................... 281
Figure 331 – PMaster – Transformer – Ratio – 3P and Connection Scheme ................................................... 282
Figure 332 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio – 3P ........................................................................... 282
Figure 333 – PMaster – Transformer – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme ..................................... 283
Figure 334 – PMaster – Sub tab – Winding resistance ..................................................................................... 283
Figure 335 – PMaster – Transformer – Insulation and Connection Scheme .................................................... 284

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 336 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Insulation ............................................................................ 284

Figure 337 – PMaster – Resistance – Micro-ohmmeter and Connection Scheme ............................................ 285
Figure 338 – PMaster – Resistance – Sub tab – Micro-ohmmeter ................................................................... 286
Figure 339 – PMaster – Resistance – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme ........................................ 286
Figure 340 – PMaster – Resistance – Sub tab – Winding resistance ................................................................ 287
Figure 341 – Description of Hardware Configuration Standard Mode ............................................................ 289
Figure 342 – Config description of external TP and TC .................................................................................. 290
Figure 343 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with free analog outputs ......................................... 290
Figure 344 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. CONPROVE ............................. 291
Figure 345 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. Output set p / user ..................... 292
Figure 346 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode w / Amplif. User defined input extension .............. 293
Figure 347 – Hardware Configurations – Description of Hardware Configuration Standard Mode ................ 294
Figure 348 – Hardware Configurations – Configuration Description of external TP and CT .......................... 295
Figure 349 – Hardware Configurations – Work mode with Amplif. Ext. CONPROVE .................................. 296
Figure 350 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. Output set for user..................... 297
Figure 351 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode w / Amplif. User defined input extension .............. 298
Figure 352 – Description of the Output Channel Direction parameters ........................................................... 299
Figure 353 – Targeting the Output Channels ................................................................................................... 300
Figure 354 – Sum of Channels - Part 1 ............................................................................................................ 301
Figure 355 – Sum of Channels - Part 2 ............................................................................................................ 301
Figure 356 – Sum of Channels Configuration .................................................................................................. 302
Figure 357 – Sum of Channels - NO03 ............................................................................................................ 302
Figure 358 – Direction of binary outputs and outputs by GOOSE message .................................................... 303
Figure 359 – Direction of binary outputs and outputs by GOOSE message .................................................... 304
Figure 360 – Description of General Information ............................................................................................ 305
Figure 361 – Description of Systems ............................................................................................................... 306
Figure 362 – Impedance Description................................................................................................................ 306
Figure 363 – Representation of the Source....................................................................................................... 307
Figure 364 – Description of the Notes & Obs fields ........................................................................................ 307
Figure 365 – Description of the "Explanatory Figures" fields ......................................................................... 308
Figure 366 – Description of the Check List...................................................................................................... 309
Figure 367 – Description of the "Others" tab ................................................................................................... 309
Figure 368 – Software tab settings ................................................................................................................... 310
Figure 369 – Report tab settings ....................................................................................................................... 311
Figure 370 – Graphics tab settings ................................................................................................................... 311
Figure 371 – Settings of the Default Values tab ............................................................................................... 312
Figure 372 – Access to the "Data Association" resource ................................................................................. 313
Figure 373 – Data Association Features ........................................................................................................... 313
Figure 374 – Settings of Messages GOOSE ..................................................................................................... 315
Figure 375 – GOOSE Message Settings - General Setting .............................................................................. 316
Figure 376 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Receive Attribute ...................................................................... 316
Figure 377 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Send Attribute ........................................................................... 317
Figure 378 – Settings of GOOSE messages - GOOSE messages ..................................................................... 317
Figure 379 – Settings of GOOSE messages - IED parameters ......................................................................... 318
Figure 380 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Map IED parameters ................................................................. 319
Figure 381 – TTL mapping on GOOSE Receipt .............................................................................................. 320
Figure 382 – TTL Monitoring Demo ............................................................................................................... 320
Figure 383 – SMV Message Settings ............................................................................................................... 321
Figure 384 – SMV Message Settings - General Settings.................................................................................. 322
Figure 385 – Settings of Messages SMV - Receive SMV ................................................................................ 322
Figure 386 – SMV Message Settings - SMV Receive Error Handling ............................................................ 323
Figure 387 – Settings of Messages SMV - Send SMV ..................................................................................... 323
Figure 388 – SMV Message Settings - SMV Send Error Simulation ............................................................... 324
Figure 389 – Settings of Messages SMV - Posts Sampled Values ................................................................... 324
Figure 390 – Example of Quality Bits Configuration....................................................................................... 327
Figure 391 – Settings of Messages SMV - IED parameters ............................................................................. 327

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 392 – Multim – Open Settings at Start .................................................................................................. 329

Figure 393 – Multim – Main screen ................................................................................................................. 330
Figure 394 – Multim – Quick Access Bar ........................................................................................................ 330
Figure 395 – Multim – General Button Resources ........................................................................................... 331
Figure 396 – Multim – Home Menu ................................................................................................................. 331
Figure 397 – Multim – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation ...................................................... 332
Figure 398 – Multim – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ...................................................... 333
Figure 399 – Multim – View Menu – Windows and Layout ............................................................................ 334
Figure 400 – Multim – Software Options Menu – General .............................................................................. 335
Figure 401 – Multim – Adjustments button ..................................................................................................... 335
Figure 402 – Multim – Settings Screen – General............................................................................................ 336
Figure403 – Manual – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ................................................................ 336
Figure 404 – Multim – Binary Input, GOOSE and An. DC ............................................................................. 337
Figure 405 – Multim – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................................ 338
Figure 406 – Multim – Binary Input, GOOSE and An. DC ............................................................................. 338
Figure 407 – Multim – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................... 339
Figure 408 – Multim – Phasor Tab- Resources ................................................................................................ 340
Figure 409 – Multim – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ............................................................ 340
Figure 410 – Multim – Harmonics Tab ............................................................................................................ 341
Figure 411 – Multim – Harmonics Tab – Resources ........................................................................................ 341
Figure 412 – Multim – Evaluation Tab ............................................................................................................ 342
Figure 413 – Multim – Evaluation Tab – Resources ........................................................................................ 342
Figure 414 – Transient – Open Settings at Start ............................................................................................... 344
Figure 415 – Transient – Main screen .............................................................................................................. 345
Figure 416 – Transient – Quick Access Bar ..................................................................................................... 345
Figure 417 – Transient – General Button Resources ........................................................................................ 346
Figure 418 – Transient – Home Menu.............................................................................................................. 346
Figure 419 – Transient – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence ................................................................... 347
Figure 420 – Transient – Home Menu – Result and Generation ...................................................................... 347
Figure 421 – Transient – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ................................................... 348
Figure 422 – Transient – View Menu – Windows and Layout ......................................................................... 349
Figure 423 – Transient – Software Options Menu – General ........................................................................... 349
Figure 424 – Transient – Adjustments button .................................................................................................. 350
Figure 425 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – General ................................................................................... 351
Figure 426 – Transient – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ............................................................ 352
Figure 427 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone ...................................................... 353
Figure 430 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area .......................................... 356
Figure 431 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone ................................ 357
Figure 432 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems ......................................................... 358
Figure 433 – Transient – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 1 .............................................. 358
Figure 434 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2 ............................................ 359
Figure 435 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment ......................... 360
Figure 436 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1 ........... 360
Figure 440 – Transient – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Two Nodes and three Sequences ............................. 362
Figure 441 – Transient – Sequence Tab ........................................................................................................... 362
Figure 442 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Channel targeting ........................................................................... 363
Figure 443 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Channel targeting ........................................................................... 364
Figure 444 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description ....................... 365
Figure 445 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description .............................. 365
Figure 446 – Transient – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description ............................ 366
Figure 447 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Sub tab Time and Advance – General Description ........................ 366

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 448 – Transient – Waveform Tab ......................................................................................................... 367

Figure 449 – Transient – Waveform Tab - Resources ...................................................................................... 367
Figure 450 – Transient – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ......................................................................... 368
Figure 451 – Transient – Phasor Tab................................................................................................................ 368
Figure 452 – Transient – Phasor Tab- Resources ............................................................................................. 369
Figure 453 – Transient – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ......................................................... 369
Figure 454 – Transient – Trajectories tab ......................................................................................................... 370
Figure 455 – Transient – Trajectories tab – Resources .................................................................................... 370
Figure 456 – Transient – Harmonics Tab ......................................................................................................... 371
Figure 457 – Transient – Harmonics Tab – Resources ..................................................................................... 371
Figure 458 – Transient – Synchronoscope tab ................................................................................................. 372
Figure 459 – Transient – Plane Z Tab .............................................................................................................. 372
Figure 460 – Transient – Plane Z Tab – Resources .......................................................................................... 373
Figure 461 – Transient – Plane Z Tab – Resources .......................................................................................... 373
Figure 462 – Sequenc – Open Settings at Start ................................................................................................ 375
Figure 463 – Sequenc – Main screen................................................................................................................ 376
Figure 464 – Sequenc – Quick Access Bar ...................................................................................................... 376
Figure 465 – Sequenc – General Button Resources ......................................................................................... 377
Figure 466 – Sequenc – Home Menu ............................................................................................................... 377
Figure 467 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence ..................................................................... 378
Figure 468 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Result and Generation ........................................................................ 378
Figure 469 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................... 379
Figure 470 – Sequenc – View Menu – Windows and Layout .......................................................................... 380
Figure 471 – Sequenc – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................ 380
Figure 472 – Sequenc – Adjustments button .................................................................................................... 381
Figure 473 – Sequenc – Adjustment – General screen ..................................................................................... 382
Figure 474 – Sequenc – Parameters screen – Distance – Adjustment .............................................................. 383
Figure 475 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 1 .......................................... 384
Figure 478 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area ............................................ 387
Figure 479 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert - Quadrilateral Zone ................................... 388
Figure 480 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen – Synchronism – System ............................................................. 388
Figure 481 – Sequenc – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1 ............................................. 389
Figure 482 – Sequenc – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2 ............................................. 390
Figure 483 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment ............................. 391
Figure 484 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment – Part 1 ................ 391
Figure 488 – Sequenc – Sequence tab – NO sub tab – Two Nodes and three sequences ................................. 393
Figure 489 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Direct Mode Description ........................................... 394
Figure 490 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 1 ........................................................................... 394
Figure 492 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Harmonic mode ..................................... 396
Figure 495 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description interharmonic mode ............................... 397
Figure 498 – Sequenc – NO sub tab – Description of the Symmetric Components Mode ............................... 399
Figure 500 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of Phase-to-Phase Mode ........................ 400
Figure 502 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Mode Power ........................................... 401

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 504 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Fault Mode ............................................. 402
Figure 505 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 10 ......................................................................... 402
Figure 506 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Constant ZI Mode .................................. 403
Figure 508 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Constant ZV Mode................................. 404
Figure 510 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Z mode description – constant source ....................... 405
Figure 512 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Z Mode - Smart............................ 406
Figure 514 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Standby Mode .............................. 407
Figure 517 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Accommodation Mode ................ 409
Figure 518 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description ........................ 409
Figure 519 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description ................................ 409
Figure 520 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description.............................. 410
Figure 521 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description .......................... 410
Figure 522 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab ........................................................................................................... 411
Figure 523 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources ....................................................................................... 411
Figure 524 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – View .......................................................................... 412
Figure 525 – Sequenc – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................. 412
Figure 526 – Sequenc – Phasor Tab – Resources ............................................................................................. 413
Figure 527 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns .......................................................... 413
Figure 528 – Sequenc – Trajectories tab .......................................................................................................... 414
Figure 529 – Sequenc – Trajectories tab – Resources ...................................................................................... 414
Figure 530 – Sequenc – Harmonics Tab........................................................................................................... 415
Figure 531 – Sequenc – Harmonics Tab – Resources ...................................................................................... 415
Figure 532 – Sequenc – Synchronoscope tab ................................................................................................... 416
Figure 533 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab ................................................................................................................ 417
Figure 534 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab – Resources ........................................................................................... 417
Figure 535 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab – Resources ........................................................................................... 418
Figure 536 – Rampa – Open Settings at Start................................................................................................... 420
Figure 537 – Rampa – Main screen .................................................................................................................. 421
Figure 538 – Rampa – Quick Access Bar ......................................................................................................... 421
Figure 539 – Rampa – General Button Resources ............................................................................................ 422
Figure 540 – Rampa – Home Menu ................................................................................................................. 422
Figure 541 – Rampa – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence ....................................................................... 423
Figure 542 – Rampa – Home Menu – Result and Generation .......................................................................... 423
Figure 543 – Rampa – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ...................................................... 424
Figure 544 – Rampa – View Menu – Windows and Layout ............................................................................ 425
Figure 545 – Rampa – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................... 425
Figure 546 – Rampa – Adjustments button ...................................................................................................... 426
Figure 547 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - General ....................................................................................... 427
Figure 548 – Rampa – Parameters screen – Distance – Adjustment ................................................................ 428
Figure 549 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 1 ............................................ 429
Figure 550 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 2 ............................................ 430
Figure 551 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert - Zone ........................................................... 431
Figure 552 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area .............................................. 432
Figure 553 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone.................................... 433
Figure 554 – Rampa – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Systems ............................................................... 433
Figure 555 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1................................................ 434
Figure 556 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2.................................................. 435
Figure 557 – Rampa – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment ................................ 436
Figure 558 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Adjust Synchronization - Part 1 ......................... 436

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 562 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Two Nodes and three Sequences ............................ 438
Figure 563 – Rampa – Sequence Tab ............................................................................................................... 438
Figure 564 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Module mode ..................................................... 439
Figure 565 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Angle mode........................................................ 440
Figure 566 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in order Frequency ................................................. 441
Figure 567 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources in the way and Angle Module .......................................... 442
Figure 568 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Module and Frequency mode ............................ 443
Figure 569 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in dF/dt mode ......................................................... 444
Figure 570 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in order Symmetrical Component .......................... 445
Figure 571 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Phase-phase mode .............................................. 446
Figure 572 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Power mode ....................................................... 447
Figure 573 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in mode impedance Icc and Zlin ............................ 448
Figure 574 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp mode impedance at Vcc and Zlin ........................... 449
Figure 575 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp mode impedance in SIR and Zlin........................... 450
Figure 576 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – DC Analog Outputs sub tab – General Description ........................... 451
Figure 577 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description .................................. 451
Figure 578 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description ................................ 452
Figure 579 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Sub tab Time and Advance – General Description ............................ 452
Figure 580 – Rampa – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................................. 453
Figure 581 – Rampa – Waveform Tab - Resources.......................................................................................... 453
Figure 582 – Rampa – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ............................................................................. 454
Figure 583 – Rampa – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................... 454
Figure 584 – Rampa – Phasor Tab- Resources ................................................................................................. 455
Figure 585 – Rampa – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns............................................................. 455
Figure 586 – Rampa – Trajectories tab ............................................................................................................ 456
Figure 587 – Rampa – Trajectories tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 456
Figure 588 – Rampa – Harmonics Tab ............................................................................................................. 457
Figure 589 – Rampa – Harmonics Tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 457
Figure 590 – Rampa – Synchronoscope tab ..................................................................................................... 458
Figure 591 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab .................................................................................................................. 458
Figure 592 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab - Resources .............................................................................................. 459
Figure 593 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab - Resources .............................................................................................. 459
Figure 594 – Master – Open Settings at Start ................................................................................................... 461
Figure 595 – Master – Main screen .................................................................................................................. 462
Figure 596 – Master – Quick Access Bar ......................................................................................................... 462
Figure 597 – Master – Resources General Button ............................................................................................ 463
Figure 598 – Master – Home Menu.................................................................................................................. 463
Figure 599 – Master – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence ....................................................................... 464
Figure 600 – Master – Home Menu – Result and Generation .......................................................................... 464
Figure 601 – Master – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ....................................................... 465
Figure 602 – Master – View Menu – Windows and Layout............................................................................. 466
Figure 603 – Master – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................... 466
Figure 604 – Master – Adjustments button ...................................................................................................... 467
Figure 605 – Master – Adjustment Screen – General ....................................................................................... 468
Figure 606 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ................................................................ 469
Figure 607 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone ...... 470
Figure 608 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone ...... 471
Figure 609 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone .......................................................... 472
Figure 610 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area .............................................. 473
Figure 611 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone .................................... 474
Figure 612 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems ............................................................. 475
Figure 613 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1 ................................................ 475
Figure 614 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2 ................................................ 476
Figure 615 – Master – Adjustment screen – Synchronism – Synchronization adjustment............................... 477

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 616 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1 ............... 477
Figure 620 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Two Nodes and three Sequences ............................. 479
Figure 621 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Description of the direct mode ................................. 480
Figure 622 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 1.............................................................................. 480
Figure 624 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Harmonics mode ....................... 482
Figure 627 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Interharmonic mode description .............................. 483
Figure 630 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Symmetric Components Mode . 485
Figure 632 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Phase-to-Phase Mode ................ 486
Figure 634 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Power Mode .............................. 487
Figure 636 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Fault Mode ................................. 488
Figure 637 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 10............................................................................ 488
Figure 638 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Constant ZI Mode ....................... 489
Figure 640 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Constant ZV Mode ..................... 490
Figure 642 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Z mode – constant source ......... 491
Figure 643 – Master – Sequence Tab - Resources– Part 13 ............................................................................. 491
Figure 644 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Z Mode - Smart .......................... 492
Figure 646 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Standby Mode............................. 493
Figure 649 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Accommodation Mode ............... 494
Figure 650 – Master – Sequence Tab ............................................................................................................... 495
Figure 651 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in Module mode ................................................ 496
Figure 652 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in the Angle mode ......................................... 497
Figure 653 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in order Frequency ........................................ 498
Figure 654 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp on the way and Angle Module ...................... 499
Figure 655 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in mode Module and Frequency ........................ 500
Figure 656 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in mode dF/dt ................................................ 501
Figure 657 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in mode Symmetrical Component ................. 502
Figure 658 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in the Phase-to-Phase Mode .......................... 503
Figure 659 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in Power Mode .................................................. 504
Figure 660 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in Impedance Icc and Zlin mode ................... 505
Figure 661 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in Vcc and Zlin Impedance mode ................. 506
Figure 662 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in SIR and Zlin Impedance mode .................. 507
Figure 663 – Master – Sequence Tab ............................................................................................................... 508
Figure 664 – Master – Sequence Tab – Channel Direction .............................................................................. 509
Figure 665 – Master – Sequence Tab – Channel Direction .............................................................................. 510
Figure 666 – Master – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description ........................... 511
Figure 667 – Master – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description .................................. 511
Figure 668 – Master – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs Sub tab – General Description ............................... 512
Figure 669 – Master – Sequence Tab –Time and Advance Sub tab – General Description ............................. 512
Figure 670 – Master – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................................. 513
Figure 671 – Master – Waveform Tab - Resources .......................................................................................... 513

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 672 – Master – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ............................................................................. 514

Figure 673 – Master – Phasor Tab.................................................................................................................... 514
Figure 674 – Master – Phasor Tab- Resources ................................................................................................. 515
Figure 675 – Master – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ............................................................. 515
Figure 676 – Master – Trajectories tab ............................................................................................................. 516
Figure 677 – Master – Trajectories tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 516
Figure 678 – Master – Harmonics Tab ............................................................................................................. 517
Figure 679 – Master – Harmonics Tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 517
Figure 680 – Master – Synchronoscope tab ..................................................................................................... 518
Figure 681 – Master – Plane Z Tab .................................................................................................................. 519
Figure 682 – Master – Plane Z Tab - Resources............................................................................................... 519
Figure 683 – Master – Plane Z Tab - Resources............................................................................................... 520
Figure 684 – Sobrecor – Open Settings at Start ............................................................................................... 522
Figure 685 – Sobrecor – Settings Screen .......................................................................................................... 523
Figure 686 – Sobrecor – Quick Access Bar...................................................................................................... 523
Figure 687 – Sobrecor – Resources General Button......................................................................................... 524
Figure 688 – Sobrecor – Home Menu .............................................................................................................. 524
Figure 689 – Sobrecor – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation ................................................................. 525
Figure 690 – Sobrecor – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ................................................... 526
Figure 691 – Sobrecor – View Menu – Windows and Layout ......................................................................... 527
Figure 692 – Sobrecor – Software Options Menu – General............................................................................ 527
Figure 693 – Sobrecor – Adjustments button ................................................................................................... 528
Figure 694 – Sobrecor – Definitions ................................................................................................................ 529
Figure 695 – Sobrecor – Overcurrent elements - Characteristic Total ............................................................. 530
Figure 696 – Sobrecor – overcurrent elements – Single Characteristic ............................................................ 531
Figure 697 – Sobrecor – overcurrent elements - Individual Directionality ...................................................... 532
Figure 698 – Sobrecor – Overcurrent Chart Tab .............................................................................................. 533
Figure 699 – Sobrecor – Graphic tab maximized ............................................................................................. 533
Figure 700 – Sobrecor – Graphics Tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 534
Figure 701 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab .......................................................................................................... 534
Figure 702 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab - Resources ...................................................................................... 535
Figure 703 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab – Resources - View .......................................................................... 535
Figure 704 – Sobrecor – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................ 536
Figure 705 – Sobrecor – Phasor Tab- Resources .............................................................................................. 536
Figure 706 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ......................................................... 537
Figure 707 – Sobrecor – Synchronism Tab ...................................................................................................... 537
Figure 708 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test ........................................................................................ 538
Figure 709 – Sobrecor – Main screen –Pickup Test - Options ......................................................................... 539
Figure 710 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Test Points .................................................................. 539
Figure 711 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Insert / Edit Points ...................................................... 540
Figure 712 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – General Options .......................................................... 540
Figure 713 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Overcurrent Graph ...................................................... 541
Figure 714 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Legend ........................................................................ 541
Figure 715 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test........................................................................................... 542
Figure 716 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Options .......................................................................... 543
Figure 717 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Test set Points ............................................................... 543
Figure 718 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Insert / Edit Lines .......................................................... 544
Figure 719 – Sobrecor – Main screen –Time Test – General Options ............................................................. 544
Figure 720 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – General Options - Sequenc ............................................ 545
Figure 721 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Overcurrent Graph ........................................................ 545
Figure 722 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Legend ........................................................................... 546
Figure 723 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings ...................................................................................... 546
Figure 724 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channels – Pre-Simulation and
Post-Simulation ................................................................................................................................................ 547
Figure 725 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary and
GOOSE Outputs. .............................................................................................................................................. 547

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 726 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Adjustments .............................................................. 548
Figure 727 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Other Adjustments .................................................... 548
Figure 728 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings –Interfaces.................................................................... 549
Figure 729 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Pickup Limits ............................................................ 549
Figure 730 – Diferenc – Open Settings at Start ................................................................................................ 551
Figure 731 – Diferenc – Main screen ............................................................................................................... 552
Figure 732 – Diferenc – Quick Access Bar ...................................................................................................... 552
Figure 733 – Diferenc – Resources General Button ......................................................................................... 553
Figure 734 – Diferenc – Home Menu ............................................................................................................... 554
Figure 735 – Diferenc – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation .................................................................. 555
Figure 736 – Diferenc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................... 556
Figure 737 – Diferenc – View Menu – Windows and Layout .......................................................................... 557
Figure 738 – Diferenc – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................ 557
Figure 739 – Diferenc – Adjustments button ................................................................................................... 558
Figure 740 – Diferenc – Adjustment Screen – General .................................................................................... 559
Figure 741 – Diferenc – Protect Equipment – Differential – Settings .............................................................. 560
Figure 742 – Diferenc – Adjust Prot. Differential – Differential – Adjustment ............................................... 561
Figure 743 – Diferenc – Adjust Prot. Differential – Differential – Slope Definition ....................................... 562
Figure 744 – Diferenc – Maximized Systems Tab ........................................................................................... 563
Figure 745 – Diferenc – Relay Details tab ....................................................................................................... 564
Figure 746 – Diferenc – Graphic Tab ............................................................................................................... 564
Figure 747 – Diferenc – Graphic tab maximized. ............................................................................................ 565
Figure 748 – Diferenc – Graph Tab - Resources .............................................................................................. 565
Figure 749 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab........................................................................................................... 566
Figure 750 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab - Resources ....................................................................................... 566
Figure 751 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab – Resources - Display....................................................................... 567
Figure 752 – Diferenc – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................. 567
Figure 753 – Diferenc – Phasor Tab- Resources .............................................................................................. 568
Figure 754 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns .......................................................... 568
Figure 755 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set .............................................................................................. 570
Figure 756 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Insert / Edit Points ............................................................. 570
Figure 757 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Test sets Points .................................................................. 571
Figure 758 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – General options – Short current ........................................ 572
Figure 759 – Diferenc –General Options – Winding Current ........................................................................... 573
Figure 760 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set –General Options – IDif and IRest....................................... 573
Figure 761 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – System............................................................................... 574
Figure 762 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Relay Details (Diagram) ................................................... 574
Figure 763 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Characteristic .................................................................... 575
Figure 764 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Waveform ......................................................................... 575
Figure 765 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test – Phasors .................................................................................... 576
Figure 766 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test ........................................................................................... 577
Figure 767 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test– Test set Points ................................................................. 577
Figure 768 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points ......................................................... 578
Figure 769 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test - General Options.............................................................. 578
Figure 770 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test – Characteristic ................................................................. 579
Figure 771 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test......................................................................................... 580
Figure 772 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test......................................................................................... 580
Figure 773 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points ............................................................. 581
Figure 774 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points ....................................................... 581
Figure 775 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – General Options .......................................................... 582
Figure 776 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Characteristic............................................................... 582
Figure 777 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings....................................................................................... 583
Figure 778 – Diferenc – Main screen – Generation Channels Direc – Current ................................................ 584
Figure 779 – Diferenc – Main screen – Pre-Fault Time and Binary Outputs and GOOSE .............................. 585
Figure 780 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings – Interfaces ................................................................... 585
Figure 781 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings....................................................................................... 586

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 782 – RestHarm – Open Settings at Start .............................................................................................. 588

Figure 783 – RestHarm – Settings Screen ........................................................................................................ 589
Figure 784 – RestHarm – Quick Access Bar. ................................................................................................... 589
Figure 785 – RestHarm – Resources General Button ....................................................................................... 590
Figure 786 – RestHarm – Home Menu ............................................................................................................ 590
Figure 787 – RestHarm – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation................................................................ 591
Figure 788 – RestHarm – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................. 592
Figure 789 – RestHarm – View Menu – Windows and Layout ....................................................................... 593
Figure 790 – RestHarm – Software Options Menu – General .......................................................................... 593
Figure 791 – RestHarm – Adjustments button ................................................................................................. 594
Figure 792 – RestHarm – Adjustment Screen – General.................................................................................. 595
Figure 793 – RestHarm – Parameters Screen - Harmonic Restriction - Adjustment ........................................ 596
Figure 794 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab ........................................................................................................ 597
Figure 795 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab - Resources ..................................................................................... 597
Figure 796 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display .................................................................... 598
Figure 797 – RestHarm – Phasor Tab .............................................................................................................. 598
Figure 798 – RestHarm – Phasor Tab- Resources ............................................................................................ 599
Figure 799 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ........................................................ 599
Figure 800 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test ......................................................................................... 600
Figure 801 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test ......................................................................................... 600
Figure 802 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points ....................................................... 601
Figure 803 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – General Options ........................................................... 601
Figure 804 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – Characteristic ............................................................... 602
Figure 805 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test ...................................................................................... 603
Figure 806 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test ...................................................................................... 603
Figure 807 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points ........................................................... 604
Figure 808 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points ..................................................... 604
Figure 809 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Characteristic ............................................................ 605
Figure 810 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test ............................................................................... 605
Figure 811 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Test set Points .................................................... 606
Figure 812 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Insert / Edit Points .............................................. 606
Figure 813 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – General Options ................................................. 607
Figure 814 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Characteristic ..................................................... 607
Figure 815 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel ............................ 608
Figure 816 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – Binary Outputs & GOOSE ...................................... 609
Figure 817 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings –Interfaces .................................................................. 609
Figure 818 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – General Settings ...................................................... 610
Figure 819 – DirecPot – Open Settings at Start ................................................................................................ 612
Figure 820 – DirecPot – Settings Screen .......................................................................................................... 613
Figure 821 – DirecPot – Quick Access Bar ...................................................................................................... 613
Figure 822 – DirecPot – Resources General Button ......................................................................................... 614
Figure 823 – DirecPot – Home Menu .............................................................................................................. 614
Figure 824 – DirecPot – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation.................................................................. 615
Figure 825 – DirecPot – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................... 616
Figure 826 – DirecPot – View Menu – Windows and Layout ......................................................................... 617
Figure 827 – DirecPot – Software Options Menu – General ............................................................................ 617
Figure 828 – DirecPot – Adjustments button ................................................................................................... 618
Figure 829 – DirecPot – Settings ...................................................................................................................... 619
Figure 830 – DirecPot – Directional Power Elements ...................................................................................... 620
Figure 831 – DirecPot – Graphic tab ................................................................................................................ 620
Figure 832 – DirecPot – Maximized Graph Tab .............................................................................................. 621
Figure 833 – DirecPot – Graphic Tab - Resources ........................................................................................... 621
Figure 834 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab .......................................................................................................... 622
Figure 835 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources ...................................................................................... 622
Figure 836 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display ...................................................................... 623
Figure 837 – DirecPot – Phasor Tab ................................................................................................................ 623

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 838 – DirecPot – Phasor Tab- Resources .............................................................................................. 624

Figure 839 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns .......................................................... 624
Figure 840 – DirecPot – Trajectories tab .......................................................................................................... 625
Figure 841 – DirecPot – Trajectories tab - Resources ...................................................................................... 625
Figure 842 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting ............................................................................................. 626
Figure 843 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Options ............................................................................ 626
Figure 844 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Test set Points ................................................................. 627
Figure 845 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Insert / Edit Points ........................................................... 627
Figure 846 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – New Point .......................................... 628
Figure 847 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – Sequence ............................................ 628
Figure 848 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Graph ............................................................................... 629
Figure 849 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting –Legend .............................................................................. 629
Figure 850 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test ........................................................................................ 630
Figure 851 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test– Options ......................................................................... 630
Figure 852 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points ............................................................. 631
Figure 853 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines ........................................................ 631
Figure 854 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – General Options .......................................................... 632
Figure 855 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence ........................................ 632
Figure 856 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Graph .......................................................................... 633
Figure 857 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Legend ........................................................................ 633
Figure 858 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route ................................................................................................. 634
Figure 859 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route– Options .................................................................................. 634
Figure 860 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Test set Points ...................................................................... 635
Figure 861 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Insert / Edit Lines ................................................................. 635
Figure 862 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – General Options ................................................................... 636
Figure 863 – DirecPot – Main screen –Route – Graph..................................................................................... 636
Figure 864 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Legend .................................................................................. 637
Figure 865 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings ...................................................................................... 638
Figure 866 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel – Pre -Simulation and
Post -Simulation ............................................................................................................................................... 638
Figure 867 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary and
GOOSE Outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 639
Figure 868 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Test Mode ................................................................. 639
Figure 869 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test ................................................................ 640
Figure 870 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces ....................................................... 640
Figure 871 – Distanc – Open Settings at Start .................................................................................................. 642
Figure 872 – Distanc – Settings Screen ............................................................................................................ 643
Figure 873 – Distanc – Quick Access Bar ........................................................................................................ 643
Figure 874 – Distanc – Resources General Button ........................................................................................... 644
Figure 875 – Distanc – Home Menu ................................................................................................................ 644
Figure 876 – Distanc – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation ................................................................... 645
Figure 877 – Distanc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ...................................................... 646
Figure 878 – Distanc – View Menu – Windows and Layout ........................................................................... 647
Figure 879 – Distanc – Software Options Menu – General .............................................................................. 647
Figure 880 – Distanc – Adjustments button ..................................................................................................... 648
Figure 881 – Distanc – Adjustment Screen – General...................................................................................... 649
Figure 882 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ............................................................... 650
Figure 883 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone ..... 651
Figure 886 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 654
Figure 887 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral
Zone .................................................................................................................................................................. 655
Figure 888 – Distanc – Graph Tab ................................................................................................................... 656
Figure 889 – Distanc – Maximized Graph Tab ................................................................................................ 656

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 890 – Distanc – Graph Tab - Resources ................................................................................................ 657

Figure 891 – Distanc – Graph Tab ................................................................................................................... 658
Figure 892 – Distanc – Zxt Tab – Resources ................................................................................................... 658
Figure 893 – Distanc – Trajectories tab............................................................................................................ 659
Figure 894 – Distanc – Trajectories tab - Resources ........................................................................................ 659
Figure 895 – Distanc – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................................ 660
Figure 896 – Distanc – Waveform Tab - Resources ......................................................................................... 660
Figure 897 – Distanc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display ........................................................................ 661
Figure 898 – Distanc – Phasor Tab .................................................................................................................. 661
Figure 899 – Distanc – Phasor Tab- Resources ................................................................................................ 662
Figure 900 – Distanc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ............................................................ 662
Figure 901 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test ............................................................................................. 663
Figure 902 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test –Test set Points Options ..................................................... 664
Figure 903 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test– Test set Points................................................................... 664
Figure 904 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points ........................................................... 665
Figure 905 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test - General Options ............................................................... 665
Figure 906 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test –Graph ................................................................................ 666
Figure 907 – Distanc – Main screen – Remove Points ..................................................................................... 667
Figure 908 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test .......................................................................................... 668
Figure 909 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points ............................................................... 668
Figure 910 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points ......................................................... 669
Figure 911 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – General Options ............................................................ 669
Figure 912 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Graph ............................................................................ 670
Figure 913 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings ........................................................................................ 671
Figure 914 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channel..................................... 671
Figure 915 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Relationship between CTs and TPs - Polarities of CTs
and TPs ............................................................................................................................................................. 672
Figure 916 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Fault, Post-Fault Time and Binary
and GOOSE Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 672
Figure 917 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Pickup Generation Limits - Test Mode ....................... 673
Figure 918 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test .......................................................................................... 673
Figure 919 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Interface –Fault Start ................................................... 674
Figure 920 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Advanced Parameters .................................................. 674
Figure 921 – PSB_OoS Open Settings at Start ................................................................................................. 676
Figure 922 – PSB_OoS – Main screen ............................................................................................................. 677
Figure 923 – PSB_OoS – Quick Access Bar .................................................................................................... 677
Figure 924 – PSB_OoS – Resources General Button ....................................................................................... 678
Figure 925 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu ............................................................................................................ 678
Figure 926 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation................................................................ 679
Figure 927 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................. 680
Figure 928 – PSB_OoS – View Menu – Windows and Layout ....................................................................... 681
Figure 929 – PSB_OoS – Software Options Menu – General .......................................................................... 681
Figure 930 – PSB_OoS – Adjustments button ................................................................................................. 682
Figure 931 – PSB_OoS – Adjustment Screen – General.................................................................................. 683
Figure 932 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ........................................................... 684
Figure 933 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone . 685
Figure 936 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn
Area .................................................................................................................................................................. 688
Figure 937 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone
Quadrilateral ..................................................................................................................................................... 689
Figure 938 – PSB_OoS – System ..................................................................................................................... 690
Figure 939 – PSB_OoS – System – System ..................................................................................................... 690
Figure 940 – PSB_OoS – System – Fault ......................................................................................................... 691
Figure 941 – PSB_OoS – System – Fault ......................................................................................................... 691

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 942 – PSB_OoS – System – Location of the Relay in the System ........................................................ 692
Figure 943 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab ........................................................................................................ 692
Figure 944 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab - Resources ..................................................................................... 693
Figure 945 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ........................................................................ 693
Figure 946 – PSB_OoS – Phasor Tab .............................................................................................................. 694
Figure 947 – PSB_OoS – Phasor Tab- Resources ............................................................................................ 694
Figure 948 – PSB_OoS – Resources – Show Columns .................................................................................... 695
Figure 949 – PSB_OoS – Trajectories tab ........................................................................................................ 695
Figure 950 – PSB_OoS – Trajectories tab - Resources .................................................................................... 696
Figure 951 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation Test ................................................................... 697
Figure 952 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Options Oscillations Test set ......................... 697
Figure 953 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation– Result Test set Oscillations............................. 698
Figure 954 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Oscillations ................................ 698
Figure 955 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation - General Options - Synchronous ..................... 699
Figure 956 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation - General Options - Asynchronous ................... 699
Figure 957 – PSB_OoS –Sequence .................................................................................................................. 700
Figure 958 – PSB_OoS – Define Sequence ..................................................................................................... 700
Figure 959 – PSB_OoS – System Simulation - System ................................................................................... 701
Figure 960 – PSB_OoS – System Simulation – Sequence – Points Created .................................................... 701
Figure 961 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation ...................................................................... 702
Figure 962 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation – Test set Trajectory Options ....................... 702
Figure 963 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation – Result of Trajectories Test set .................. 703
Figure 964 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Trajectories ................................ 703
Figure 965 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Trajectory ........................ 704
Figure 966 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – System ............................. 704
Figure 967 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Fault................................. 705
Figure 968 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Evaluation........................ 705
Figure 969 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings .................................................................................... 706
Figure 970 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel – Pre-Simulation and
Post-Simulation ................................................................................................................................................ 707
Figure 971 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Ratio between CTs and TPs - Polarities of CTs and
TPs.................................................................................................................................................................... 707
Figure 972 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre- Simulation, Post- Simulation Time and Binary
Outputs and GOOSE ........................................................................................................................................ 708
Figure 973 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces ..................................................... 708
Figure 974 – Synchronism – Open Settings at Start ......................................................................................... 710
Figure 975 – Synchronism – Settings Screen ................................................................................................... 711
Figure 976 – Synchronism – Quick Access Bar ............................................................................................... 711
Figure 977 – Synchronism – Resources General Button .................................................................................. 712
Figure 978 – Synchronism – Home Menu ........................................................................................................ 712
Figure 979 – Synchronism – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation ........................................................... 713
Figure 980 – Synchronism – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ............................................. 714
Figure 981 – Synchronism – View Menu – Windows and Layout ................................................................... 715
Figure 982 – Synchronism – Software Options Menu – General ..................................................................... 715
Figure 983 – Synchronism – Adjustments button ............................................................................................ 716
Figure984 - Synchronism – Adjustment Screen – General – General Information. ......................................... 716
Figure 985 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen – General - Systems ............................................................ 717
Figure 986 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems .................................................... 718
Figure 987 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems – Part 1 ...................................... 719
Figure 988 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2 ........................................ 719
Figure 989 – Synchronism – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment ...................... 720
Figure 990 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Sync Settings – Part 1 .............................. 720
Figure 994 – Synchronism – Graph Tab .......................................................................................................... 722

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 995 – Synchronism – Maximized Graph Tab ....................................................................................... 722

Figure 996 – Synchronism – Graph Tab - Resources ....................................................................................... 723
Figure 997 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab ................................................................................................... 724
Figure 998 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab - Resources ................................................................................ 724
Figure 999 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display ............................................................... 725
Figure 1000 – Synchronism – Phasor Tab........................................................................................................ 725
Figure 1001 – Synchronism – Phasor Tab- Resources ..................................................................................... 726
Figure 1002 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ................................................. 726
Figure 1003 – Synchronism – Synchronism Tab ............................................................................................. 727
Figure 1004 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trigger ...................................................................................... 727
Figure 1005 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting – Options ................................................................... 728
Figure 1006 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trigger – Test set Points ........................................................... 728
Figure 1007 – Synchronism – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Points .................................. 729
Figure 1008 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – New Point.................................. 729
Figure 1009 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – Sequence ................................... 730
Figure 1010 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting – Graph ...................................................................... 730
Figure 1011 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting –Legend ..................................................................... 731
Figure 1012 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test ............................................................................... 732
Figure 1013 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test– Options ................................................................ 732
Figure 1014 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points .................................................... 733
Figure 1015 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines ............................................... 733
Figure 1016 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options .................................................. 734
Figure 1017 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options – First Half ............................... 734
Figure 1018 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options – Second Half ........................... 735
Figure 1019 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence ............................... 735
Figure 1020 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Graph.................................................................. 736
Figure 1021 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Legend ................................................................ 736
Figure 1022 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory.................................................................................. 737
Figure 1023 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – Options ................................................................. 737
Figure 1024 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – Test set Points ...................................................... 738
Figure 1025 – Synchronism – Main screen – Tajectory – Insert / Edit Lines .................................................. 738
Figure 1026 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – General Options.................................................... 739
Figure 1027 – Synchronism – Main screen –Trajectory – General Options – First Half ................................. 739
Figure 1028 – Synchronism – Main screen –Trajectory – General Options – Second Half ............................. 740
Figure 1029 – Synchronism – Main screen –Tajectory – Graph ...................................................................... 740
Figure 1030 – Synchronism – Main screen – Route – Legend ......................................................................... 741
Figure 1031 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings ............................................................................. 742
Figure 1032 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel– Pre-Simulation
and Post-Simulation ......................................................................................................................................... 742
Figure 1033 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary
Figure 1034 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test ....................................................... 743
Figure 1035 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces .............................................. 744
Figure 1036 – VoltsPHz – Open Settings at Start ............................................................................................ 746
Figure 1037 – VoltsPHz – Settings Screen....................................................................................................... 747
Figure 1038 – VoltsPHz – Quick Access Bar .................................................................................................. 747
Figure 1039 – VoltsPHz – Resources General Button ..................................................................................... 748
Figure 1040 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu ........................................................................................................... 748
Figure 1041 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation .............................................................. 749
Figure 1042 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ................................................ 750
Figure 1043 – VoltsPHz – Display Menu – Windows and Layout .................................................................. 751
Figure 1044 – VoltsPHz – Software Options Menu – General ........................................................................ 751
Figure 1045 – VoltsPHz – Adjustments button ................................................................................................ 752
Figure 1046 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – General – General Information ............................................ 753
Figure 1047 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz ........................................................................ 754
Figure 1048 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz – Part 1 ........................................................... 754

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1049 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz – Part 2 ........................................................... 755
Figure 1050 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Part 3 .............................................................. 755
Figure 1051 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Graph (V/Hz) x t ............................................ 755
Figure 1052 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Graph Pickup ................................................. 756
Figure 1053 – VoltsPHz – Graph Tab .............................................................................................................. 756
Figure 1054 – VoltsPHz – Maximized Graph Tab ........................................................................................... 757
Figure 1055 – VoltsPHz – Graph Tab - Resources .......................................................................................... 757
Figure 1056 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab ....................................................................................................... 758
Figure 1057 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab - Resources ................................................................................... 758
Figure 1058 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ....................................................................... 759
Figure 1059 – VoltsPHz – Phasor Tab ............................................................................................................. 759
Figure 1060 – VoltsPHz – Phasor Tab- Resources........................................................................................... 760
Figure 1061 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns ...................................................... 760
Figure 1062 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test ....................................................................................... 761
Figure 1063 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test– Options ........................................................................ 761
Figure 1064 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Test set Lines ............................................................. 762
Figure 1065 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Insert / Edit Lines ....................................................... 762
Figure 1066 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test - General Options – New Line ...................................... 763
Figure 1067 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test - General Options – Sequence ....................................... 763
Figure 1068 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Graph.......................................................................... 764
Figure 1069 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test –Legend......................................................................... 764
Figure 1070 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test ..................................................................................... 765
Figure 1071 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test– Options ..................................................................... 765
Figure 1072 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points .......................................................... 766
Figure 1073 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines .................................................... 766
Figure 1074 – VoltsPHz – Main screen –Search Test – General Options ........................................................ 767
Figure 1075 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence .................................... 767
Figure 1076 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Graph ....................................................................... 768
Figure 1077 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Legend. .................................................................... 768
Figure 1078 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory ....................................................................................... 769
Figure 1079 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Options....................................................................... 769
Figure 1080 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Test set Points ............................................................ 770
Figure 1081 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Insert / Edit Lines....................................................... 770
Figure 1082 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – General Options ......................................................... 771
Figure 1083 – VoltsPHz – Main screen –Trajectory – Graph .......................................................................... 771
Figure 1084 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Legend ....................................................................... 772
Figure 1085 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings ................................................................................... 773
Figure 1086 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel– Pre-Simulation and
Post-Simulation ................................................................................................................................................ 773
Figure 1087 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary
Figure 1088 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test ............................................................ 774
Figure 1089 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces ................................................... 775
Figure 1090 – Transdut – Open Settings at Start .............................................................................................. 777
Figure 1091 – Transdut – Settings Screen ........................................................................................................ 778
Figure 1092 – Transdut – Quick Access Bar .................................................................................................... 778
Figure 1093 – Transdut – Resources General Button ....................................................................................... 779
Figure 1094 – Transdut – Home Menu ............................................................................................................ 779
Figure 1095 – Transdut – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation................................................................ 780
Figure 1096 – Transdut – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout .................................................. 781
Figure 1097 – Transdut – Display Menu – Windows and Layout .................................................................... 782
Figure 1098 – Transdut – Software Options Menu – General .......................................................................... 782
Figure 1099 – Transdut – Adjustments button ................................................................................................. 783
Figure 1100 – Transdut – Transducer – Transducer Adjustment ..................................................................... 784
Figure 1101 – Transdut – Graph Tab ............................................................................................................... 784
Figure 1102 – Transdut – Maximized Graph Tab ............................................................................................ 785

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1103 – Transdut – Graph Tab – Resources ........................................................................................... 785

Figure 1104 – Transdut – Maximized Errors Tab ............................................................................................ 786
Figure 1105 – Transdut – Errors Tab – Resources ........................................................................................... 786
Figure 1106 – Transdut – Waveform Tab ........................................................................................................ 787
Figure 1107 – Transdut – Waveform Tab – Resources .................................................................................... 787
Figure 1108 – Transdut – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display .................................................................... 788
Figure 1109 – Transdut – Phasor Tab .............................................................................................................. 788
Figure 1110 – Transdut – Phasor Tab – Resources .......................................................................................... 789
Figure 1111 – Transdut – Phasor Tab – Show Columns .................................................................................. 789
Figure 1112 – Transdut – Harmonics Tab ........................................................................................................ 790
Figure 1113 – Transdut – Harmonics Tab – Resources.................................................................................... 790
Figure 1114 – Transdut – Main screen – Test .................................................................................................. 791
Figure 1115 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Options.................................................................................. 791
Figure 1116 – Transdut – Main screen – Test .................................................................................................. 792
Figure 1117 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Insert / Edit Points................................................................. 792
Figure 1118 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – General Options .................................................................... 793
Figure 1119 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Graph .................................................................................... 793
Figure 1120 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Legend .................................................................................. 794
Figure 1121 – Transdut – Main screen – Test Settings .................................................................................... 794
Figure 1122 – Transdut – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channels ............................... 795
Figure 1123 – TransientView – Open Settings at Start .................................................................................... 797
Figure 1124 – TransientView – Main screen ................................................................................................... 798
Figure 1125 – TransientView – Quick Access Bar .......................................................................................... 798
Figure 1126 – TransientView – Resources General Button ............................................................................. 799
Figure 1127 – TransientView – Home Menu ................................................................................................... 799
Figure 1128 – TransientView – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence ........................................................ 800
Figure 1129 – TransientView – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout ........................................ 800
Figure 1130 – TransientView – View Menu – Windows and Layout .............................................................. 801
Figure 1131 – TransientView – Software Options Menu – General ................................................................ 801
Figure 1132 – TransientView – Adjustments button ........................................................................................ 802
Figure 1133 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen – General ........................................................................ 803
Figure 1134 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment ................................................. 804
Figure 1135 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert - Zone
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 805
Figure 1136 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert –
Zone .................................................................................................................................................................. 806
Zone .................................................................................................................................................................. 807
Drawn Area ...................................................................................................................................................... 808
Figure 1139 – TransientView – Parameters – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone
Quadrilateral ..................................................................................................................................................... 809
Figure 1140 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems ............................................... 810
Figure 1141 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems – Part 1 .................................. 810
Figure 1142 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2 ................................... 811
Figure 1143 – TransientView – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment ................. 812
Figure 1144 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1 .......................... 812
Figure 1148 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Two Nodes and three Sequences ............... 814
Figure 1149 – TransientView – Sequence Tab................................................................................................. 814
Figure 1150 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - Channel Direction ................................................................ 815
Figure 1151 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - Channel Direction ................................................................ 816
Figure 1152 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description ............ 817
Figure 1153 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description .................... 817

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1154 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description ................. 818
Figure 1155 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description .............. 818
Figure 1156 – TransientView – Waveform Tab ............................................................................................... 819
Figure 1157 – TransientView – Waveform Tab - Resources ........................................................................... 819
Figure 1158 – TransientView – Waveform Tab – Resources - View............................................................... 820
Figure 1159 – TransientView – Phasor Tab ..................................................................................................... 820
Figure 1160 – TransientView – Phasor Tab- Resources .................................................................................. 821
Figure 1161 – TransientView – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns .............................................. 821
Figure 1162 – TransientView – Trajectories tab .............................................................................................. 822
Figure 1163 – TransientView – Trajectories tab - Resources........................................................................... 822
Figure 1164 – TransientView – Harmonics Tab .............................................................................................. 823
Figure 1165 – TransientView – Harmonics Tab - Resources ........................................................................... 823
Figure 1166 – TransientView – Synchronoscope tab ....................................................................................... 824
Figure 1167 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab.................................................................................................... 824
Figure 1168 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab - Resources ................................................................................ 825
Figure 1169 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab - Resources ................................................................................ 825
Figure 1170 – Statistical Analysis – Initial screen ........................................................................................... 827
Figure 1171 – Statistical Analysis– Quick Access Bar .................................................................................... 828
Figure 1172 – Statistical Analysis– File Button Resources .............................................................................. 828
Figure 1173 – Statistical Analysis– General Information – Identification of the Analysis and Responsible ... 829
Figure 1174 – Statistical Analysis– Adding a Table ........................................................................................ 829
Figure 1175 – Statistical Analysis – Error opening file .................................................................................... 830
Figure 1176 – Statistical Analysis – Table Tab ................................................................................................ 830
Figure 1177 – Statistical Analysis – Tables Tab - Definition of values for variables not defined or defined by
labels................................................................................................................................................................. 831
Figure 1178 – Statistical Analysis– Tables Tab - Imported table. .................................................................... 832
Figure 1179 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Analysis List ................................................................... 833
Figure 1180 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Filters / Weights List - Filters Tab ................................. 833
Figure 1181 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Filters / Weights List - Weights Tab .............................. 834
Figure 1182 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - PlotXY Graph ........................................................................ 834
Figure 1183 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - Results - Definitions PlotXY Chart ....................................... 835
Figure 1184 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - Results ( PlotXY Graph ) - Sub Tab Table ............................ 836
Figure 1185 – Statistical Analysis– Analysis – Graphic Bar ............................................................................ 837
Figure 1186 – Statistical Analysis – Bar Graph– Definitions for graph construction ...................................... 837
Figure 1187 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis – Pizza Chart ............................................................................ 839
Figure 1188 – Statistical Analysis – Present Report - Configure Presentation................................................. 840
Figure 1189 – Autodiagnóstico– Initial Screen ................................................................................................ 842
Figure 1190 – Autodiagnóstico – Saving File .................................................................................................. 843
Figure 1191 – Autodiagnóstico –Initial File ..................................................................................................... 843
Figure 1192 – Statistical Analysis – Quick Access Bar ................................................................................... 844
Figure 1193 – Remote Access – Initial Screen ................................................................................................. 846
Figure 1194 – Remote Access – Resources ...................................................................................................... 847
Figure 1195 – Transient power curve ............................................................................................................... 852
Figure 1196 - CE-4000 panel layout ................................................................................................................ 853
Index Table
Table 1 – .........................................................................................................325

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
1 Introduction
This manual contains information on how to work with the software inserted within
the CONPROVE TEST CENTER (CTC) application manager. This software is used to
control the CE-6003; CE-6006; CE-6707; CE-6710 CE-7012 and CE-7024. For the software
to behave satisfactorily, make sure that your computer has the following conditions:
1.1 Minimum software requirements

 Windows: 7, 8, 10 or 11.
 Framework: 4. 8 or higher.
 Processor: Minimum Intel CORE i5.
 Memory (RAM): Minimum 8GB.
 Operating System: 64 bits.
The manual was designed in an objective way, aiming to immediately put the user in
contact with the equipment.
The software is user friendly and easy to understand. Understanding particular

software does not depend on the knowledge of any of the others, giving the user complete
freedom to study only the software that interests him. However, the software was made
seeking to follow a certain logical pattern, so the pre-acquired knowledge facilitates the
understanding of others.
The following chapter contains information about CE-6003; CE-6006; CE-6707; CE-
6710; CE-7012 and CE-7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CONPROVE
TEST
CENTER
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
BOOKMARK MANAGER OR APPLICATIONS
FOR CE-6003/CE-6006/CE-6707/CE-
6710/CE7012/CE-7024

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
2 Hardware and Software – Operating instructions for CE-6003/CE-

6006/CE-6707/CE-6710/CE-7012/CE-7024
2.1 Important information

The electronic circuits of the power amplifiers of the CE-6003/CE-6006/CE-6707/
CE-6710/ CE-7012/CE-7024 for were designed with a very sophisticated protection
system against current and voltage overloads. After the occurrence of 8 overloads on the
amplifiers (short-circuit voltage channels or open current channels), an electronic circuit
blocks the affected amplifier, making it impossible to use it until the equipment is turned off
and on again, becoming available again (CE-600X only).
Best way to use the Test CE-6003/CE-6006/CE-6707/CE-6710/ CE-7012/CE-7024:
 Connect the CE-6003/CE-6006/CE-6707CE-6710/CE-7012/CE-7024 hardware to

the notebook via the USB cable, and then turn on the hardware. The push-buttons on
the amplifiers of the (CE-6003 / CE-6006) may initially be activated and
blocked. The CE-6707 / CE-6710 / CE-7012 / CE-7024 devices are initially
blocked, their blocks being represented by LEDs.
 Then turn on the notebook and open the software you want to work with, the
microcomputer will automatically identify the hardware and start communication.
 When the software screen is available, reset manually push-buttons of the
amplifiers of the CE-6003/CE-6006, then the equipment s be will ready for
use. Only after the communication has been established can the pushbuttons be
unlocked.
 For the CE-6707 / CE-6710 / CE-7012 / CE-7024, the unblocking of your channels is
done automatically after the communication is made successfully.
Before starting the power generation in manual or automatic mode ensures that the
outputs of the current amplifiers are connected to the relay coils to be Test or any inductive
or resistive load that complies with the power limit maximum allowed for each channel. In
voltage amplifiers, make sure that there are no shorts in the output terminals or loads that
cause overload due to excess power.
2.2 Description of the CE-6003 panel

The following figure shows the CE-6003 panel. The interface of the panel was
clearly designed, making the connection of the CE-6003 to the Test instruments very
evident. Connections can be made as work mode set by the user on the screens of “Hardware
Settings” seen in chapter 16 of this manual.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Voltage generators Voltage measurement Binary output Auxiliary

channels. channels. interface. DC supply.
Current measurement
Current generators channels. Binary inputs
channels.
interface.
Analog interface for measuring transducer.

Output connection for
external amplifier.
Figure 1 – Hardware – CE-6003 Panel
The following is a description of each piece of hardware shown in the previous

figure.
Voltage generation channels:
The CE-6003 has three voltage generation channels.
The maximum amplitude that can be generated in each voltage channel is 300 V rms,
the maximum power for each channel is 90 VA and the maximum current is 0.3 A rms. So
that associates can reach up to a voltage with maximum amplitude of 300 Vrms or a
maximum power of 200 VA. The amplitude accuracy is better than or equal to 0.1% and the
angle is better or equal to 0.1°.
Current generation channels:
The CE-6003 has three current generation channels.
The maximum amplitude that can be generated in each current channel is 20 A rms,
the maximum power for each channel is 90 VA and the maximum voltage is 4.5 V rms. So
that members can reach a current with maximum amplitude of 60 Arms or a maximum
power of 300 VA. The amplitude accuracy is better than or equal to 0.1% and higher than or
equal to 0.15°.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Voltage measurement channels:
The CE-6003 has three channels for measuring voltage. These channels are used to
process the acquisition of voltage signals so that energy quality analyzes can be made in the
measurement software.
The voltage measurement channels match the acquired voltages at levels of

amplitude suitable for processing in the DACs. The maximum allowed amplitude for the
voltage measurement channels is 600 V rms with an accuracy of 0.5% in amplitude and
0.5 ° in angle.
Current measurement channels:
The CE-6003 has three channels for measuring current. These channels are used to
process the acquisition of current signals, for the analysis of power quality made by the
The current measurement should be done only with the use of clamps recommend by
the manufacturer (ammeter pliers), never directly. Clamps are optional to the CE-6003, and
can be adjusted to work in three scales, 100mV/A for currents from 100mA to 10 A, 10mV /
A for currents from 100mA to 100A and 1mV/A for currents of 1 at 1000 A. insulation class
of the clamp is 600V ac rms. Before using the clamps, consult the manual of the clamp that
comes with the equipment.
Digital output interfaces (Binary Output):
The CE-6003 has six digital output interfaces, four by relays on the front and with
the aid of a cable, two transistorized outputs on the rear (optional cable).
Digital input interfaces (Binary Input):
The CE-6003 has eight digital input interfaces, being configured by dry or wet
contact.
Attention:
If it is at the binary input it is configured as wet, the voltage level used must be
higher than the adjustment level of the pickup (change level) of the input plus the maximum
precision limit of the input (according to the scale corresponding to the adjustment ). In most
cases, an easy way to respect this rule is to work with the pickup setting, at most, at half the
voltage level. For example, injected voltage of 100.0V is used as a “pickup” a value less
than or equal to 50.0V.
Output connector for external amplifier:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
External hardware is attached to this connector, used in tests that require more
power, amplitude or number of channels. External hardware that can be coupled to the
CE6003 is the Amplifier CE-4000, the test set CE-6003 and the test set CE-6006 (produced
by CONPROVE).
Analog interfaces for measuring transducers:
The software that comes with the CE-6003 uses these analog interfaces for
measuring transducers. These interfaces allow the connection of several models and types of
transducers existing on the market, whose response signals are given in currents or DC
voltages. The interface allows DC currents up to +/- 25 mA with 0.05% accuracy at the full
scale and DC voltages up to +/- 10 V with 0.05% accuracy at the full scale.

Figure 2 shows the CE-6006 panel. The interface of the panel was clearly designed,
making the connection of the CE-6006 to the Test instruments very evident. Connections
can be made according to the user-defined working mode on the hardware configuration
screens found in the manual.
Voltage generators Voltage measurement Binary output Auxiliary

channels. channels. interface. DC supply.
Current generators channels. Current measurement Binary inputs

channels. interface.
Analog interface for measuring transducer.

Output connection for
external amplifier.

figure.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The CE-6006 has six voltage generations.
maximum power of 400 VA. The amplitude accuracy is better than or equal to 0,1 %
and better angle than or equal to 0.1°.
The CE-6006 has six current generation channels.
the maximum power for each channel is 90 VA and the maximum voltage is 4.5 V rms. So
that members can reach a current with maximum amplitude of 120Arms or a maximum
power of 1100 VA. The amplitude accuracy is better than or equal to 0.1% and best angle
equal to 0.15°.
Voltage measurement channels:
The CE-6006 has three channels for measuring voltage. These channels are used to
process the acquisition of voltage signals, for the analysis of power quality made by the
The voltage measurement channels match the acquired voltages at levels of

amplitude suitable for processing in the DACs. The maximum allowed amplitude for the
voltage measurement channels is 600 V rms with an accuracy of 0.5% in amplitude and
0.5 ° in angle.
Current measurement channels:
The CE-6006 has three channels for measuring current. These channels are used to
process the acquisition of current signals, for the analysis of energy quality made by the
measurement.
The current measurement should be made only with the use of clamps
recommended by the manufacturer (clamp meters), never directly. Clamps are optional to
the CE-6006, and can be adjusted to work in three scales, 100mV / A for currents from 100
mA to 10 A, 10mV / A for currents from 100 mA to 100 A and 1mV / A for currents of 1 at
1000 A. insulation class of the clamp is 600 V ac rms. Before using the clamps, consult the
manual of the clamp that comes with the equipment.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The CE-6006 has six digital output interfaces, four by relays on the front and with
the aid of a cable, two transistorized outputs on the rear (optional cable). There
are also six virtual outlets for sending GOOSE messages.
The CE-6006 has eight digital input interfaces being configured by dry or wet
contact. There are also eight virtual entries for receiving GOOSE messages.
Attention:
External hardware is attached to this connector, used in tests that require more
channels or more current. External hardware that can be coupled to the CE6006 is the
Amplifier CE-4000, CE-6006 and CE-6003 (produced by CONPROVE).
Analog interfaces for measuring transducers:
The software that comes with the CE-6006 uses these analog interfaces for
measuring transducers. These interfaces allow the connection of several models and types of
transducers existing on the market, whose response signals are given in currents or DC
voltages. The interface allows DC currents up to +/- 25 mA with 0.05% accuracy at the full
scale and DC voltages up to +/- 10 V with 0.05% accuracy at the full scale.

clearly designed, making the connection of the CE-6707 to the Test instruments very
evident. Connections can be made according to the user-defined working mode on the
hardware configuration screens found in the manual.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Voltage generators Binary output Auxiliary DC Output connection for

channels. interface. supply. external amplifier.
Current generators channels.
Digital input /
voltage and current Special secondary current and voltage
measurement. analog input.

figure.
The CE-670 7 has four fixed voltage generation channels. The maximum amplitude
that can be generated in each voltage channel is 300 V rms, the maximum power for each
channel is 100 VA and the maximum current is 1.5A rms. So that associates can reach a
voltage with a maximum amplitude of 600 Vrms or a maximum power of 350 VA. In the
"AC" the accuracy of the amplitude is less than or equal to 0.04% of reading plus 0.01% of
full scale and the angle accuracy is less than or equal to 0.1 °. For the “DC” mode, the
amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.05% of the reading plus 0.05% of the full scale.
The CE-6707 has three current generation channels. The maximum amplitude that
can be generated in each current channel is 32A rms, the maximum power for each channel
is 130W / 210 VA and the maximum voltage is 10V rms. So that members can reach a
current with maximum amplitude of 96 Arms with a maximum power of 350 W / 550 VA.
The amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.04% of the reading plus 0.01% of the full
scale. For the angle accuracy is less than or equal to 0.1°.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the DC generation, the precision is defined by 0.1% of the reading plus 0.1% of
the full scale.
Voltage / current measurement channels:
The CE-67 07 has twelve channels for measuring voltage and / or current. When
configured as voltage, these channels are used to process the acquisition of voltage signals,
for the analysis of power quality made by the measurement software. There are several
measurement ranges (200mV rms with a tolerance of 0.3% AC and 0.45% DC / 2V rms with
a tolerance of 0.15% AC and 0.25% DC / 20Vrms with a tolerance of 0.15% AC and 0.25%
DC and 600Vrms with tolerance of 0.15% AC and 0.25% DC, for voltages up to 400Vac) to
better match the acquired voltages at levels of amplitude suitable for processing in the
ADCs. All the tolerances mentioned above are related to the full scale (range).
When configured as current, these channels are used to process the acquisition of
current signals, for the analysis of power quality made by the measurement software. The
current measurement can be done using clamp pliers, shunts, transducers, Rogowski coils or
any other transducer that has voltage output in the ranges described above. To do this,
simply inform the full scale and the transformation ratio of the transducer used. Optionally
CONPROVE can supply Clamp pliers to meet the customer's needs.
The CE-670 7 has eight digital output interfaces (four relay outputs with potential-
free NO / NC contacts and four outputs in open collector or in 5V TTL voltage), in addition
to several outputs for sending GOOSE messages.
The CE-6707 has twelve digital input interfaces per NO / NC contact and voltage, in
addition to several inputs for receiving GOOSE messages.
Attention:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
There are two connectors for coupling external hardware. Both the plug (S1) and
(S2) enables m control over six external analog channels each. The external hardware that
can be coupled to the CE-70 1 2 are the Amplifier CE-4000, the Test CE-7012, the Test CE
6710, the Test CE 6707, the Test CE-6006 and the Test CE-6003 (all produced by
CONPROVE).
Special secondary voltage and current analog input:
Signal meter (DC) for testing voltage and current transducers. The current ranges are
± 2 mA/ ± 25 mA with an accuracy of 0.05% of the range. In the case of voltage, the ranges
are ±1V / ± 10 V with 0.05% accuracy of the range, ± 100mV with 0.03 % accuracy plus
0.05 % of the range and ± 10m V with 0 accuracy, 05% of reading plus 0.15 % of range.
These interfaces allow the connection of several models and types of transducers existing on
the market, whose response signals are given in currents or DC voltages.
Special primary voltage and current analog input:
Signal meter (AC) has the following current ranges: ± 2 mA / ± 25 mA / with an

accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.05% of the range. The voltage ranges are ± 1 V, ±
10 V with an accuracy of 0.05% of reading plus 0.05% of range ± 10 0 mV accuracy of
0.1 % of reading plus 0, 1 % of Range and ± 10 mV with an accuracy of 0.05 % of reading
plus 0.2 % of the range.
Auxiliary source:
Auxiliary source for generating DC voltage up to 300V. The level is adjusted in the
software, in the hardware configuration screen. Adjustment range is from 5 to 300Vdc with
typical accuracy of 2% of range.

clearly designed, making the connection of the CE-6710 to the Test Set instruments very

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Voltage generators Binary output Auxiliary Output connection for

channels. interface. DC supply. external amplifier.
Digital input / Special secondary / primary analog

voltage and current Special analog voltage input for voltage and current.
measurement. and current output.
Figure 4 – Hardware – CE-6710 panel

figure.
The CE- 6710 has four fixed voltage generation channels. The maximum amplitude
that can be generated in each voltage channel is 30 0 V rms, the maximum power of each
channel is 10 0 VA and the maximum current is 1.5 A rms. So that associates can reach a
voltage with a maximum amplitude of 6 00 Vrms or a maximum power of 35 0 VA. In the
“AC” the accuracy of the amplitude is less than or equal to 0.04% of the reading plus
0.01% of the full scale. For the angle, the accuracy is less than or equal to 0.05 °. For the
“DC” mode, the amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.05% of the reading plus 0.05%
of the full scale.
The CE- 6710 has six current generation channels. The maximum amplitude that can
be generated in each current channel is 32 A rms, the maximum power for each channel
is 1 3 0 W / 2 1 0 VA and the maximum voltage is 10 V rms. So that members can reach a
current with a maximum amplitude of 192 A rms with a maximum power of 8 00W / 11 00
VA. The amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.04% of the reading plus 0.01% of the
full scale. For the angle, the accuracy is less than or equal to 0.05°.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
the full scale.
The CE-6710 has twelve channels for measuring voltage and / or current. When
a tolerance of 0.15% AC and 0.25 % DC / 20Vrms with a tolerance of 0.15 % AC and
0.25 % DC , and 600V rms with tolerance 0.15 % CA and 0.25 % DC, for voltages up to
400Vac) to better match the aquisitadas voltage amplitude levels in suitable for processing
in the ADC. All the tolerances mentioned above are related to the full scale (range).
The CE-6710 has eight digital output interfaces (four relay outputs with potential-
Attention:
(S2) enables m control over six external analog channels each. External hardware that can be

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
coupled to the CE-7012 is the Amplifier CE-4000, the test set CE-7012, the test set CE
6710, the test set CE-6006 and the test set CE-6003 (all produced by CONPROVE).
Special voltage and current analog output:
Process generator for simulations of transducer outputs and low level DC signals,
both voltage and current. The current and voltage ranges are respectively ± 20 mA and ± 10
V. The accuracy is less than or equal to 0.01% of the reading plus 0.5% of the range.
± 2 mA / ± 25 mA with an accuracy of 0.05% of the range, ± 100 mA / 1.0A / ± 10 A with
an accuracy of 0.03% of the reading plus 0.08% of the range. In the case of voltage, the
ranges are ± 1V / ± 10 V with 0.05% accuracy of the range, ± 100mV
with 0.03 % accuracy plus 0.05 % of the range and ± 10m V with accuracy, 0.05% of
reading plus 0.15 % of range. These interfaces allow the connection of several models and
types of transducers existing on the market, whose response signals are given in currents or
DC voltages.
Signal meter (AC) has the following current ranges: ± 2 mA / ± 25 mA / ± 100 mA /

± 1.0 A, ± 10 A with accuracy of 0.05% of reading plus 0.05% of reading range. The voltage
ranges are ± 1 V, ± 10 V with an accuracy of 0.05% of reading plus 0.05% of range ±
10 0 mV accuracy of 0.1 % of reading plus 0.1 % of Range and ± 10 mV with an accuracy
of 0.05 % of reading plus 0.2 % of the range.
Auxiliary source:

clearly designed, making the connection of the CE-7012 to the Test set instruments very

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Digital input / Special secondary / primary analog

voltage and current Special analog voltage input for voltage and current.
measurement. and current output.

figure.
The CE-7012 has six fixed voltage generation channels. The maximum amplitude
that can be generated in each voltage channel is 330 V rms, the maximum power for each
channel is 10 0 VA and the maximum current is 1.8 A rms. So that associates can reach up
to a voltage with maximum amplitude of 2000 Vrms or a maximum power of 400 VA. The
amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.04% of the reading plus 0.01% of the range and
for the angle the precision is less than or equal to 0.05°.
the DC range.
For Primary tests, the voltage generation channels can be grouped in series allowing
the generation of:
Number of outputs: 2 * 1KVrms / 1 * 2KVrms.

Output power: 2 * 240VA / 1 * 400VA.
Accuracy: 0.05% of reading + 0.05% of range.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The CE-7012 has 6 channels of current generation. The maximum amplitude that can
be generated in each current channel is 50 A rms, the maximum power for each channel
is 250W / 430 VA and the maximum voltage is 14 V rms. So that members can reach a
current with a maximum amplitude of 300 A rms or a maximum power of 1000W /1500
VA. The amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.04% of the reading plus 0.01% of the
range (for generations up to 90% of the range) and for the angle the precision is less than or
equal to 0.05°.
the DC range.
For Primary tests, the current generation channels can be grouped in parallel
allowing the generation of:
Number of outputs: 3 * 100Arms / 2 * 150Arms / 1 * 300Arms.

Output power: 3 * 860VA / 2 * 1000VA / 1 * 1500VA.
Accuracy: 0.05% of the reading + 0.05% of the range (for generations up to 90% of
the range).
Number of outputs: 1*210ADC.

Output power: 1*1000W
a tolerance of 0.15% AC and 0.25 % DC / 20Vrms with a tolerance of 0.15% AC and
0.25 % CO and 600Vrms with a tolerance of 0.15 AC, 0.25 % DC, for voltages up to

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The CE-7012 has eight digital output interfaces (four relay outputs with potential-
Attention:
(S2) enables m control over six external analog channels each. The external hardware that
can be coupled to the CE-7012 are the Amplifier CE-4000, the test set CE-7012, the test set
CE 6707, the test set CE 6710, the test set CE-6006 and the test set CE-6003 (all produced
by CONPROVE).
Special voltage and current analog output:
both voltage and current. The ranges of currents and voltages are respectively ± 25 mA and
± 10 V. The accuracy is less than or equal to 0.01% of the reading plus 0.5% of the range.
Signal meter (DC) for testing voltage and current transducers. Current ranges are ±
2 mA / ± 25 mA with 0.05% accuracy of the full scale plus 0.05% of the point and ± 100
mA / 1.0A / ± 10 A with 0.03 accuracy % of reading plus 0.08% of the range. In the case of
voltage, the ranges are ± 1V / ± 10V with an accuracy of 0.05% of the range plus 0.05% of
the point, ± 100mV with an accuracy of 0.1% of the reading plus 0.1% of the range and ±
10m V with accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.2% of the range. These interfaces allow
the connection of several models and types of transducers existing on the market, whose
response signals are given in currents or DC voltages.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

ranges are ± 1 V, ± 10 V with an accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.05% of the range,
± 10 mV with an accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.2% of the range and ± 100 mV
with an accuracy of 0.1% of reading plus 0.1% of the range.
Auxiliary source:

clearly designed, making the connection of the CE-7024 to the Test set instruments very

.
Digital input /
voltage and current Special analog voltage Special secondary / primary analog
measurement. and current output. input for voltage and current.
.

figure.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The CE-7024 has six fixed voltage generation channels.
maximum power of 400 VA. The amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to 0.04% of the
reading plus 0.01% of the range and for the angle the precision is less than or equal to 0.05°.
the DC range.
For Primary tests, the voltage generation channels can be grouped in series allowing
the generation of:
Number of outputs: 2 * 1KVrms / 1 * 2KVrms.

Output power: 2 * 240VA / 1 * 400VA.
The CE-7024 has 18 current generation channels.
the maximum power for each channel is 250W / 430 VA and the maximum voltage is 14 V
rms. So that members can reach a current with maximum amplitude of 800 Arms or
a maximum power of 5000W / 5000 VA. The amplitude accuracy is less than or equal to
0.04% of the reading plus 0.01% of the range (for generations up to 90% of the range) and
for the angle the precision is less than or equal to 0.05°.
the DC range.
For Primary tests, the current generation channels can be grouped in parallel
allowing the generation of:
Number of outputs: 3 * 300Arms / 2 * 400Arms / 1 * 800Arms.

Output power: 3 * 2400VA / 2 * 3000VA / 1 * 5000VA.
Accuracy: 0.05% of the reading + 0.05% of the range (for generations up to 90% of
the range).
Number of outputs: 3 * 180ADC / 2 * 270ADC / 1 * 500ADC.

Output power: 3 * 2400W / 2 * 3000W / 1 * 5000W.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
measuring ranges (200mV RMS with a tolerance of 0.3% and 0.45% DC AC / 2V rms with
a tolerance of 0.15% CA and 0.25 % DC / 20Vrms with a tolerance of 0.15 % BC and
0.25 % DC 600Vrms and tolerance of 0.15 % CA and 0.25 % DC, for voltages up to
The CE-7024 has eight digital output interfaces (with four outputs to relay contacts
NO / NC potential-free and four outputs in open collector or TTL voltage 5V), in addition,
several outputs for sending messages GOOSE.
Attention:
There are two connectors for coupling external hardware. The first connector (S1)
allows the control of more external analog channels and the second connector (S2) allows an
increase in the number of digital inputs and outputs. The external hardware that can be
coupled to the CE-7024 are the Amplifier CE-4000, the Test set CE-6707, the Test set CE-
6710, the Test set CE-6006 and the Test set CE-6003 (produced by CONPROVE).
Special analog voltage and current output:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
both voltage and current. The ranges of currents and voltages are respectively ± 25 mA and
± 10 V. The accuracy is less than or equal to 0.01% of the reading plus 0.5% of the range.
± 2 mA / ± 25 mA with an accuracy of 0.0 5 % of the range and ± 100 mA / 1.0A / ± 10 A
with an accuracy of 0.03% of the reading plus 0.08 % of the range. In the case of voltage the
ranges are ± 1V / ± 10V with 0.03% accuracy of the range, ± 100mV with 0.03% accuracy
of the reading plus 0.05% of the range and ± 10m V with accuracy of 0.03% of the reading
plus 0.15% of the range. These interfaces allow the connection of several models and types
of transducers existing on the market, whose response signals are given in currents or DC
voltages.

ranges are ± 1 V, ± 10 V with an accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.05% of the range,
± 10 mV with an accuracy of 0.05% of the reading plus 0.2% of the range and ± 100 mV
with an accuracy of 0.1 % of reading plus 0.1% of the range.
Auxiliary source:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
3 Software - Instructions on installing the Conprove Test Center (CTC)
First make sure that your computer has the minimum requirements for the software
to work properly.
 Windows: 7, 8 or 10.
 Framework: 4.8 or higher.
 Processor: minimum Intel CORE i3.
 Memory (RAM): minimum 4GB;
 Operating System: 64 bits.
If the computer was supplied with the equipment, the software will already be
properly installed at the factory. However, the software installation DVD is always
provided. In this DVD, the user will find in 3 different directories, the setup for installing the
CTC applications, the setup of the tutorials and the setup for installing the communication
drivers, having the freedom to install each one separately. However, in the first installation,
just insert the DVD and the following window will be shown:
Figure 7 – Installation – Installation Manager
Let marked all options check box that has come selected and click the
icon Install and follow only confirming the options that appear on the screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
3.1 Installing CTC applications
Figure 8 – Installation – CTC Installation
Accept the usage agreement and click Next.
Figure 9 – Installation – CTC license
Choose the directory for installing the software. Try to choose the option already
suggested by the software. In the next window click Next again.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 10 – Installation – CTC destination folder
Figure 11 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the CTC
Finally, a message to complete the installation of the CTC software.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 12 – Installation – CTC successfully installed
3.2 Installing PS Simul (demo version)
Figure 13 – Installation – PS Simul Installation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 14 – Installation – PS Simul license
suggested by the software. In the next window click Next again.
Figure 15 – Installation – PS Simul destination folder

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 16 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the CTC
Finally, a message to finalize the installation of the PS Simul software.
Figure 17 – Installation – PS Simul successfully installed

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
3.3 Installing the Tutorials
Figure 18 – Installation – Installation off Tutorials
suggested by the software. In the next window click Next.
Figure 19 – Installation – Tutorial destination folder

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 20 – Installation – Confirmation of the beginning of the installation of the tutorials
Following is a message to complete the installation of the tutorials.
Figure 21 – Installation – Tutorials successfully installed

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
3.4 Installing I/O Drivers
Figure 22 – Installation – National Instruments installation start screen
Figure 23 – Installation – National Instruments destination folder

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 24 – Installation – Verification if there upgrade to the National Instruments
Figure 25 – Installation – Message showing that there is no update for National Instruments

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 26 – Installation – National Instruments license
Figure 27 – Installation – National Instruments installation begins

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 28 – Installation – National Instruments successfully installed
The installation of the National Instruments communication driver takes about 5

minutes. After this processes it is essential to restart the computer, otherwise there will
be no communication between the notebook and the test case.
Figure 29 – Installation – Message to restart the computer

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4 Conprove Test Center (CTC) – Application Manager for CE-6003 /

CE-6006 / CE-6707 / CE-6710 /CE-7012 / CE-7024 – General Notes
4.1 General characteristics

The Conprove Test Center centralizes in a single window all the software used by
CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-6707 / CE-6710 / CE-7012 / CE-7024. Depending on the hardware
used, some software will not be available.
Figure 30 – CTC Main screen

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.2 GENERAL
Set of software for various tests are:
4.2.1 MANUAL
Software that performs tests in manual mode at both the secondary and primary
levels. Here the user has total control of what he is generating and acquiring, demanding
more knowledge in the desired test. It is recommended for quick tests where the user wants
to check if the Test set equipment is really working.
4.2.2 AUXILIARY SOURCE

Auxiliary source monitoring software. Whenever any test software is closed,
the auxiliary source software is automatically opened. In it the user can change the desired
voltage level. Bearing in mind that in CE-6003 / CE-6006 equipment the auxiliary supply
goes up to 265 V with a power of 60W and in CE-6707 / CE-6710 / CE-7012 / CE-7024
equipment the auxiliary source goes up to 300 V with a planned power of 60W.
4.2.3 CALIBRAC
Software used to perform the calibration of all generation and measurement channels
such as voltage and current of equipment CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-7012 / CE-7024. For
both voltage and current, the software allows you to choose a base value for the module
and frequency. It is recommended to keep the default value.
4.2.4 TEST PLAN

Software where the user prepares several tests to be executed, one after the
other, without having to open each one individually and parameterize each test. Both
secondary testing software and primary testing software can be used.
4.2.5 GERAÇÃO REMOTA

Software used to remotely access another test bag over the network and perform the
adjustment and generation control of this test bag.
4.3 PRIMARY
Set of automatic software for testing at primary levels are:
4.3.1 CT
Specific software for testing current transformers (CT). Evaluates the transformation
ratio using current, voltage or low power signal. Measures the CT load (load), raises the CT
excitation curve in a fully automated way. Check the resistance of the windings performs
insulation tests and analyze the polarity.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.3.2 VT
Specific software for testing potential transformers (PT). Evaluates the
transformation ratio using either voltage or low power signal. Performs the measurement of
TP loading (load). Check the resistance of the windings performs insulation tests and
analyze the polarity.
4.3.3 TRANSFORMER
Specific software for testing Power Transformers. Evaluates the transformation ratio
monophonically or three-phase. Checks the resistance of the windings and performs an
insulation test.
4.3.4 RESISTANCE
Specific software for measuring resistance. Perform testing on windings and has the
functionality of a micro meter.
4.3.5 PMASTER
Software used for testing equipment in general. It has the functionality of CT, VT,
TRANSFORMER, RESISTANCE software in single software.
4.4 SECONDARY
Set of automatic software for testing at secondary levels are:
4.4.1 DIFERENC
Specific automatic software for differential tests. In this test, the user only informs
the configuration and adjustment of the Test set equipment and the software performs all
generation and acquisition automatically. In DIFERENC, three types of tests are performed:
TEST SET, where it is evaluated whether the equipment configuration informed to the
software is correct, POINT TEST, where the user chooses points on the Idiff x
Irest curve and checks whether there is performance or not and o SEARCH TEST, where
the user chooses test lines n the differential curve in the Idiff x Irest plane to be searched
4.4.2 DIRECPOT
Specific automatic software for power direction tests. In this test, the user only
informs the configuration of the Test set equipment and the software performs all generation
and acquisition automatically. DIRECPOT performs three types of tests: SHOTTING,
where the user inserts points in the regions of operation and non-operation in order to test
the performance or non-performance as well as the time of operation, SEARCH, where the
user defines lines that cross the region of operation and non-operation in order to test the
starting values of the region of operation and the ROUTE, where a variation of powers is
inserted in order to evaluate the region of operation in a dynamic way.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.4.3 DISTANC
Specific automatic software for distance testing. In this test, the user only informs the
configuration of the Test set equipment and the software performs all generation and
acquisition automatically. At DISTANC, two types of tests are carried out: POINT TEST,
where the user inserts points in regions inside and outside the protection zones in order to
test the performance or non-performance as well as the performance time of each zone,
SEARCH TEST , where the user defines lines that cut the protection zones in order to test
the limits of each operating zone.
4.4.4 MASTER
Software which can create sequence s voltage and current comprising: ramps
increase or decrease in frequency, module angle and angle module, and
the module frequency, df/dt and ATP generation and COMTRADE file. One can create
reviews of the pickup time and Test set greatness. It is recommended in the case where the
user wants to model a very complex situation for testing the equipment.
4.4.5 PSB-OoS
Specific automatic software for tests of power balance and loss of system
synchronism. In this test, the user only informs the configuration of the Test set equipment
and the software performs all generation and acquisition automatically. Two types of tests
are performed on the PSB-OoS: SYSTEM SIMULATION, where the user through an
equivalent system defined by some parameters creates an oscillation and verifies the
behavior of the relay that can block (power balance) or act (loss of synchronism),
TRAJECTORIES SIMULATION, where the user freely defines in an impedance diagram
containing the zones in which function 21 functions if he wants a trajectory that simulates a
power balance or a trajectory that simulates a loss of synchronism.
4.4.6 RAMPA
Software where it is possible to create voltage and current ramp where
the frequency increases or decreases, module, angle, angle and module, module
and frequency, df/dt. One can create reviews of the pickup time and Test set greatness. It is
recommended in the case where the user wants to test the frequency and voltage functions
that the equipment has.
4.4.7 RESTHARM
Automatic software specifically for testing the HARMONIC RESTRICTION
function. In this test, the user only informs the configuration of the Test set equipment and
the software performs all generation and acquisition automatically. In RESTHARM, three
types of tests are performed: POINT TEST, where the user chooses points on the Idiff x%
harm curve and checks whether there is a block or not blocking function 87, the SEARCH
TEST, where the user chooses test lines and the Differential curve in the Idiff x% harm
plane will be sought and the CROSSBLOCK TEST, where harmonic is generated only in
one or two phases in order to check if the relay blocks function 87 by “cross blocking”.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.4.8 SEQUENC
Software where it is possible to create a large amount of voltage and current
sequences directly, by symmetrical components, including harmonics (up to the fiftieth
order), inter-harmonics, by symmetric components, by constant power, by faults, by
constant VI, by constant ZV, by Z from constant source and by intelligent mode. One can
create reviews of the pickup time and Test set greatness. It is recommended in the case
where the user is to model situations such as: reclosing, logic testing, logical selectivity and
etc.
4.4.9 SYNCHRONISM
Automatic software specific for synchronism tests. In this test, the user only informs
the configuration of the Test set equipment and the software performs all generation and
acquisition automatically. In SYNCHRONISM, three types of tests are performed:
TRIGGER, where the user inserts points in regions inside and outside the synchronism
zones in order to test the synchronization within a range of ∆V and ∆f and a certain fixed
angle, SEARCH, where the user defines lines that cut the synchronization zone keeping the
angle constant and varying voltage and frequency in order to test the limits of the
synchronization zone and the TRAJECTORY, where a variation of the three
quantities is inserted in order of evaluating the synchronism region, this last test is more real
and dynamic because it includes the angle variation.
4.4.10 SOBRECOR
Specific automatic software for directionality and overcurrent tests. In this test, the
user only informs the configuration of the Test set equipment and the software performs all
generation and acquisition automatically. At SOBRECOR, two types of tests are performed
(both for phase, negative and zero): PICKUP, where the user enters search points in order to
test the pickup value of both the timed curve and the curve (s) instant (s), TIME, where the
user defines lines that cut the overcurrent curves in order to test the operating times. It is also
possible to include the directionality feature in the PICKUP and TIME tests.
4.4.11 TRANSIENT
Software where it is possible to create a sequence to reproduce COMTRADE (. Cfg)
and ATP (.lis) files. One can create reviews of the pickup time and Test set greatness. It is
recommended in the case where the user wants to reproduce a real field situation
(COMTRADE) or coming from a simulation situation (ATP).
4.4.12 VOLTSPHZ
Automatic software specifically for overexcitation tests. In this test, the user only
informs the configuration of the Test set equipment and the software performs all generation
and acquisition automatically. In VOLTSPHZ, three types of tests are performed: TIME,
where the user defines lines that cut the overexcitation curves in order to test the operating
times, SEARCH, where the user defines lines that cut the VxHz curve with the objective of
testing the limits of the function pickup, in the TRAJECTORY, the user defines lines that

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
cut the VxHz curve with the objective of testing the limits of the function pickup, the detail
is that in this test both the voltage and the frequency vary, making the test more dynamic.
4.4.13 TRANSDUT
Software used to calibrate the following transducers: active power, reactive power,
apparent power, frequency , current, voltage, power factor, angle between voltages, angle
between voltage and current, angle between currents, average current, DC current, voltage
DC, DC power and line voltage.
4.4.14 MEDIDOR
Software used to perform the calibration of meters: multifunctional, Watt hour, Var
hour, VA hour, Q hour, V 2 hour, I 2 hour, V hour, I hour. Be it 3 wires or 4.
4.4.15 POWER QUALITY

Software used to perform the calibration of power quality analyzers. It has the
following incident insertion features: Frequency, Magnitude, Flicker, Sag, Swell,
Interruption, Transients (Notches), Unbalance, Harmonics, Inter-Harmonics, Quick Change,
Multi-Incident and Assessment.
4.5 OTHER
Set of software for additional applications are:
4.5.1 TRANSIENT VIEW

Software that allows viewing files COMTRADE (extension .cfg) so off-line (without
the need to be connected with the case). It is indicated for equipment that does not have
oscillography visualization software.
4.5.2 VALIDATE PDF REPORTS

Software that allows you to confirm that there was no change in the report exported
by one of the CTC applications.
4.5.3 ANÁLISE ESTATÍSTICA

Software that allows statistical analysis of a group of data (Excel file) and it is
possible to view XY-type graphs, bar graphs and pie graphs. You can quickly and easily
view maximum values, minimum values, arithmetic mean, geometric mean, median,
standard deviation and variance.
4.6 MEASURAMENT
Set of software dedicated to measurement are:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.6.1 MULTIM
Specific software for measuring voltage, current, power and impedance in addition to
harmonics up to 3000 Hz. Generates a report with the measurements taken at the moment
you stop acquiring data.
4.7 SETUP
Set of configurations of the test set equipment and the test being:
4.7.1 PREFERENCES
Software that allows you to choose the test directories, explanatory figures,
overcurrent curves, COMTRADE file, ATP file, RIO file and IEC61850 substations. You
can choose the default language for the report, add the company logo, choose colors and add
effects to the chart. Finally, you have the option to choose the default values for general
information, system, Notes & obs, Explanatory figures, Check List, Synchronization and
Others.
4.7.2 ATUALIZA FIRMWARE

Automatic update of the firmware of the user's test case.
4.8 SUPPORT
Applications that are intended to assist the user of the test case.
4.8.1 TUTORIALS
The user accesses the folder with all the tutorials for secondary and primary tests.
4.8.2 CONTACT
The user checks the address, website, email, and telephone number of CONPROVE.
4.8.3 FORUM
The user accesses the electrical systems protection forum managed by CONPROVE.
4.8.4 MANUAL
The user accesses the instruction manual for the test cases.
4.8.5 QUICK GUIDE

The user accesses the quick guide to the test cases.
4.8.6 AUTODIAGNÓSTICO
Software used to detect abnormalities in the test cases.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
4.8.7 REMOTE ACCESS

Software used by CONPROVE technical support to remotely access the customer's
computer to assist in the execution of the tests.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
MANUAL
SOFTWARE FOR MANUAL TESTING ON
RELAYS AND TRANSDUCERS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5 Manual – Manual testing software

Developed to perform manual testing relays and transducers, the "Manual" software
permits simultaneous generation of current signals and / or voltage, with a harmonic content
up to 50th order, often is fundamental to 50Hz or 60Hz, also using the feature pre-foul.
In it, the user defines, for each signal, the actuation interface (defined by the possible
combinations of the Binary Output) and the way that the module, angle and frequency for
voltages and currents must be generated through the modes (direct, ramp, harmonics,
impedance, interharmonics, Power, fault and etc.). There is also the ability to generate the
analog DC outputs (CE-7012 / CE-7024), change the state of the binary outputs and change
the state of the GOOSE outputs.
The software tracks in real time the waveform, total RMS value and amplitude and
phase angle of each harmonic order (fundamental and multiple up to the 50th order) of the
generated signal. The software also corrects the signal if there is any disturbance during the
generation, such as load variation, for example.
The user has the possibility to create evaluations and perform the test capture,
keeping the total RMS values of each signal generated along with the time or the number of
cycles at the time the interface operates in timed mode, with the purpose of approving or not
the Test set point. There is the ability to monitor the binary inputs, GOOSE inputs and
special analog DC / AC inputs (voltage and current).
This software has the feature “Open Settings when Starting” (Software Options), if it
is active, when starting the Manual software the Settings screen is active immediately, this
feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important specify the parameters
related to the test.
Figure 31 – Manual – Open Settings when Starting

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 32 – Manual – Main Screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in chapter 21.
5.2 Quick access toolbar

The figure below shows in detail each function of the standard quick access
toolbar. The user can view the name of the software used, the version of the software, which
equipment is being used with its respective serial number.
Creates a new Opens a saved Save the Customize the

test file.. test. current test. Quick Access
Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Restore, Move, Size,
Minimize, Maximize
and Close. Equipment used
and serial
number.
Figure 33 – Manual – Menu – Software Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.3 General Button adjustment range

By clicking on the General Button, highlighted in the figure below, options on how
to create a new file, save, open, close, among others, which are the main control actions, will
appear in the upper left corner.
Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password
protects certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
Enables / disables the
options for:
Enable AGC;
Open Settings at Start.
Shut down the
software. Manufacturer data is
displayed.
Figure 34 – Manual – General Button Features

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.4 Home Menu
Figure 35 – Manual – Home Menu
In the start menu, several resources are available and are detailed in the following
figures. The following figure describes features of hardware configurations, editing of
results and generation control.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Reissue Shows the tests performed or Initiates
Orientation screen. whether it is being performed
for Hardware the current at the current time.
signal
Configuration. test. generation.
Opens a screen Opens a screen for Insert a Exclude Deletes Stop signal
for GPS Setup. GOOSE and SV new test. s all the generation.
Configuration. Tests. current
Test.
Figure 36 – Manual – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, the resources for analysis options of the generated quantities are
shown, as well as the options for general adjustments and the creation of an
evaluation. Access to the report, options for viewing the units involved (time and module)
and general options for restoring and viewing the layout are also displayed.
Calls the Shows Show the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to
Settings the Harmonic time in time in the standard
Evaluation
Tab.
Screen. Wavefor tab. seconds. cycles. layout.
m Tab.
Enables /
disables tabs
for viewing.
Shows the Shows the Shows Shows Shows Shows values
Phasor configuration primary absolute relative based on the
Tab. of the report. values. values. values. secondary.
Figure 37 – Manual – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units e Layout
5.5 View Menu

In the display menu, some visualization resources are available where the user can
customize the way he wishes. These features mainly cover window layouts such as floating,
anchoring, hiding and closing.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Position the selected Superimposes the Hide the windows Returns to Enables /
window: on the left; selected window. the standard
for better viewing. disables tabs
to the right, above, layout.
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Hide the selected Hide the selected Close all open Closes all open
tabs. tabs. windows. documents.
Figure 38 – Manual – View Menu – Windows and Layout
5.6 Software Options Menu

In the software options the user can choose some general features that will influence
the priorities between acquisition of analog data, acquisition in standard mode or in the
special inputs. It has other test file protection features, enabling automatic gain control
(feature that generates a more reliable signal, but requires greater computer processing),
allows opening the general settings screen when starting the software, activates
filters selective frequency measurement and displays the manufacturer's contact.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in Opens the Enables binary It separates the Shows the
the Test file so as Settings inputs and visualization of the manufacturer’s
not to allow the Screen when GOOSES inputs to analog signals and address, phone,
editing of certain starting the perform the test. the binary outputs in email and fax.
two tabs.
settings. software.
Enables / disables Enables / disables a Enables binary inputs Enables / disables

automatic gain filter via software to to perform tests. special inputs for
control. eliminate frequencies transducer
other than what is calibration.
desired.
Figure 39 – Manual – Software Options Menu – General
5.7 Settings screens

This screen becomes active when you click the Settings Button on the Home tab
within the Options Field.
Figure 40 – Manual – Adjustments button
It is also opened at software startup, if the Opens Settings when Starting option in
the Software Options tab is selected.
In General mode , there is the General Information tab where the user enters all the
data related to the test, the Test set device and the person responsible for the test. There is
also the Systems tab where the user informs the nominal values of frequency,
voltage, current and power, among others. And, there is a tab for Notes and Observations for
miscellaneous records.
There is an Explanatory Figures tab where the user can insert up to three figures
relevant to the test, a Check List tab to create steps to be followed during the test, there is a
tab called Others for configuring digital signal filters and finally a tab Connections allowing
the user to structure all connections between the test case and the equipment to be Test set.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows access to Inform tabs. General, System, Notes & Obs.,

Explanatory Figures, Check List, Others and Connections.
Figure 41 – Manual – Settings screen – General
5.8 Pre-fault Tab

Next will be explained s all available resources tab Pre-Fault.
5.8.1 Node Output (NO) sub tab

In this case, three voltages and three currents were directed to NO1.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 42 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Sub tab NO
In the figures below, all the ways to insert a pre-fault will be shown.
5.8.2 Direct Mode

In this mode, the user directly enters the value of the module, angle and frequency of
each channel in the desired sequence.
Enables / disables Pre-fault duration

the Pre-fault. time.
Choice of
Module operating
value. mode.
Generic
Frequency
point of the
value.
System.
Angle
Description of value.
the targeted
channel.
Figure 43 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Direct Mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.3 Direct mode features

By right-clicking on the text box in direct mode, the following resources are
available.
Default number of
Voltage input mode. decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry User-defined number
mode. of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.
Figure 44 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Resources
By clicking the voltages, currents or frequencies the following resources are

available.
Calculates the value in

channels with a
generic voltage point
between phases. Data entry is done channel
by channel in Module and
angle (Free mode) or data
Calculates the value in entry is made only by one
the channel with a channel, and the others are
generic displacement automatically matched to
voltage point.
the first (Equal mode).
Calculates the value in the

Data entry is done through channel with a generic
only one channel, and the ground current point.
balance and balancing
(Sequence ABC or ACB) Keeps the
of the other phases is frequency of all
automatically made. channels the
same.
Figure 45 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Resources – Voltages, Currents or Frequency

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.4 Harmonic Mode

In this mode, the user directly enters the value of the module and angle of each
harmonic component (up to 50º). Note in the figure below that only the total RMS
(true RMS) and the total harmonic distortion of the quantity involved are displayed, to enter
the values as described, the user has to access the modules and angles as described below.
Enables / disables Pre-

fault. Pre-fault duration
time.
Choice of
Description of
the targeted
operating
channel. mode.
Generic Access to the

point of the Module and
System. Angle of 50
harm orders.
RMS value and

Total Harmonic
Distortion
(THD) of the
entered
harmonic
orders.
Figure 46 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Harmonics mode
5.8.5 Harmonic mode features

When clicking on the access button for the parameterization of the module and angle
of the harmonics, the following screen appears.
Clears modules and Insertion of the module in RMS

angles of all or in% of the fundamental.
harmonics.
Harmonic Order Module and

Angle.
Harmonic Order.
Figure 47 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
By right-clicking on the text box on the harmonics input screen, the

following features for formatting the input data are available.
Clears all modules Reduced number of

and angles. decimal places.
Default number of User-defined number

decimal places (two of decimal places.
places).
Figure 48 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Formatting features
5.8.6 Symmetric Components Mode

In this mode, the user enters voltages and currents of positive, negative and
zero sequence components. The software then calculates what values have to be generated
by the channels so that these quantities of symmetrical components are met.
Pre-fault duration
Voltage and Enable pre- time.
current fault.
values that
will be
generated to Choice of
meet the operating
condition of mode.
symmetrical
component.
Voltage and current

values in
symmetrical
component format.
Both module and
angle.
Figure 49 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Symmetric Components mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.7 Features of Symmetrical Components mode

By clicking the right mouse button on the text box on Symmetrical Component mode
the following features of inserting and formatting of the input data are available.
Voltage input mode. Default number of

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
mode. User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.
5.8.8 Phase-to-phase Mode

In this mode, the user defines the phase-to-phase voltage value Vab, the zero -
sequence voltage and the phase currents. The software then calculates which values have to
be generated by the channels so that these amounts of phase-to-phase voltage are met.
Voltage and Enable pre- Pre-fault duration

current values fault. time.
that will be
generated to
meet the Choice of
phase-to- operating
phase voltage mode.
condition.
Definition of
Values of phase-to-phase
the Phase-
voltage, Sequence zero
Phase value. voltage and current in
the three phases.
Figure 51 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Phase-Phase mode
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.9 Features Phase-phase mode

By clicking the right mouse button on the text box in the Phase-phase mode the
following features of inserting and formatting of the input data are available.

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.10 Power Mode

In this mode, the user defines the voltage value of the three phases, the active and
reactive power of each phase. The software then calculates which values have to be
generated by the voltage and current channels in order for these amounts of power to be met.
Enables / disables
Pre-fault.
Voltage and Pre-fault duration

current time.
values that
will be Choice of
generated to operating
meet the mode.
Power
condition.
Definition of
the Power Phase-to-ground
values. voltage values, single-
phase active and
reactive powers.
Figure 53 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the Power mode
5.8.11 Resources Power mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Power Mode os
seguintes Resources de inserção e formatação dos dados de entrada ficam disponíveis.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.12 Fault mode

In this mode, the user defines the value of short-circuit voltage, short-circuit current,
angle between voltage and current and the type of fault. The software then calculates which
values have to be generated by channels in order for these missing quantities to be met.
Enables / disables
Pre-fault.
Voltage and Pre-fault duration

current time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
fault
condition.
Defining the
fault values. Fault types (three-
phase, two-phase or
single-phase), angle
between voltage and
current and module /
angle of fault voltage
and fault current.
Figure 55 – Manual – Pre-Fault – Sub tab NO – Fault mode description
5.8.13 Fault mode resources

By right-clicking on the text box in Fault Mode the following Resources for inserting
and formatting the input data are available.

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 56 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Resources
5.8.14 Constant Z-I mode

In this mode, the user defines impedance and current values that will be kept
constant. The software then calculates which values have to be generated by the channels so
that these amounts of constant Z / I and variable V are met.
Voltage and Enables / disables Pre-fault duration Choice of

current Pre-fault. time. operating
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
constant Z-I Fault types (three-phase, two-
condition. phase or single-phase),
enabling the DC offset,
beginning of the fault
(together with the maximum /
Definition of minimum offset or a user-
Z-I constant defined offset angle),
values. Impedance definition that will
be constant, definition of the
fault current that will be
constant and definition of the
parameters of the line
(manually, by the node or by
the zone adjustments).
Figure 57 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Sub tab NO – Description of the constant ZI mode
5.8.15 Constant Z-I mode features

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Constant ZI Mode
os seguintes Resources de inserção e formatação dos dados de entrada ficam disponíveis.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 58 – Manual – Pre-fault – Resources
5.8.16 Constant Z-V Mode

In this mode, the user defines impedance and voltage values that will be kept
that these quantities of constant Z / V and variable I are met.
Enables / disables Pre-fault duration Choice of

Voltage and
Pre-fault. time. operating
current
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
constant Z- Fault types (three-phase, two-
V condition. phase or single-phase),
beginning of the fault
(together with the maximum /
Definition of minimum offset or a user-
Z-V defined offset angle),
constant Impedance definition that will
values. be constant, definition of the
fault voltage that will be
parameters of the line
(manually, by the node or by
the zone adjustments).
Figure 59 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – NO sub tab – Description of the constant ZV mode
5.8.17 Features of constant Z–V mode

By clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Constant ZV Mode
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 60 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Resources
5.8.18 Constant Z-source mode

You must define the calculation mode and the values of the source impedance that
will be kept constant, together with the fault impedance. The software then calculates which
values have to be generated by the channels in order for these quantities to be met.

Voltage and the Pre-fault. time. operating
current mode.
values that
will be
generated to
meet the
condition of Fault types (three-phase, two-
constant Z- phase or single-phase),
source. enabling the DC offset,
starting the fault (together with
the maximum / minimum
Definition of Z-
offset or a user-defined offset
source constant
angle), defining the fault
values.
impedance, defining the
source impedance and defining
line parameters (manually, by
node or zone settings).
Figure 61 – Manual – Pre-fault – NO sub tab – Description of constant Z-source mode
5.8.19 Constant Z – source mode features

By clicking the right mouse button on the text box in the Z-Source steadily the

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.8.20 Z mode - Smart

In this mode, the user defines the fault impedance and the fault values are generated
respecting a limit defined by the user, in this case, therefore, both the current and the
voltage vary.

Voltage and
current values Pre-fault. time. operating
that will be mode.
generated to
meet the Z-
smart
condition.
Fault types (three-phase, two-
phase or single-phase),
starting the fault (together with
the maximum / minimum
Definition of Z- offset or a user-defined offset
smart values. angle), defining the fault
impedance, defining the limits
(voltage and current) ) and
definition of the line
parameters (manually, by the
node or by the zone
adjustments).
Figure 63 – Manual – Pre-Fault tab – NO sub tab – Description of Z mode - Intelligent
5.8.21 Z Mode Features - Smart

By right-clicking on the text box in Z-Smart mode, the following input and
formatting features of the input data are available.

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.9 Fault Tab

The Fault tab has exactly the same features available as the Pre-Fault tab. The only
exception is time, which cannot be parameterized. The next sub-tabs shown below respect
this principle.
Figure 65 – Manual – Fault Tab
5.9.1 DC Analog Outputs sub tab

Analog DC outputs exist only for CE-6710, CE-7012 and CE-7024 equipment due to
hardware features. This feature is available to be used both in the pre-fault and in the fault.
Pre-fault
duration time.
DC Voltage
Value.
DC current
value.
Figure 66 – Manual – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – Description General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.9.2 Binary Outputs sub tab

The user can change the status of the binary outputs of the equipment he is
using. The application of this feature would be for logic tests, signaling of some state to the
relay and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the switch between NO and NC in
any sequence (through a graphical resource), delay or advance the time of changing that
state.
Current state (open or Start and end delay, not

closed) of the binary output. available for this software.
Figure 67 – Manual – Binary Outputs sub tab – Description General
5.9.3 GOOSE Outputs sub tab

The user can change the state of the GOOSE outputs of the equipment he is
relay and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the message between NO and NC, to
delay or to advance the time of the change of that state.
Current state (open or Start and end delay, not

closed) of the binary output. available for this software.
Figure 68 – Manual – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.9.4 Time and Advance

The user can change the way the software will change from one sequence to the
next. It can be by counting time, time or logic (whichever is answered first) and time or key
(if the user presses a key before the time is counted, the software advances to the
next sequence). The option to consider an absolute or relative angle in the sequence change
can be checked in order to improve the transition, and in the first sequence you can choose
how the sequence set s will be started.
It considers an angle Way to trigger the

value when changing parameterized Pre-
from one Sequence to fault: via the PC or
another. This can via binary inputs.
prevent the change
from being too
sudden.
Figure 69 – Manual – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description
5.9.5 Monitoring Tab

In this tab the user checks the measurements of the generated values.
Angle for angular

reference.
Module and Angle

values of the signals
being generated.
Figure 70 – Manual – Monitoring Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.9.6 Timers Tab

In this tab, the user controls which binary output he wants to monitor, checks the
actuation time, blocks the first actuation. You can compare the operating time between the
binary inputs and the GOOSE inputs. There is the ability to perform manual increments
either in the module or in the amplitude of the generated signals.
Monitored
binary input.
Binary actuation
Monitored time.
GOOSE input.
Waiting time
Disregards the between
first operation. stopwatches.
Clears all
Manual increment
of the amplitude or incremental
angle. values.
Selects the channels Adjustment of the

where the increment value to be
will occur.
incremented.
Figure 71 – Manual – Timers Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.9.7 Input Tab bin., GOOSE and An. DC
Enables all equipment measurements (analog measurement,

transducer, GOOSE, binary, Sampled Values, etc.).
It prioritizes only the binary inputs for analog

measurements and detection of actuation in the CE-
7024. In the case of CE-6006, only analog
Enables / disables
measurement is enabled. In this option the number of
special inputs for
points per cycle is increased.
transducer calibration.
DC voltage and current

values.
Figure 72 – Manual – Entr. Bin., GOOSE and An. DC
5.10 Waveform tab

In the next tab the user can choose which signals he wants to view. The s options are:
signals generated, measured signals, or both signals.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 73 – Manual – Waveform Tab
5.10.1 Features of the Waveform Tab

By right-clicking on the tab, the following resources are available.
It allows 4 It allows changing the

different sizes for following parameters of a
visualization of the single graphic or all of
graphs. them: Title, Legend,
Scale, Grid, Table and
Dimensions.
Opens the Assign
Signals window,
where the user Extract the COMTRADE
determines which or CSV file from the
values will be shown waveforms.
in the graphs. Take a picture of the
chart by storing it on the
clipboard.
Allows you to Insert

or Edit Markings or Take a picture of all the
Comments in graphics by storing them
graphics. on the clipboard.
Figure 74 – Manual – Waveform tab – Resources
5.11 Phasor Tab

This screen is possible display module and the value of the angle of the voltage
or the current, and a graph of the phasors for each channel. The display options are: the
generated signals, the measured signals or both signals.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 75 – Manual – Phasor Tab
5.11.1 Resources of the Phasor Tab

It allows four different

sizes for viewing the This option will be
graphics. shown in the next
Figure for more
details.
Opens the Assign Signals It allows changing the

window where the user following parameters of
determines which values the graph: Title, Legend,
will be shown on the Take a picture of the chart by storing Scale, Grid, Table and
graphs. it on the clipboard. Dimensions.
Figure 76 – Manual – Phasor Tab - Resources
Clicking on the Show Columns option in the previous figure brings up the following
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables or disables the

display of the following
values: Module, Angle,
Actual value, Imaginary
value.
Maximum, average and

minimum values of
modules and angles.
Figure 77 – Manual – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
5.12 Harmonics Tab

The user has the ability to view all harmonics in a bar graph format or in the table,
the data is displayed in RMS or as a percentage of the fundamental. The display options are:
the generated signals, the measured signals or both signals.
Figure 78 – Manual – Harmonics Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.12.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab

It allows 4 different
sizes for visualization
of the graphs.
Opens the Assign

Signals window where It allows changing the
the user determines following parameters
which values will be
of the graph: Title,
shown on the graphs.
Legend, Scale, Grid,
Table and
Dimensions.
You can either insert or
edit comments to the Take a photo of the
chart. chart by storing it on
the clipboard.
Figure 79 – Manual – Harmonics Tab – Resources
5.13 Evaluation Tab

It is possible for the user to create some evaluations related to the generated values
and the measured values (channel to channel), with the intention of, for example, evaluating
RTCs, RTP s, angular lag of sample values in a given medium and so on.
Consideration for
Evaluation between
module / angle, R / X, Rs / Constant Tolerance
Rp, Ls / Lp, Powers. It multiplied taken into
Channels that Theoretical
depends on what is by the Ratio account in the
will be parameterized on the obtained. value for
Evaluation.
compared. “Type” screen. Evaluation.
Evaluation type between channels. Ratio, difference,

Impedance (polar or quadrature), powers (S, P and Q), Constant Evaluation criteria.
primary and secondary resistance / inductance. It added to the Absolute error, Relative
depends on what is parameterized in each channel error, greater or lesser.
Ratio
(voltage or current).
obtained.
Figure 80 – Manual – Evaluation Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
5.13.1 Resource of Evaluation Tab

Shows the angle Shows the angle
values between values in minutes.
+ 180 ° or between
0 and 360 °.
Shows which Shows the units of

Evaluation column the evaluated
is being edited. quantities.
Improve Shows the values

multipliers: u = to two decimal
(micro), m = places.
(milli), k = (kilo)
etc.
Shows the values User defines the

of the quantities as number of decimal
an integer. places of the
quantities.
Figure 81 – Manual – Evaluation Tab – Resources
6 Auxiliary Source
It is software specific to control the source helper. One can adjust the value of the
output voltage to a value of 265 V (60 W) for equipment CE-6003 / CE6006 and 300 V
(60W - planned) to the equipment CE-7012/ CE-7024. The detail in this software is that it is
opened automatically every time other software is closed, so that the user always has control
of the voltage. Below are the details of the software settings:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Transparency Defines the value

Effect. to be generated.
Value
measured
at the
source
Starts or output and
stops its
generatin respective
g voltage graphic
from the indication.
source.
Figure 82 – MonitFaux – Detail of the software settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CALIBRAC
SOFTWARE FOR CALIBRATION OF CE-
6003/CE-6006/CE-6707/CE-6710/CE-7012/CE-7024

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
7 Calibrac - Software for calibration of CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-6707/

CE-6710/ CE-7012 / CE-7024
7.1 General features

This software adjusts the internal generation and reading gains used by the CE-6003 /
CE-6006 / CE-7012 / CE7024 by calibrating the equipment to a standard chosen by the
user. The adjusted earnings are stored in the file .CLB, which must be in the installation
directory of the Calibrac program. The name of this file is written in the
form Cexxxxxx .clb, where the six digits represented here by x, are actually the equipment's
serial number. All the software provided works with these files, that is, the calibration is
unique for all of them.
7.2 Calibrating the generating and reading of CE-6003/CE-6006/ CE-6707/ CE-6710/

CE-7012 / CE-7024
To calibrate the CE-6003 / CE-6006, the following procedure must be followed:
 Install the measuring instrument (voltmeter or ammeter) used as standard in the

calibration correctly. Open the Calibrac software.
 Select the Calibration to be performed, which can be: Voltage Generation Amplitude
(V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 and V6), Current Generation Amplitude (I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and
I6), Voltage Generation and Current Lag, Current Generation in Transient
configuration, Voltage Measurement, Input for Measuring Transducers and Auxiliary
Source.
 Define the requested calibration parameters according to the chosen calibration,
which can be: the channel to be calibrated, the base voltage or base current to be
generated and the base frequency. Click on the "Start" button on the specific
Calibration screen. This starts generating the signal on the channel specified for
calibration.
 Once the generation has started, the progress screen of the selected calibration will
be active. This step is to determine the gain of the generation and the gain of the
reading for the frequency s basic fundamental and harmonic order 10, 20, 30, 40 and
50, in order to read the gain setting for each. The user must enter in the text box the
value read in the standard and click on the “Reset” button. If the value entered in the
box is different from the base value of the desired signal, the same process must be
repeated until, when clicking on the “Reset” button, the value entered in the box
(value read by default) is equal, or with a negligible error in relation to the defined
base signal value.
 The next step is automatic and aims to calibrate the generation of harmonics of the
2 to the 50 the order.
 At the end of each process a list of the gains and values generated is presented. The
user can then save the calculated gains or cancel the calibration.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
7.3 Main screen

The main screen of the Calibrac software is illustrated in the Figure below. In this
screen the user selects which Calibration will be performed.
Serial number of the equipment. Displays the channel to Displays the time and date
be calibrated. of the last saved calibration.
Starts the selected Retrieves the Displays the list of

gains for the selected
calibration Imports saved Manufacturer’s
process. calibrations. calibration.
Calibration.
Figure 83 – Calibrac – Main screen
7.4 Screens Voltage / Current Generation - Amplitude

The initial Amplitude calibration screen is shown in the following figure. This screen
is active when starting the selected calibration process (click on “Calibrate”). In this screen,
the frequency and the basic amplitude for the calibration can be defined. Then the user starts
the calibration process, itself, by clicking on the “Start” button.
The user must read the generated value in the standard and type it in the input
box. For example, suppose the voltage base chosen is 100 V and the standard indicates 98 V,
the user must type 98 in the text box and click on the “Reset” button. The voltage level
immediately increases, approaching the chosen 100 V. The calibration will be correct if the
voltage level chosen, in this case 100 V, is equal to the voltage level actually generated, that
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
is, when the user reads 100 V in the standard. When the value is equal to the chosen one,
100 V, it means that the desired generation level has been reached and the calibration
process can now move on to the next step. The calibration of the acquisition gains the above
process is repeated for the frequency s harmonic orders 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50.
Amplifier Se habilitado, a calibração Calibration Shows connection

being será realizada apenas na instructions. scheme for
calibrated. Freq. Fundamental. calibration of the
specified channel.
Defines
base
frequency:
50/60 Hz.
Base
amplitude
value used
in the
calibration.
Indicates which stage of

the process is being Starts the Cancels the
performed or has calibration process. calibration
already been completed. process.
Figure 84 – Calibrac – “Prepare to Calibrate” screen

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base frequency Amplifier being Describes the Field where the value read in
defined. calibrated. step in progress. the standard must be entered.
Base
Amplitude
value defined.
Cancels the
calibration process.
Readjust the Amplitude gain

in order to reach the defined
base Amplitude.
Indicates the process step in

progress (red arrow) and
completed steps (in green).
Figure 85 – Calibrac – Adjustment of the reading gain for fundamental frequency
In the next step, the “Correcting Measurement Linearity” process begins. In this step,
the linearity correction of the amplifiers Transducers will be done in five amplitude levels
for the same base frequency , the user must read the measured value in the standard and
enter it only once for each amplitude level, and click on the button "Readjust".

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base value of Base frequency Amplifier being Mostra o nível de tensão cuja
Defined amplitude. defined. calibrated. Linearidade está sendo corrigida e
Ca Process descreve o processo.
steps
completed.
sem
Salva a
calibração da
AmplitListField
of where the
value read in
readjusted the standard
earnings. must be
entered.
i o
arquivo de
Reajusta a linearidade
calibração Cancels the
para o nível de calibration.
anterior).
amplitude dado.
altera
r a calibração
Indicates the process step in progress (red arrow)
and completed steps (in green). anterior.
Figure 86 – Calibrac – Process Correcting Linearity Level 1
After completing the steps above, the screen illustrated in the following figure will
be active starting the automatic step of the process.
Base frequency Amplifier being Describes the step

defined. calibrated. in progress.
Base Amplitude
value defined.
Cancels the
calibration.
Automatic process
status bar.
Indicates the process step in progress (red

arrow) and completed steps (in green).
Figure 87 – Calibrac – Adjustment of the multipliers of the 2nd the 50th harm order.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
At the end of the process, a list of the earnings and values generated is
presented. The user can save these gains or cancel the calibration.
Base frequency Amplifier that has Cancels the calibration process, without
changing the previous calibration.
defined. been calibrated.
Base
Amplitude
value.
List of
readjusted
earnings.
Saves the Amplifier Amplitude calibration. (Overwrites

the previous calibration file).
Process steps completed.
Figure 88 – Calibrac – Adjusted earnings list

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
7.5 Screen “Calibrating the delay between the amplifiers”.

Base
frequency
defined.
Description of the Process step in progress and

equipment connection information.
Shows connection
scheme for
calibration of the
lags.
Inicia processo de calibração das

Defasagens.
Displays stage
of the process Cancels the
in progress. calibration process.
Figure 89 – Calibrac – Screen “Prepare to Calibrate Voltage Measurement Delay”
The previous screen is active when the user selects the option on the main screen:
“Voltage and Current Generation - Lag”, and clicks on “Calibrate”.
Calibration of the Gap between Amplifiers is done in stages. In the first, the lags of
the voltage channel measurement transducers are calibrated, in the next the same is done for
the current channels, both made automatically after the user clicks the “Start” button.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base frequency
defined.
Description of the
Indicates process step in progress.
Process step
that has
been
completed.
Status bar of the

automatic
Cancels the calibration
process.
Process step in progress.
Figure 90 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibration Def. Voltage Measurement”
After processing these steps, the software is preparing to correct the gap between
voltage and current, it is necessary for the user to enter the value shown in the standard
and presses the “Reset” key.
In the last step of the process, the software automatically calibrates the lags of the
voltage and current generations in relation to channels V1 and I1.
At the end of the process, a list of the measured and generated lag values is
presented. The user can save these gains or cancel the calibration, keeping
the old calibration.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base frequency
specified.
Shows current calibration progress, and

process procedure instructions.
Input box where you must enter the

measured value in the chosen Standard.
Cancels the
Indicates the process step in progress (red arrow)

and completed steps (in green).
Readjust the lag level according to the

value entered in the input box.
Figure 91 – Calibrac – Stage “Correcting the gap between voltage and current”
Base frequency
defined.
Indicates Description of the process step

Process step
that has been in progress.
completed.
Status bar of the

automatic calibration
process.
Process step in progress. Cancels the calibration process.
Figure 92 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Def. From V2 to V6 with Ref V1”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base List of Leak Calibration Results.

frequency.
Cancels the
calibration
process,
without
changing the
previous
calibration.
Completed steps.
Saves readjusted lag

values.
Figure 93 – Calibrac – Process completed screen
7.6 Screen “Calibrating Phase Amplitude of Current Amplifiers in

Config. Transitory”
In this calibration process, the user must define the base values of amplitude, usually
around 2 A, and frequency for the current signal that will be generated. Before starting the
calibration in the Transient generation mode, all amplifiers, both current and voltage, must
be properly calibrated in the normal generation mode.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Defined current
base amplitude.
Base frequency Description of the step in

defined. progress in the calibration
process.
Scheme of equipment
connection for this
Cancels the
process.
calibration
process.
Indicates Process step in

progress. Starts calibration
process.
Figure 94 – Calibrac – Calibrac - And tap “Prepare to calibrate Water Factor. of I1 ”
When pressing the “start” button, the transitory mode calibration process begins. The
user must enter the current value measured in the standard ammeter, until it is equal to the
base amplitude value, when this occurs, the software moves on to the next step. This process
is repeated for currents I1 through I6.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base current Describes the step in progress and

amplitude value. gives instructions to the user.
Base frequency
defined.
Input box of values read

on the standard ammeter.
Cancels the
calibration
process.
Readjust current gains in config.

Transitory.
Indicates step in progress (red), steps completed (green).
Figure 95 – Calibrac – Step “Calibrating Iq Aqs Factor”
Then the software moves to the Calibration Phase Generation Gain step in Transient
mode.
When you click on “Start”, the automatic steps to calibrate the Generation Gains
begin.
At the end of the calibration process, a list of gains and the values generated based on
these gains is presented. The user can save these gains or cancel the calibration

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Describes
the step in
Base frequency progress
defined. and gives
instructions
to the user.
Base current amplitude
value.
Cancels
Show Scheme of the
equipment connection calibration
for this process. process.
Starts calibration
process.
Indicates step in progress (red), steps

completed (green).
Figure 96 – Calibrac – Step “Prepare for Calibrating Iq Aqs Factor”
Base List of Leak Calibration Results.

frequency.
Cancels the
calibration
process,
without
changing
the previous
calibration.
Saves readjusted lag
values.
Completed steps.
Figure 97 – Calibrac – Step “Process Completed”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
7.7 Screen “Calibration of Voltage Measurement Inputs”

In this calibration process, the signal generated by amplifier V1 will be used to
simultaneously calibrate the amplitudes and the lag angles of the three voltage measurement
inputs (Va, Vb, Vc). For this it is necessary that the amplifier V1 is properly calibrated.
When clicking on the “Start” button, the step “Calibrating Aqs Gain and Def. In
Fundamental” is enabled. The user must inform the value read on the standard multimeter
and press the “Reset” button. This procedure is repeated for the frequency’s harmonic order
of 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50.
Then the linearity correction step will be enabled, which will be carried out in five
voltage levels, the user must inform for each level the value read on the standard multimeter
and click on "Reset".
At the end of the process, a list of the gains, corrections and lags of the Voltage
Measurement is presented. The user can save this data or cancel the calibration.
Base value defined for

Voltage amplitude.
Base frequency
defined.
Describes the step in progress

and gives instructions to the user.
Displays the connection

scheme of the equipment.
Cancels the calibration

process.
Indicates Step in Starts calibration

process.
progress.
Figure 98 – Calibrac – Step “Prepare for Calibrate”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Base value Describes the

defined for step in
Voltage progress and
amplitude. gives
instructions to
Base frequency the user.
defined.
Inbox where the user enters

the values read on the
standard multimeter.
Readjust the voltage level gain based on

the value entered by the user.
Cancels the
Indicates step in progress (red), calibration
steps completed (green). process.
Figure 99 – Calibrac – Stage “Cal. mild Gain of Aqs. and Defas. in Fundamental Frequency”
Base voltage
amplitude
value.
Describes the
step in
Base frequency progress and
gives
defined. instructions to
the user.
Cancels the
Values read on calibration
the standard process.
multimeter.
Readjust the Linearity of the voltage level

Indicates step in based on the value entered by the user.
progress (red), steps
completed (green).
Figure 100 – Calibrac – Step “Correcting Linearity and Measurement Def.”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calibrated
voltage range.
Base frequency
defined.
Base value defined for

List of
Voltage amplitude.
Calibration
Gains,
corrections
and lags.
Saves calibration gains,

Process steps corrections and lags. Cancels the
completed. calibration process.
Figure 101 – Calibrac – Stage “Process Completed”
7.8 “Calibrating Transducer Measurement Input” screen

This calibration screen allows the user to choose which Transducer input to be
calibrated: Voltage - Vdc or Current - mA dc.
The user must leave the transducer calibration input that will be calibrated open, and
press the “Correct Offset” button, the correction will be carried out automatically.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of the voltage

range to be calibrated.
Describes the step in

progress and gives
instructions to the
user.
Process step in Cancels the

progress. calibration
process.
Automatically corrects the

measurement OffSet.
Figure 102 – Calibrac – “Correcting OffSet”
In the next step, the user must connect the Transducer calibration input to a
controlled DC voltage source, or he can still use the CE6006 / 3 auxiliary source, as long as
it is conditioned to the maximum level of 10V at the input (for this use a resistive divider)
for calibration of Voltage calibration input V dc; or a controlled DC current source if the
calibration is from the mA dc current calibration input.
The step for calibrating the Acquisition Gains will be enabled. The user must inform,
for each suggested DC amplitude level, the value read on the standard DC multimeter /
milli-ammeter and press the “Reset” button.
After readjusting the 5 levels of the Positive Response, the user must invert the
polarity of the source and press the "Start" button.
For each of the levels of Negative answer, the user must inform the value read in the
standard and press the “Reset” button.
At the end of the process, a list of the gains and corrections obtained will be
presented. The user can save these gains and corrections, or cancel the calibration.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the DC voltage range to be

calibrated with the software.
Inbox where the user

must enter the values
read in the standard.
Figure 103 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating acquisition gain to level approx. 2V”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 104 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Acquisition Gain (Negative Response)”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the calibration List of readjusted

voltage range. gains and corrections.
Saves gains and Cancels the

readjusted corrections. calibration process.
Process steps
completed.
7.9 Screen "Calibration Source Assistant”

To calibrate the Auxiliary Source, you must connect a standard multimeter to its
output, and press the "Start" button.
The user must wait for the Source to stabilize and then inform the measured value by
clicking and then on the “Reset” button. The procedure should be repeated for nine levels.
At the end of the process, a list of the generated gains and corrections will be
presented. The user can save these gains and corrections or cancel the calibration.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows the
connection
Describes the step in progress and
scheme of the gives instructions to the user.
equipment.
Indicates Process
step in progress.
Cancels the
calibration
Starts calibration
process.
process.
Figure 106 – Calibrac – Stage “Prepare to Calibrate”
Describes the step in progress and gives

instructions to the user.
Input box where the user must

enter the value read in the
standard.
Indicates step in progress (red),
steps completed (green).
Readjust the earnings

based on the values entered
by the user.
Figure 107 – Calibrac – Stage “Calibrating Level Byte 2”

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
List of readjusted gains and

corrections.
Saves readjusted
gains and
corrections.
Process steps completed.
Cancels the
calibration
process.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
TEST PLAN
SOFTWARE TO PERFORM SEVERAL TESTS
IN SEQUENCE
CONPROVE ENGENHARIA LTDA

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
8 Test Plan – Software to Perform Various Tests

This software allows the user to perform tests using all the applications described
previously.
It is possible to test all functions of a relay using a single test file. This software
opens the tests to be done by other applications in sequence, automating the way of testing
the equipment.
This software has the feature “ Insert Test Plan when starting ” (Software
Options menu) , if it is active, when starting the Test Plan software , the option “Test Plan 1”
is already created automatically.
Figure 109 – Test Plan – Insert Test Plan when starting

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
8.2 Main screen
Figure 110 – Test Plan – Main screen

equipment is being used with its respective serial.
Creates a new Opens a saved Saves the Customize the

test file. test. current Test. Quick Access
Bar.
Software name and
version.
Opens the options: Equipment used

and serial
Minimize, Maximize
and Close. number.
Figure 111 – Test Plan – Quick Access Bar
8.4 General Button Adjustment Range


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 112 – Test Plan – General Button Resources
8.5 Home Menu
Figure 113 – Test Plan – Home Menu
In the start menu, several resources are available, detailed in the following figures.
The following figure describes hardware configuration features and generation controls such
as start, pause, end, next test module, next test plan and partial or total exclusion.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Paste a test Cut out a test Starts the Pause or stop Go to the next Clears the
module. module. signal signal test module. selected
generation generation. module and
process. returns to the
status of Not
Tested.
Deletes the selected Copies the Move on to the Clears all modules and
test plan or module. selected next test plan. returns to the status of
module. Not Tested.
Figure 114 – Test Plan – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
In the figure below, the features of inserting a test plan, inserting adjustments,
inserting hardware configuration and inserting test modules are shown. Access to the report,
options for viewing the units involved (time and module) and general options for restoring
and viewing the layout are also displayed.
Insert a Insert a Insert a new Insert a Insere um Call report Returns to

new test new Settings new group novo of tests the
plan. settings screen. screen. módulo de performed. standard
screen. Test. layout.
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Figure 115 – Test Plan – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
8.6 View Menu

window: on the left; selected window. for better viewing. the disables tabs
to the right, above, standard for viewing.
below or as a layout.
document.
tabs. window. windows. documents.
Figure 116 – Test Plan – View Menu – Windows and Layout

In the software options the user can enable test file protection features, enable the
simulation mode (offline generation, without voltage and current), allow the opening of the
general settings screen when starting the software, and display the contact from
the manufacturer.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in Enables / disables the Opens the Settings Shows the
Screen when the manufacturer’s address,
the Test file so as simulation mode. Since
software is started. phone, email and fax.
not to allow the in this mode there is no
editing of certain insertion of voltage and
settings. current.
Figure 117 – Test Plan – Menu – Software Options
8.8 Inserting test modules

Choose freely which applications will be added to the test plan by choosing the icon
directly on the Insert at Test Point screen.
Figure 118 – Test Plan – Adjustments button

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
REMOTE
GENERATION
SOFTWARE TO CONTROL OTHER TEST SET

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
9 Remote Generation – Software to control another test set

This software allows a case to be remotely controlled. For this to happen, a
computer and a remote bag and a computer and a local bag are needed. Note that each
computer must be communicating with its respective case, via the USB cable. Both
computers must be connected to the internet network or to a local network. Finally, it is
necessary that both cases have time synchronization, either by GPS, IRIG-B or IEEE-1588
signal.
9.2 Main screen
Figure 119 – Remote Generation – Main screen

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

The figure below shows in detail the functionality of each field.
It is defined if the Identification created The user can create a Allows remote
connection is by the software itself. password to allow remote access.
through the internet access.
or local.
Figure 120 – Remote Generation – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
METER
SOFTWARE FOR TESTINGS METERS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
10 Meter - Software for testing meters

This software performs automatic tests on multifunctional meters, Watt hour, Var
hour, VA hour, Q hour, V² hour, I² hour, V hour, I hour. It allows the user to adjust the
export angle, the directionality mode (bidirectional, importing or exporting) and the
analyzed quadrant. It also allows the user to enter specific data, such as: meter range, pulse /
rotation (electromechanical meters), the maximum creep time, the stabilization time, the
maximum current, if the test is single-phase and the inherent constants to the meter (pulse /
quantity or quantity per pulse) in primary or secondary format.
The user must configure the tests specifying which generation channels are directed
to the voltages and currents, he can also enable a reference table to correct the generation
errors, in this case, the reference is no longer the generation of the suitcase but yes that table.
The tests available are: Load test, mechanism, injection, no load and creep. For all
tests it is possible to visualize the waveforms, phasors and harmonics.
This software has the feature “Open Settings at Start” (Software Options menu) , if it
is active, when starting the Meter software the Settings screen is active immediately, this
feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important to specify the parameters
Figure 121 – Meter – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 122 – Meter – Settings Screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in chapter 21. The Meter
field will be discussed throughout this chapter.

The Figure abaixo mostra de forma detalhada cada função da barra padrão de
ferramentas de acesso rápido. O usuário pode visualizar o nome do software utilizado, a
versão do software, qual equipamento está sendo utilizado com seu respectivo número de
série.
Creates a new Opens a saved Saves the Customize the Software name
test file. Test. current test. Quick Access and version.
Bar.
Equipment used
Opens the options: and serial
number.
Minimize, Maximize
and Close.
Figure 123 – Meter – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new Open a saved

test file. file.
Password protect Saves the current

certain file.
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Load, export or open Simulation mode;
a reference table for Open Settings at Start.
meter errors.
Manufacturer data is
displayed.
Shut down the software.
Figure 124 – Meter – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
10.4 Home Menu
Figure 125 – Meter – Home Menu
In the start menu, several resources are available. The following figure describes
hardware configuration features and generation controls such as start, stop, move to the next
point / line, deletion of one or all of the Test set points.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Starts the Pauses signal Move on to the
Orientation screen. for Hardware signal generation. next point.
Configuration. generation
process.
Clears the
selected
point and
returns to
the status
of Not
Tested.
Connects between Opens a screen for Setup of sample Clears all points and
software and GPS Setup. value and goose returns to untested status.
hardware. messages.
Figure 126 – Meter – Home Menu – Hardware e Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, the static generation, the resources for analysis options of the
generated quantities (waveforms and phasors), as well as the adjustment options (General
Settings and Meter) are displayed. Access to the report is also displayed, options for viewing
the units involved (time and module) and general options for restoring the layout, viewing
the layout and recreating graphs.
Starts the Shows the Shows Shows the time Shows the error Recreates Enables /
static Waveform the in seconds or or accuracy of the disables tabs
generation Tab. Phasor cycles. the meter. graphics. for viewing.
mode. Tab.
Opens the
report Shows values
Calls the configuration based on the Shows absolute Restores the
Settings Shows window. primary or or relative default layout
Screen. Harmonic Tab. secondary. values. of the screen.
Figure 127 – Meter – Home Menu – Static generation, Options, Report, Units and Layout
10.5 Config Hrd icon

To use the CE-OSU1 module, this sensor is initially identified. Clicking on the
“Config Hrd” icon and on the “Slave” tab and in the “Model” field, the CE-OSU1 is
adjusted. Finally, the mode of operation is chosen if using the “Optical” or “BNC TTL”
interface.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 128 – Meter – Config Hrd – Slave

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
10.6 Static Generation

In the static generation option, the user has the ability to generate the voltage and
current signals and through the external CE-OSU accessory he is able to find the pulse /
energy or energy / pulse constant. This generation mode is indicated for when the user does
not know this meter constant. It is worth mentioning that it is found in the manuals of the
Test set equipment.
Starts the Shows the time in cycles or seconds,

static
generation values in primary or secondary
generation
mode. and values in absolute or relative.
When enabled, it finds the meter constants.

The answer is in pulse / quantity or quantity /
pulse.
Shows the
Voltage, current, angle, Waveform
power factor and power Tab and
values to be generated. phasors.
Figure 129 – Meter – Home Menu – Static Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
10.7 View Menu

document.
Figure 130 – Meter – View Menu – Windows and Layout

general settings screen when starting the software, and display the contact manufacturer.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in the Enables / disables the Opens the Settings

test file in order to simulation mode. When active, Screen when the
control the editing of there is no injection of voltage software is started.
settings. and current values.
Shows the
manufacturer’s
address, phone,
email and fax.
Figure 131 – Meter – Software Options Menu – General
10.9 Settings Screen

This Screen becomes active when you click the Settings button on
the Home tab within the Options Field.
Figure 132 – Meter – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Meter.
In the General mode, there is the “General Information” tab, where the user enters all
the data relating to: the Test, the Test Device and the person responsible for the
Test. There is also the tab “Reference Values”, where the user informs the nominal values of
voltage, current and power for system 1. There is also a tab for “Notes and Observations”. In
the other tab, “Explanatory Figures”, it is possible to insert up to 3 figures in the most used
image extensions, such as: Bitmap; JPGE; PNG; JPG; etc.
In Meter mode, there is the “Meter Adjustment” tab. In it the user chooses the type of
meter. It allows the user to adjust the export angle, the directionality mode (bidirectional,
importing or exporting), and the analyzed quadrant. It also allows the user to enter specific
data, such as: Meter class, pulse / rotation (electromechanical meters).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Other resources are related to the constants inherent to the meter (pulse / quantity or
quantity per pulse) in primary or secondary format using the voltage and current
transformation ratios already parameterized in the “General” tab.
10.10 Adjustments screen - Meter - Set Meter

The figure below shows all transducer testing options, once a specific type of
transducer is chosen, a new tab on the main screen with the name of the transducer is created
with parameters that vary from transducer to transducer.
Figure 133 – Meter –– Meter Adjustment
10.11 Insert / Edit Point Tab

After adjusting a meter, the screen for entering one of five tests available on
the “Insert / Edit Point” tab is shown.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 134 – Meter – Insert / Edit Point Tab
10.12 Waveform Tab
Figure 135 – Meter – Waveform Tab
10.12.1 Resources of the Waveform Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
It allows 4 different Displayed a new

sizes for window shown in the
visualization of the Figure below for
graphs. further explanation
It allows changing the

Opens the Assign following parameters
Signals window of a single graphic or
where the user all of them: Title,
determines which Legend, Scale, Grid,
values will be shown
Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
Allows you to Insert or file from the waveforms.
Edit either Markings or Take a photo of the chart
Comments in graphics. by storing it on the
clipboard.
Figure 136 – Meter – Software Options Menu – General
Clicking on the Display option in the previous figure brings up the following options:
Shows the RMS values Analog signals are

of the analog signals. shown as a waveform.
Shows the frequency of

Shows the angles of
the analog signals.
the analog signals.
Call the Phasor Tab or Shows the variation of

the Harmonics tab. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Figure 137 – Meter – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
10.13 Phasor Tab

In this screen it is possible to view for each channel the module and the angle value
of the voltage, current or power, as well as the Phasors graph.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 138 – Meter – Phasor Tab
10.13.1Resources of the Phasor Tab.

It allows 4 different sizes Allows you to choose

for visualization of the between the time-
graphs. related or channel-
related lag.
Allows you to choose

between Angle of each This option will be
phasor or phasor lag. shown in the next
Figure for more
details.
Shows the Trajectorys.

will be shown on the Take a photo of the chart by storing it Scale, Grid, Table and
graphs. on the clipboard. Dimensions.
Figure 139 – Meter – Phasor Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:
display of the
following values:
Module, angle, actual
value, imaginary value,
lag, instantaneous
amplitude, frequency
and frequency
variation.
Figure 140 – Meter – Phasor Tab – Show Columns
10.14 Harmonics Tab

Making a double click on the tab "Harmonics" occurs maximizing this screen.
Figure 141 – Meter – Harmonics Tab
10.14.1 Resources of the Harmonics Tab.


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
It allows 4 different sizes for

visualization of the graphs.
Opens the Assign following parameters of
Signals window where a single graphic or all of
the user determines them: Title, Legend,
which values will be Scale, Grid, Table and
shown on the graphs. Dimensions.
Allows you to Insert or Take a photo of the chart

Edit either Markings or by storing it on the
Comments in graphics. clipboard.
Figure 142 – Meter – Harmonics Tab – Resources
10.15 Test
The test of the transducer aims to inject voltage and current and measure, through the
CE-OSU, the amount of pulses / energy in a given time, comparing with theoretical and
tolerances.
Figure 143 – Meter – Main screen – Test
The previous figure shows the result of a test of an active power meter. For a better
explanation of this test, this figure is divided into parts.
For each Test set point the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the
table according to the figure below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows the number of Reports nominal values Warns the meter Provides voltage
phases in Test, the of frequency, number tolerance and the and current modulus
current voltage value of pulses, energy and error found. and angle values.
and the power factor. time.
Reports the start Shows measured Warns the standard Provides the
and end date and values of frequency, deviation for Test module and angle
time of the test. number of pulses, Points more than of the line
energy and time. once. voltages.
Figure 144 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Options
Leaving all options checked the fowling data is shown:
Figure 145 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Wh-bi d – Meter01
Below is an analysis of the features of the “Insert / Edit Points” field.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Edit a point that

has already been
tested.
Creates a new
Removes all point.
added points.
Removes
selected point.
Figure 146 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Insert / Edit Points
When the user clicks on “New Point” the following fields can be parameterized.
Type of Test Values to

to be be tested.
performed, They are all
number of tied
Tests and together.
frequency.
Creep current
and tolerance
considered. Current,
voltage and
power factor
Harmonic values to be
injection. adjusted.
Active,
reactive and
apparent
power
values to be
adjusted.
Figure 147 – Meter – Main screen – Test – General Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Next, it will be detailed how each type of test works.
Load - The user can set the number of pulses, the total energy generated or the
amount of time that the load will be applied. Current and voltage is injected into the meter
through the test case and the number of pulses emitted by the meter is captured by the CE-
OSU. At the end of the software will evaluate the amount of pulses captured s with a par.
Mechanism - In this test, pulses are not read through the CE-OSU. In this case, the
user will inform the software of the initial reading on the meter, start the generation of an
energy previously stipulated and after the generation the user again informs the software of
the value of the new energy read. After this process, the software processes and validates the
Test set point.
Injection - In this test, only the energy or generation time is stipulated for applying
voltage and current to the meter. No type of evaluation is done, as the purpose is only to
check the functionality of the equipment. The final evaluation of the software is given
as “Generated”.
No Load - The test case injects only voltage into the meter or a current outside the
meter's directionality or functionality (for example, if it is a Wh meter, a fully inductive or
capacitive current is injected). The test is passed if no pulse is measured by the test
bag. There is also the possibility of considering that a pulse is emitted during this test.
Creep - The user defines in the software the minimum current in percentage of the
nominal current so that the meter is sensitized and sends a pulse. The test is processed and
the meter will be evaluated positively if the pulse is emitted within the expected time

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
For Watt-hour or VAR-hour meters with directionality or bidirectional there is the

option of generating standardized points (IEC 687, IEC 1036 and IEC 521). Note in the
figure that depending on the standard, the current value, the power factor and the tolerance
are fixed. The user enters only the number of pulses, energy or time.
Selects the Currents

type of test. used in the
test and
definition
Selects the of the entry
standard. of the Test
points.
Selects the
class.
Table of
points already
Select the
standardized,
load.
the user only
enters the
number of
pulses, energy
or the time of
each test
point.
Figure 148 – Meter – Main screen – Test – Standardized tests
10.16 Test Settings
In the “Test Settings” tab, the user directs the voltage and current generation
channels, controls the binary outputs, directs the measurement acquisition channels, has the
option of considering the total RMS value in the calculations, adjusts the trigger interface
and you can load a reference table for generation errors

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 149 – Meter – Main screen – Test Settings
Directs voltage Targeting the

and current CEOSU1 module.
channels.
Directs the
binary outputs to
each phase.
This association
is vital to make Enables /
the test possible. disables the
calculation of
the RMS value
in the single-
phase test.
Figure 150 – Meter – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction. Generation Channels

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test table used as a reference for

generation errors. Loading, clearing
and viewing options.
Test trigger interface via

software, binary inputs or
GPS.
Figure 151 – Meter – Test Settings – Reference Meter
Determines the Accepts only

heating time of one pulse in
the meter the Test with
(energization). no load.
Only tension is
generated.
Adds one
more pulse to
the Creep
Determines the
start time of the Test.
meter. Time
required for the In the
previously Mechanism
accumulated Test, hints for
energy to be its realization
removed and not appear.
influence the test. Maximum
waiting time
The start time for pulses in
ends when there Load Test,
is a minimum of reset time
stipulated pulses. between one
Test point and
Determines the relative Determines the room another.
humidity of the air. temperature.
Figure 152 – Meter – Test mode – Measurement conditions

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
POWER
QUALITY
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING ON POWER
QUALITY ANALYZER

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
11 Power Quality - Software for testing Power Quality Analyzer

Software used to perform the calibration of power quality analyzers. It has the
following incident insertion features: Frequency, Magnitude, Flicker, Sag, Swell,
Interruption, Transients (Notches), Unbalance, Harmonics, Inter-Harmonics, Quick Change,
Multi-Incident and Assessment.
The user must configure the tests specifying which generation channels are directed
to voltages and currents, configure the states of the binary outputs at the time of pre-
incident, incident and post-incident. Configure the generation trigger method and still enable
the use of binary inputs if necessary.
This software has the feature “Open Settings when Start” (Software Options menu),
if it is active, when starting the Power Quality software the Settings screen is active
immediately, this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is important to
specify the parameters related to the test.
Figure 153 – Power Quality – Open Settings when Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 154 – Power Quality – Settings screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in the chapter “General
Settings”.
11.2 Quick Access Toolbar

The following figure shows each function on the standard Quick Access toolbar in
detail. The user can view the name of the software used, the software version, which
Create a new Open a saved Save current Customize the Software name
test file. test. test. quick access and version.
bar.
Opens the
options: Equipment used
Restore, and serial
Move, Size,
number.
Minimize,
Maximize
and Close.
Figure 155 – Power Quality – Quick Access Toolbar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
11.3 General Adjustment Range Button

By pressing the General Button, highlighted in the figure below, options will appear
in the upper left corner of how to create a new file, save, open, close, among others, which
are the main control actions.
Create a new test Open a saved

file. file.
Password protect Save the current

certain test file file.
parameters.
Password protect
certain test file
parameters.
Enable/disable options for:
Simulation Mode;
Open Settings when Start.
displayed.
Closes the software.
Figure 156 – Power Quality – General Button Features

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
11.4 Home Menu
Figure 157 – Power Quality – Home Menu
In the home menu several features are available. The following figure describes
hardware configuration resources and generation controls such as start, stop, move to the
next point/line, delete one or all tested points.
Opens a Channel Opens a Hardware Starts signal Pause signal Go to the next
Steering screen. Configuration generation generation. point.
screen. process.
Clears
selected
point and
returns to
Untested
status.
Makes connection Opens a GPS Setup Configuration of Clears all points and
between software screen. GOOSE and SV returns to Untested status.
and hardware. messages.
Figure 158 – Power Quality – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, the resources of the analysis options of the generated quantities
(waveforms, phasors and harmonics) are shown, as well as the General Settings options. It
also displays access to the report, viewing options for the units involved (time and module)
and general options for restoring the layout, viewing layout and recreating graphics.
Shows the Show the Shows time in Rebuilds Enable/disable

Waveform Phasors seconds or the tabs for
tab. tab. cycles. graphics. viewing.
Opens the
report Show values
Calls the configuration based on Show absolute Restores the
Settings Shows the window. primary or or relative default Screen
screen. harmonics. secondary. values. Layout.
Figure 159 – Power Quality – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
11.5 Display Menu

In the display menu, some visualization features are available where the user
customizes the way he/she wants. These features mainly cover window arrangements such
as floating, docking, hiding and closing.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Position the selected Overrides the Hides windows for Return to Enable/disable
window: to the left; selected window. better viewing. default tabs for
on the right, above, Layout. viewing.
below or as a
document.
Rebuild the
graphics.
Hide selected tabs. Hides the selected Close all open Close all open
window. windows. documents.
Figure 160 – Power Quality – Display Menu– Windows and Layout

simulation mode (offline generation, without voltage and current), allow opening the general
settings screen when starting the software, and display the contact from the manufacturer.
Inserts password into Enable/disable simulation Opens the Settings

the test file to control mode. When active, there is no screen when the
the editing of settings. injection of voltage and software starts.
current values.
Shows the
manufacturer's
address, phone,
email and fax.
Figure 161 – Power Quality – Software Options Menu – General
11.7 Test Tab Insert/Edit Point

On this screen, the user chooses how to enter the incident data and which voltage and
current channels will be used.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 162 – Power Quality – Test tab Insert/Edit Point
11.8 Waveform Tab: Group

In this tab the user can see the waveforms of an incident group.
Figure 163 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group
11.8.1 Waveform Tab Features: Group

By right-clicking on the tab, the following features become available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows 4 different Display a new

sizes for viewing window shown in the
graphics. figure below for
further explanation.
Allows you to change

Opens the Assign the following
Signals window parameters for a
where the user single graph or for all:
determines which Title, Legend, Scale,
Grid, Table and
in the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extracts the
COMTRADE or CSV
Allows Inserting or file from the waveforms.
Editing either Markup Take a picture of the
or Comments in chart storing in the
graphics. clipboard.
Figure 164 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group – Resources
By clicking on the Display option in the previous figure, you reach the following
options:
Allows viewing of Allows viewing of

analog graphics. digital graphics.

of the analog signals. shown in waveform.

Shows the angles of
analog signals.
analog signals.
Shows the frequency

Calls the Phasors tab or
variation of analog
the Harmonics tab.
signals.
Figure 165 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Group – Resources – Display
11.9 Waveform Tab: Event

In this tab the user can see the waveforms of a single selected event.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 166 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event
11.9.1 Waveform Tab Features: Event



Grid, Table and
in the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extracts the
COMTRADE or CSV
Figure 167 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event – Resources
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Analog signals are

Shows the RMS values shown in waveform.
of the analog signals.
Shows the angles of

analog signals.
analog signals.
Shows the frequency

variation of analog
signals.
Figure 168 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Event – Resources – Display
11.10 Waveform Tab: Detail

On this tab the user can see the shapes in detail, that is, with two cycles.
Figure 169 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail
11.10.1 Waveform Tab Features: Detail

By right-clicking on the tab the following features become available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Grid, Table and
in the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extracts the
COMTRADE or CSV
Figure 170 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail – Resources
options:
Analog signals are

Shows the RMS values shown in waveform.
Shows the angles of

analog signals.
analog signals.
Shows the frequency

variation of analog
signals.
Figure 171 – Power Quality – Waveform Tab: Detail – Resources – Display
11.11 Phasors tab

On this screen, it is possible to view for each channel the module and the value of the
voltage or current angle, as well as the Phasor graph.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 172 – Power Quality – Phasor Tab
11.11.1Phasors Tab Features

Allows 4 different Allows you to choose

sizes to view graphics. between time or
channel lag.

phasor or phasor shown in the next
offset. figure for better detail.
Shows the
Trajectories.
Opens the Assign Signals Allows you to change the

window where the user following graph
determines which values parameters: Title, Legend,
will be shown in the Scale, Grid, Table and
Takes a photo of the graphic
graphs. Dimensions.
storing in the clipboard.
Figure 173 – Power Quality – Phasors Tab – Resources
By clicking on the Show Columns option in the previous figure, you reach the
following options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

values: Modulus, Angle,
Real Value, Imaginary
Value,Phase Shift,
Instantaneous
Amplitude, Frequency
and Frequency
Variation.
Interval between cursors showing

the minimum, maximum and/or
average instantaneous amplitude
in addition to the RMS value in
the Period.
Figure 174 – Power Quality – Phasors Tab – Show Columns
11.12 Harmonics tab

Double-clicking on the “Harmonics” tab maximizes this screen.
Figure 175 – Power Quality – Harmonics Tab
11.12.1 Harmonics Tab Features


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows 4 different sizes to view

graphics.
Signals window where parameters for a single
the user determines graph or for all: Title,
which values will be Legend, Scale, Grid,
shown in the graphs. Table and Dimensions.
Allows Inserting or Takes a photo of the

Editing Markings or graphic(s) storing it in
Comments in graphics. the clipboard.
Figure 176 – Power Quality – Harmonics Tab – Resources
11.13 Test
The power quality analyzer test can be done using several input signals by clicking
on the “New Point” button, the user has the following options.
Figure 177 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test
An important detail is that the pre-incident and post-incident always use nominal
values of voltage, current and frequency.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.
Frequency, phase voltage

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.
Voltage and current channels

used.
Figure 178 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Frequency
Leaving all options checked the following data is shown:
Event name.
Voltage and current Ramp Duration Time.

during the incident.
Minimum frequency
value during the Frequency value to open
Incident. event count.
Total Event Time.
Figure 179 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Frequency
By clicking on “New Point” another type of Incident is inserted.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 180 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Magnitude
Event name. Maximum incident

voltage deviation.
Average voltage during
the incident.
Frequency value to open
event count.
Average current during
the Incident.
Figure 181 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Magnitude

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 182 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Flicker
Event name.
Flicker frequency
value.
Sinusoidal or
square flicker.
Values in absolute
Peak voltage form or percentage
and/or current of fundamental.
values.
Figure 183 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Flicker

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 184 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Sag
Event name.
Total ramp
time.
Final value of
voltage and
limit voltage Final current and
for counting the limit current value
event. for event
counting.
Event time.
Figure 185 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Sag

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 186 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Swell
Event name.
Total ramp
time.
Final value of
voltage and
for event limit current value
counting. for event
counting.
Event time.
Figure 187 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Swell

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 188 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Interruption
Event name.
Total ramp
time.
Final value of
voltage and
for counting the limit current value
event. for event
counting.
Event time.
Figure 189 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Interruption

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 190 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Transients
Event name.
Cutting moment angle.
Waveform cut time.
Current cut value.
Voltage cutoff value.
Figure 191 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Transients

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 192 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Unbalance
Event name. Data entry mode:
* Natural Components.
* Symmetrical Components.
* Rel. Sym. Components.
Module values and

voltage channel angles.
Module values and

current channel angles.
Figure 193 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Unbalance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 194 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Harmonics
Event name. Magnitude in percentage of harmonic

variation according to the number of cycles.
Voltage or
current .
channel.
Harmonic
order,
modulus
and angle
of analog Add or remove
signals. harmonic
orders.
Figure 195 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Definitions – Harmonics

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 196 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Inter-Harmonics
Event name.
Voltage or
current
channel.
Inter-
harmonics,
modulus
and angle Add or remove
of analog inter-harmonic
signals. orders.
Figure 197 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – Definitions – Inter-Harmonics

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of Incident.

and rated current.
Time of each
Incident.

used.
Figure 198 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Quick Change
Event name.
Time of
change, initial Current initial
voltage value, value, current
voltage increment
increment value and
value and current change
speed of speed.
voltage
change.
Figure 199 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Quick Change
By clicking on “New Point” and choosing “Multi-Incident” it is possible to create an

event by configuring the quantities of frequency, flicker, unbalance, harmonics and
interharmonics.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 200 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Multi-Incident
Clicking on “New Point” and choosing “Assessment” inserts the instructions for a
given event to be approved or disapproved.
Figure 201 – Power Quality – Test – Insert/ Edit Points – General Options – Geral – Assessment

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
11.14 Test Points

In the tab “Test Points” it is possible to group the events. To do this, select the
desired events by holding the “Shift” key. The next step is to right click and select the group
option.
Figure 202 – Power Quality – Test – Test Points
11.15 Test Settings

channels, controls the binary outputs and adjusts the trigger interface.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 203 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test Settings
Directs the
voltage and
current
channels.
Binary Output
States in each
Incident.
Figure 204 – Power Quality – Main Screen – Test Settings – Direc. Generation Channel

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Interface de disparo podendo Configura a lógica do disparo,

ser por Software, Lógica insere atraso intencional caso
Entrada Binária ou sinal de necessário.
GPS.
Figure 205 – Power Quality – Trigger Interf. – Trigger Logic

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CT
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
TESTING
SOFTWARE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12 CT – Current Transformer Testing Software

Developed to perform manual and / or automatic tests on current transformers, the
“CT” software allows the simultaneous generation of current and / or voltage signals and the
measurement of current and / or voltage signals to assess the correct functioning of the CTs.
In it, the user defines, for each signal, a generation channel and a measurement
channel according to the configuration of the test equipment. This software is
only compatible for the CE-7012 and CE-7024.
The following tests can is performed:
 Transformation Ratio;
 Transformation Ratio (using tension);
 Transformation Ratio for Rogowski coil;
 Transformation Ratio for low power;
 Burden or Load and Power Factor;
 Lifting of the magnetization curve;
 Winding resistance with temperature compensation;
 Insulation test;
 Polarity test.
The user has the possibility to carry out the capture of the tests, fully
automatically, so that the software controls the generation time and automatically captures
the points. The second semi-way automatic user controls generation software and capture
points and the third way the user manual controls the generation time and the time of capture
points.
12.2 Main screen

In the main software screen CT user targeting the generation channels and
measurements, controls the generation of signals, controls hardware configuration, choose
the type of test and view the wiring diagram according to the setting made in the suitcase of
test.
The user can configure the adjustment screen to facilitate the preparation of the
report. There are icons to start or to generate the test.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting” ( Software Options
menu ) , if it is active, when starting the CT software the Settings screen is active

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
immediately, this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important to
Figure 206 – CT – Open Settings at Star
Figure 207 – CT – Main screen


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

test file. test. current test. Quick Access
Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Minimize, Maximize
and serial
number.
Figure 208 – CT – Quick Access Bar

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 209 – CT – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.5 Home Menu
Figure 210 – CT – Home Menu
features of hardware configurations, editing of results and generation control.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Reissue Shows the tests Initiates

Orientation for Hardware the current performed or whether it signal
screen. Configuration. test. is being edited. generation.
Opens a screen Opens a screen for Insert a Excludes Deletes Stop signal
for GPS Setup. GOOSE and SV new test. all tests. the generation.
Configuration. current
test.
Figure 211 – CT – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation
The figure below shows the general settings resources, access to the report and general
options for restoring and viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Current channel Returns to

Settings offset correction. the standard
Screen. layout.
Voltage channel Shows the Enables / disables

offset correction. configuration tabs for viewing.
of the report.
Figure 212 – CT – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout
12.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 213 – CT – View Menu – Windows and Layout

allows the opening of the general settings screen when starting the software, activates
filters frequency measurement and displays the manufacturer's contact.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in Opens the Enables binary It separates the Shows the
Settings Screen
the Test file in inputs and visualization of the manufacturer’s
when starting analog signals and
order not to allow the Manual GOOSES inputs to address, phone,
editing of certain perform the test. the binary outputs in email and fax.
software.
two tabs.
settings.
Enables / disables Enables / disables a Enables binary inputs Enables / disables

automatic gain filter via software to to perform tests. special inputs for AC
control. eliminate frequencies or DC
other than what is measurements.
desired.
Figure 214 – CT – Software Options Menu – General

This Screen becomes active when you click the Settings button on
the Home tab within the Options Field.
Figure 215 – CT – Adjustments button
data related to the test, the device Test set and the person responsible for the
test. There is also the Systems tab, where the user informs the nominal values of frequency,

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 216 – CT – Settings Screen – General
12.9 TC Tab
The following will explain all the resources available in the sub- tabs.
12.9.1 Relationship
In this tab, the user verifies the transformation ratio of the CTs, both automatically
and manually. You can also perform load (Burden) and polarity tests. There is also a tab
with the connection diagram between the TC and the test case. This connection is changed
according to the configuration set in the CE-7012 or CE-7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 217 – CT – Relation and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the Ratio test are detailed.
Designation Nominal value Multiplying Value used Module and If enabled, the
of channels of the primary factor of in the test angle values measurements
for and secondary nominal and its (Manual Input). are entered
generation current. values. increment. manually.
and
measurement
.
Enable
automatic test.
Percentage Adjustment of Final test result showing Saves the

and absolute Burden and Burden, power factor, Ratio, values during
tolerances for power factor percentage error and Polarity. the test.
the test. values.
Figure 218 – CT – Sub-tab - Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.2 Relation to Voltage

In this tab, the user verifies the transformation ratio of the CTs both automatically
and manually, using in this case voltage instead of current. In the figure below, all fields of
the Ratio test using voltage are detailed.
Figure 219 – CT – Voltage Relation and Connection Scheme
generation current. values. increment. manually.
and
measurement
.
Enable
automatic
test.
Percentage Average Final test result showing Saves the

and absolute number of Ratio, percentage error and values during
tolerances for purchases. Polarity found. the test.
the test.
Figure 220 – CT – Sub tab - Relation to Voltage

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.3 Ratio Rogowski

In this tab, the user checks the Rogowski coil transformation ratio. In the Figure
below, all fields of the Test by Ratio Rogowski are detailed.
Figure 221 – CT – Rogowski Ratio and Connection Scheme
Designation of Nominal value of Multiplying Value used Module and If enabled, the
channels for the primary current factor of angle values
in the test measurements
generation and and secondary nominal (Manual Input).
voltage. and its are entered
measurement. values. increment. manually.
Percentage Average Enable Final test result showing Saves the

and absolute number of automatic Ratio, percentage error and values during
tolerances for purchases. test. Polarity found. the test.
the test.
Figure 222 – CT – Sub tab - Rogowski Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.4 Low Power Ratio

and manually.
Figure 223 – CT – Low Power Ratio and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the low power ratio test are detailed.

the test.
Figure 224 – CT – Sub tab - Low Power Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.5 Burden
In this test, an evaluation of the burden. This test can also be done together with the
transformation relation in the sub tab relation.
Figure 225 – CT – Burden and Wiring Diagram
Enable
automatic
Maximum Burden test. Final test result showing Saves the
value and minimum loading and power factor. values during
power factor value. the test.
Figure 226 – CT – Sub tab– Burden

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.6 Magnetization Curve

Figure 227 – CT – Magnetization Curve and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the magnetization curve test are detailed.
Designation of Maximum values Value used Minimum and

channels for of injected in the test maximum limits for
generation and voltage and and its voltage and knee chain.
measurement. measured current. increment.
Figure 228 – CT – Sub tab - Magnetization Curve

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.7 Winding Resistance

Choosing the current and voltage channels, the software evaluates the value of the
CT winding resistance including the copper temperature value.
Figure 229 – CT – Winding Resistance and Connection Scheme
All winding test fields are detailed in the figure below.
Designation of Nominal Voltage and If enabled, the It considers the copper

channels for current values
value of the measurements temperature to evaluate
generation and (Manual Input).
injected are entered the resistance. Values in
measurement. current. manually. Celsius or Fahrenheit.
.
Enable
automatic test.
Minimum and Percentage difference Current, minimum and Saves the

maximum possible allowed between maximum resistance values values during
and expected values maximum and measured. Deviation between the test.
for the test. minimum values. values, time and final result.
Figure 230 – CT – Sub tab – Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.8 Insulation sub tab

In this mode, the user evaluates the insulation level.
Figure 231 – CT – Insulation and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the Insulation test are detailed.
Designation of Voltage value Nominal Values measured

channels for adjusted for the frequency at the current
generation and test. value for time and
measurement. the test. maximum values.
Enable
automatic test.
Current and When the Test time and Saves the

maximum limit is
maximum time final result. values during
reached, the test is
allowed for the interrupted. the test.
test.
Figure 232 – CT – Sub tab– Insulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
12.9.9 Polarity
In this tab, the user checks the polarity of the CT.
Figure 233 – CT – Polarity and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the Polarity test are detailed.
Designation of Nominal value Multiplying Value used Module and If enabled, the
channels for factor of angle values
of the primary in the test measurements
generation and nominal (Manual Input).
and secondary and its are entered
measurement. currents. values. increment. manually.
Saves the
Average values during
number of Enable automatic test. Polarity final result and whether the test.
purchases. it is approved or disapproved.
Figure 234 – CT – Sub tab – Polarity

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
VT
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMERS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13 VT - Software for Testing Potential Transformers

Developed to perform manual and / or automatic tests on potential transformers, the
“VT” software allows the simultaneous generation of current and / or voltage signals and the
measurement of current and / or voltage signals to assess the correct operation of the PTs.
channel according to the configuration of the test equipment. This software is only
compatible for the CE-7012 and CE-7024.
The following tests can be performed:
 Transformation Ratio with electronic output;
 Polarity test.
The user has the possibility to carry out the capture of the tests, fully automatically,
so that the software controls the generation time and automatically captures the points. The
second semi-way automatic user controls generation software and captures points and the
third way the user manual controls the generation time and the time of capture points.
13.2 Main screen

On the main screen of the VT software, the user directs the generation and
measurement channels, controls the signal generation, controls the hardware configuration,
chooses the type of test and visualizes the connection diagram according to the configuration
made in the test case.
This software has the feature “Open Settings at Start” ( Software Options menu ) , if
it is active, when starting the VT software the Settings screen is active immediately, this
related to the test

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 235 – VT – Open Settings at Start
Figure 236 – VT – Main screen


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Minimize, Maximize
and serial
number.
Figure 237 – VT – Quick Access Bar

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 238 – VT – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.5 Home Menu
Figure 239 – VT – Home Menu

Orientation screen. for Hardware the current performed or whether it signal
Configuration. test. is being edited. generation.
Configuration. tests. current
test.
Figure 240 – VT – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Screen. layout.

of the report.
Figure 241 – VT – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout
13.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 242 – VT – View Menu – Windows and Layout


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in Opens the Enables binary Enables / disables a Capture the
the Test file so as Settings inputs and filter via software to point and stop
not to allow the Screen when GOOSES inputs to eliminate the generation
editing of certain starting the perform the test. frequencies other
VT software. than what is desired.
settings.
Enables / disables Enables binary inputs Enables / disables Shows the

automatic gain to perform tests. special inputs for AC manufacturer’s
control. or DC address, phone,
measurements. email and fax.
Figure 243 – VT – Software Options Menu – General

This Screen becomes active when you click the Settings Button on the Home tab
within the Options field.
Figure 244 – VT – Adjustments button
test. There is also the Systems tab where the user informs the nominal values of frequency,

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 245 – VT – Settings Screen – General
13.9 TP tab
The following will explain all the resources available in the sub tab.
13.9.1 Ratio
In this tab, the user verifies the transformation ratio of the TPs both automatically
and manually. You can also perform burden and polarity tests. There is also a tab with the
connection diagram between the TP and the test case. This connection is changed according
to the configuration set in the CE-7012 or CE-7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 246 – VT – Relation and Connection Scheme
generation voltage. values. increment. manually.
and
measurement
.
Enable automatic
Adjustment of
test.
Burden and
power factor
values.
Percentage Final test result showing the Saves the

and absolute Burden, power factor, Ratio, values during
tolerances for percentage error and Polarity the test.
the test. found.
Figure 247 – VT – Sub-aba – Relationship

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.9.2 Relation to Electronic Output

and manually.
Figure 248 – VT – Relation to Electronic Output and Connection Scheme
Next, all fields of the Ratio test with electronic output are detailed.
channels for of the primary factor of in the test angle values measurements
generation and and secondary nominal and its (Manual Input). are entered
measurement. current. values. increment. manually.

the test.
Figure 249 – VT – Sub tab – Relation with Electronic Output

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.9.3 Burden
In this test, an evaluation of the burden. This test can also be done together with
the transformation ratio in the sub tab.
Figure 250 – VT – Burden and Wiring Diagram
In the figure below, all fields of the Burden test are detailed.
channels for of the factor of in the test angle values measurements
generation and secondary nominal and its (Manual Input). are entered
measurement. voltage. values. increment. manually.
Enable
automatic test.
Adjustment of Final test result showing the Saves the
Burden and Burden and power factor values during
power factor found. the test.
values.
Figure 251 – VT – Sub tab– Burden

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.9.4 Insulation
Figure 252 – VT – Insulation and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the insulation test are detailed.

Enable
automatic test.

maximum limit is
test.
Figure 253 – VT – Sub tab – Insulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
13.9.5 Polarity
This tab the user checks the polarity of TP.
Figure 254 – VT – Polarity and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the polarity test are detailed.
Saves the
values during
Average number Enable Polarity final result and whether the test.
of purchases. automatic test. it is approved or disapproved.
Figure 255 – VT – Sub tab – Polarity

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
TRANSFOR-
MER
POWER TRANSFORMER TESTING
SOFTWARE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
14 Transformer – Power Transformer Testing Software

Developed to perform manual and / or automatic tests on power transformers, the
“Transformer” software allows the simultaneous generation of current and / or voltage
signals and the measurement of current and / or voltage signals to assess the correct
functioning of the CTs.
channel according to the configuration of the test equipment. This software is
only compatible for the CE-7012 and CE-7024.
 Transformation Ratio in a three-phase manner;
second semi-way automatic user controls generation software and capture points and the
14.2 Main screen

On the main screen of the Transformer software, the user directs the generation and
measurement channels, controls the generation of signals, controls the hardware
configuration, chooses the type of test and visualizes the wiring diagram according to the
configuration made in the test case.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting” ( Software Options
menu ) , if it is active, when starting the Transformer software the Settings screen is active

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 256 – Transformer – Open Settings at Start
Figure 257 – Transformer – Main screen


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the
options: Restore,
Move, Size,
Minimize, Equipment
Maximize and used and serial
Close. number.
Figure 258 – Transformer – Quick Access Bar

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 259 – Transformer – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
14.5 Home Menu
Figure 260 – Transformer – Home Menu
In the start menu dive resources are available. The following figure describes

for GPS Setup. the current generation.
GOOSE and SV new test. all tests. test.
Configuration.
Figure 261 – Transformer – Hardware, Results and Generation
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Current Returns to

Settings channel offset the standard
Screen. correction. layout.
Voltage Shows the Enables / disables

channel offset configuration tabs for viewing.
correction. of the report.
Figure 262 – Transformer – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout
14.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 263 – Transformer – View Menu – Windows and Layout


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Settings Screen filter via software to
the Test file so as inputs and point and stop
when starting eliminate frequencies
not to allow the the Manual GOOSES inputs to other than what is the generation.
editing of certain software. perform the test. desired.
settings.
Enables / disables Enables / disables Enables binary inputs Shows the

automatic gain special inputs for AC to perform tests. manufacturer’s
control. or DC measurements. address, phone,
email and fax.
Figure 264 – Transformer – Software Options Menu – General

Figure 265 – Transformer – Adjustments button
In General mode, there is the General Information tab where the user enters all the
voltage, current and power, among others. There is a tab for Notes and Observations for

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 266 – Transformer – General Screen – Settings
14.9 Transformer tab

14.9.1 Relationship
In this tab, the user verifies the transformation Ratio of the power transformers both
automatically and manually. You can also perform winding and insulation
resistance tests. There is also a tab with the connection diagram between the TP and the test
case. This connection is changed according to the configuration set in the CE-7012 or CE-
7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 267 – Transformer – Relation and Connection Scheme
Designation of Nominal value Type of Value used Enables Choose the

channels for of the primary connection of in the test. earthing and phase to be
generation and and secondary the windings automatic tested.
measurement. voltage. and lag. test.
Percentage Number of Binary outputs to increase and

tolerance for transformer taps. decrease Tap. The tap
the test. switching time is adjusted.
Figure 268 – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
14.9.2 Ratio – 3P
and manually.
Figure 269 – Transformer – Ratio – 3F and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the three-phase ratio test are detailed.
Designation of Nominal value Test value and Frequency used

channels for generation
of the primary enable / disable in the test.
and measurement of
the three phases. and secondary automatic test.
voltage.
Percentage Number of Binary outputs to increase and Saves the

and absolute transformer taps. decrease Tap. The tap values during
tolerances for switching time is adjusted. the test.
the test.
Figure 270 – Transformer – Sub Tab– Ratio – 3P

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
14.9.3 Winding resistance

winding resistance of the transformer, including considering the value of
the copper temperature.
Figure 271 – Transformer – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the winding resistance test are detailed.

channels for value of the current values measurements temperature to evaluate
generation and injected (Manual Input). are entered the resistance. Values in
.

Figure 272 – Transformer – Sub tab– Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
14.9.4 Insulation
Figure 273 – Transformer – Insulation and Connection Scheme
Designation of Voltage value Nominal The three types Values measured

channels for adjusted for the frequency of connections. at the current
Enable
automatic test.

maximum limit is
test.
Figure 274 – Transformer – Sub tab– Insulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
RESISTAN-
CE
RESISTANCE TESTING SOFTWARE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
15 Resistance – Resistance Software Testing

Developed to perform manual and / or automatic tests on resistances, the Resistance
software allows the simultaneous generation of current and / or voltage signals and the
measurement of current and / or voltage signals to assess the correct functioning of the
resistance values
 Microhmmeter;
 Winding resistance with temperature compensation.
second semi-way automatic user controls the temp the generation and the software captures
points and the third way manual user controls the generation time and the time of capture
points.
15.2 Main screen

In the main screen of the Resistance software, the user directs the generation and
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting”(Software Options
menu) , if it is active, when starting the Resistance software the Settings screen is active

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 275 – Resistance – Open Settings at Start
Figure 276 – Resistance – Main screen


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Software name and
Bar. version.
Equipment used
Opens the and serial
options: number.
Restore, Move,
Size, Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 277 – Resistance – Quick Access Bar

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 278 – Resistance – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
15.5 Home Menu
Figure 279 – Resistance – Home Menu

Configuration. tests. current
test.
Figure 280 – Resistance – Hardware, Results and Generation
The figure below shows the general settings resources, access to the report and
general options for restoring and viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Screen. layout.

of the report.
Figure 281 – Resistance – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout
15.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 282 – Resistance – View Menu – Windows and Layout


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Settings Screen filter via software to
when starting eliminate
not to allow the the Manual GOOSES inputs to the generation.
editing of certain perform the test. frequencies other
software.
than what is desired.
settings.
Enables / disables Enables binary inputs Enables / disables Shows the

automatic gain to perform tests. special inputs for AC manufacturer’s
control. or DC address, phone, email
measurements. and fax.
Figure 283 – Resistance – Software Options Menu – General

Figure 284 – Resistance – Adjustments button
It is also opened at software startup, if the “Opens Settings when Starting” option in
the “Software Options” tab is selected.
In General mode there is the General Information tab, where the user enters all the
data related to the test, the device Test set and the person responsible for the test, there is the
Systems tab, where the user informs the nominal values of frequency, voltage, current and
power among others, there is a tab for Notes and Observations for various records.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 285 – Resistance – Settings Screen – General
15.9 Resistance Tab

The following will explain all the resources available in the sub tabs.
15.9.1 Micro-ohmmeter
In this tab the user checks the resistance values. There is also a tab with the
connection diagram between the resistance and the test case. This connection is changed

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 286 – Resistance – Micro-ohmmeter and Connection Scheme
In the figure below is detailed all the fields of the microhmmeter test.
Designation of Nominal Voltage and If enabled, the

channels for current values
value of the measurements
generation and (Manual Input).
injected are entered
measurement. current. manually.
.
Enable
automatic test.
Minimum and Current, minimum and Saves the

maximum possible maximum resistance values values during
and expected values measured. Time and final result. the test.
for the test.
Figure 287 – Resistance – Sub tab – Micro-ohmmeter

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
15.9.2 Winding Resistance

Choosing the current and voltage channels, the software evaluates the winding
resistance value even considering the copper temperature value.
Figure 288 – Resistance – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme

.
Enable
automatic test.

Figure 289 – Resistance – Sub tab – Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
PMASTER
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING IN TCS, TPS,
POWER TRANSFORMER AND RESISTANCE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16 PMaster - Software for testing in TCs, TPS, power transformer and

resistance

The PMaster software is the unification of the CT, VT, Transformer and Resistance
software. Developed to perform manual and / or automatic tests on current transformers,
power transformers, power and resistance transformers. The PMaster software allows the
simultaneous generation of current and / or voltage signals and the measurement of current
and / or voltage signals to assess the correct functioning of the instruments under test.
The tests that can be performed on CTs are:
 Transformation Ratio (using voltage);
 Transformation Ratio for Rogowski coil;
 Transformation Ratio for low power;
 Survey of the Magnetization Curve;
 Polarity test.
The tests that can be performed on TPs are:
 Transformation Ratio with electronic output;
 Polarity test.
The tests that can be performed on power transformers are:
 Transformation Ratio in a three-phase manner;

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

The tests that can be performed in resistance are:
 Micro-ohmmeter;
 Winding resistance with temperature compensation.
second semi-way automatic user controls generation software and captures points and the
16.2 Main screen

In the main screen of the PMaster software, the user directs the generation and
report. There are icons for starting or generating the test.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting” (Software Options
menu) , if it is active, when starting the PMaster software the Settings screen is active
Figure 290 – PMaster – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 291 – PMaster – Main screen


test file. test. current test. Quick Access Software name
Bar. and version.
Equipment used
Opens the and serial
options: Restore,
Move, Size, number.
Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 292 – PMaster – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 293 – PMaster – General Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.5 Home Menu
Figure 294 – PMaster – Home Menu

for GPS Setup. the generation.
GOOSE and SV new test. all tests. current
Configuration. test.
Figure 295 – PMaster – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Screen. layout.

of the report.
Figure 296 – PMaster – Home Menu – Options, Report and Layout
16.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 297 – PMaster – View Menu – Windows and Layout


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Settings filter via software to
Screen when eliminate frequencies
not to allow the GOOSES inputs to other than what is the generation.
editing of certain starting the perform the test. desired.
software. tabs.
settings.
Enables / disables Enables / disables Enables binary inputs Shows the

automatic gain special inputs for AC to perform tests. manufacturer’s
control. or DC measurements. address, phone,
email and fax.
Figure 298 – PMaster – Software Options Menu – General

This Screen becomes active when you click the Settings button on the Home tab
Figure 299 – PMaster – Adjustments button
It is also opened at software startup, if the Opens Settings when Starting option in the
Software Options tab is selected.
data related to the test, the Test set device and the person responsible for the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 300 – PMaster – Settings Screen – General
16.9 TC Tab
16.9.1 Ratio
In this tab, the user checks the transformation ratio of the TCs both automatically and
manually. You can also perform Burden and Polarity tests. There is also a tab with the
connection diagram between the TC and the Test set. This connection is changed according
to the configuration set in the CE-7012 or CE-7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 301 – PMaster –TC – Relation and Connection Scheme
Enable
automatic test.

tolerances for power factor percentage error and Polarity the test.
the test. values. found.
Figure 302 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.2 Voltage Ratio

and manually.
Figure 303 – PMaster –TC – Voltage Ratio and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the voltage relation test are detailed.
Enable
automatic
test.
Percentage Final test result showing Saves the

and absolute Ratio, percentage error and values during
tolerances for Polarity found. the test.
the test.
Figure 304 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Voltage Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.3 Ratio Rogowski

In this tab, the user verifies the transformation ratio of Rogowski coils.
Figure 305 – PMaster –TC – Ratio Rogowski and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the Rogowski ratio test are detailed.

the test.
Figure 306 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab– Ratio Rogowski

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.4 Lower Power Ratio

and manually.
Figure 307 – PMaster –TC – Low Power Ratio and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the low power ratio test are detailed.

the test.
Figure 308 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Low Power Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.5 Burden
In this test, an evaluation of the loading is performed (Burden). This test can also be
done together with the transformation relation in the sub tab relation.
Figure 309 – PMaster –TC – Burden and Connection Scheme
Enable
automatic test.
Maximum Burden Final test result showing Saves the
value and minimum loading and power factor. values during
power factor value. the test.
Figure 310 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Burden

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.6 Magnetization Curve

Figure 311 – PMaster –TC – Magnetization Curve and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the magnetization curve test are detailed.
Designation of Maximum values Value used Minimum and

channels for of injected in the test maximum limits for
generation and voltage and and its voltage and knee chain.
measurement. measured current. increment.
Figure 312 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Magnetization Curve

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

CT winding resistance including the copper temperature value.
Figure 313 – PMaster –TC – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme
Designation of Nominal Measured It considers the copper

channels for value of the current and temperature to evaluate
generation and injected voltage the resistance. Values in
measurement. current. values. Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Enable
automatic test.
Minimum and Percentage Current, minimum and Saves the

maximum possible difference allowed maximum resistance values values during
and expected values between maximum measured. Deviation between the test.
for the test. and minimum values, time and final result.
values.
Figure 314 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.8 Insulation Sub tab

Figure 315 – PMaster –TC – Insulation and Connection Scheme

Enable
automatic test.

maximum limit is
test.
Figure 316 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Insulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.9.9 Polarity
In this tab, the user checks the polarity of the CT.
Figure 317 – PMaster –TC – Polarity and Connection Scheme
channels for factor of angle values
of the primary in the test measurements
generation and nominal (Manual Input).
and secondary and its are entered
measurement. values.
currents. increment. manually.
Saves the
values during
Enable Polarity final result and whether the test.
automatic it is approved or disapproved.
test.
Figure 318 – PMaster –TC – Sub tab – Polarity

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.10 TP tab
16.10.1 Ratio
and manually. You can also perform load (Burden) and polarity tests. There is also a tab
with the connection diagram between the TP and the test case. This connection is changed
Figure 319 – PMaster –TP – Ratio and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
measurement. voltage. values. increment. manually.
Enable automatic
test.

tolerances for power factor percentage error and Polarity the test.
the test. values. found.
Figure 320 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Ratio
16.10.2 Ratio with Electronic Output

and manually.
Figure 321 – PMaster –TP – Ratio with Electronic Output and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, all fields of the electronic ratio test are detailed.

the test.
Figure 322 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Ratio
16.10.3 Burden
In this test, an evaluation of the loading is performed (Burden). This test can also be
done together with the transformation relation in the sub tab relation.
Figure 323 – PMaster –TP – Burden and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
of channels of the factor of in the test angle values measurements
for secondary nominal and its (Manual Input). are entered
generation voltage. values. increment. manually.
and
measurement
.
Enable
automatic
Adjustment of test. Final test result showing the Saves the
Burden and Burden and power factor values during
power factor found. the test.
values.
Figure 324 – PMaster –TP – Sub tap – Burden
16.10.4 Insulation
Figure 325 – PMaster –TP – Insulation and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Enable
automatic test.

maximum limit is
test.
Figure 326 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab – Insulation
16.10.5 Polarity
This tab the user checks the polarity of TP.
Figure 327 – PMaster –TP – Polarity and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Saves the
values during
Enable Polarity final result and whether the test.
automatic test. it is approved or disapproved.
Figure 328 – PMaster –TP – Sub tab– Polarity
16.11 Transformer Tab

16.11.1 Ratio
In this tab, the user verifies the transformation ratio of the power transformers both
automatically and manually. You can also perform winding and insulation resistance
tests. There is also a tab with the connection diagram between the TP and the test case. This
connection is changed according to the configuration set in the CE-7012 or CE-7024.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 329 – PMaster – Transformer – Relation and Connection Scheme
Designation of Nominal value Type of Value used Enables Choose the

channels for of the primary connection of in the test. earthing and phase to be
generation and and secondary
measurement. the windings automatic tested.
voltage. and lag. test.

tolerance for transformer taps. decrease Tap. The tap values during
the test. switching time is adjusted. the test.
Figure 330 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.11.2 Ratio – 3P
and manually.
Figure 331 – PMaster – Transformer – Ratio – 3P and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the three-phase relation test are detailed.
Designation of Nominal value Test value and

channels for generation
of the primary enable / disable
and measurement of
the three phases. and secondary automatic test.
voltage.

and absolute transformer taps. decrease Tap. The tap values during
tolerances for switching time is adjusted. the test.
the test.
Figure 332 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Ratio – 3P

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

winding resistance of the transformer, including considering the value of
the copper temperature.
Figure 333 – PMaster – Transformer – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme

.

Figure 334 – PMaster – Sub tab – Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.11.4 Insulation
Figure 335 – PMaster – Transformer – Insulation and Connection Scheme

Enable
automatic test.

maximum limit is
test.
Figure 336 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Insulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
16.12 Resistance Tab

16.12.1 Micro-ohmmeter
In this tab the user checks the resistance values. There is also a tab with the diagram
of the connection between the resistance and the test case. This connection is changed
Figure 337 – PMaster – Resistance – Micro-ohmmeter and Connection Scheme
In the figure below, all fields of the micro-ohmmeter test are detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Designation of Nominal Voltage and If enabled, the

channels for value of the current values measurements
generation and injected (Manual Input). are entered
measurement. current. manually.
.
Enable
automatic test.
Minimum and Current, minimum and Saves the

maximum possible maximum resistance values values during
and expected values measured. Time and final result. the test.
for the test.
Figure 338 – PMaster – Resistance – Sub tab – Micro-ohmmeter
16.12.2Winding resistance
Choosing the current and voltage channels, the software evaluates the winding
resistance value even considering the copper temperature value.
Figure 339 – PMaster – Resistance – Winding resistance and Connection Scheme

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

.
Minimum and Percentage Current, minimum and Saves the

maximum possible difference allowed maximum resistance values values during
and expected values between maximum measured. Deviation between the test.
for the test. and minimum values, time and final result.
values.
Figure 340 – PMaster – Resistance – Sub tab – Winding resistance

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
GENERAL
SETTINGS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
17 CE-6003/CE-6006 Hardware Settings Screen

This is one of the main screens to present all the software. It is responsible for the
hardware configurations for perfect functioning in the tests performed. The Settings screen
is illustrated in the Figure below. This screen is active when you click on the “Config. Hrd”
located in the “home” menu in the “Hardware” part. In this screen the user has the option
to choose the working mode, whether the connection will be made with or without External
Hardware, whether the box will operate with all analog outputs (standard or free mode)
generating voltage, or generating current, or voltage and current, the user can configure the
initial state of the binary outputs, the operating mode of the binary inputs (by contact or by
voltage) and the value of the auxiliary source (default options or “other” options).
Master Model of Serial number of Initial Value at which

Auxiliary
equipment equipment the equipment state of
Source will be
configurations. used as used as a master. the binary adjusted.
master. outputs.
Standard
configura
tions of
voltage
channels.
Standard
configura Schematic
tions of diagram of
current External PT. connections.
channels.
Mode of operation
of the binary
inputs (contact or
Configur voltage).
ation in
electrom
echanical External CT.
mode.
Figure 341 – Description of Hardware Configuration Standard Mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
To access the settings of the external TPs and TCs, just click on the three points then
the following screen, for TP and TC respectively, will open:
Enables / disables.
Description.
Max module.
Transformation
Ratio.
Max./Min.
Frequency of
operation.
Polarity Polarity
inversion. inversion.
Delay time related
to angular lag.
Figure 342 – Config description of external TP and TC
It allows special
configurations
for transient
exits.
Generation of 6
amplifiers defined
Instruction
by the user.
s and obs.
Display of the Settings Screen when the Analog

Outputs mode selected is Free mode and Work mode is
with Hard. External.
Figure 343 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with free analog outputs
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
If the user has an external CONPROVE amplifier to work with his CE-6003 / CE-
6006, it is necessary to inform some configurations of the case that will work in “SLAVE”
mode:
Model of the CONPROVE Serial number of CONPROVE

equipment used as a slave. equipment used as a slave.
Figure 344 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. CONPROVE
If the user has any external amplifier to work together with his CE-6003 / CE-6006
working as an analog output, it is necessary to inform some settings of the equipment that
will work in “SLAVE” mode:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose Descripti List RMS Nom. - Value of the input module in the Amplifier.
on of the
between of RMS Excit. - Output Module value in the Amplifier.
amplifier
Analog others Offset Excit. - Correction of the offset value.
Output. or Ampl. t Def. - Angular lag that the Amplifier causes in the 60 Hz output
Anlg Entry. signal. Value given in seconds.
Thermal limits
of ampl. of
voltage.
Thermal limits
of ampl. of
current.
Figure 345 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. Output set p / user
working as an analog input, it is necessary to inform some settings of the equipment that

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose Descri List RMS Nom. - Value of the Output module in the Amplifier.
between ption of RMS Cond. - Value of the Input Module in the Amplifier.
Anlg Output. of the others Offset Cond. - Correction of the offset value.
or Anlg amplifi Ampl. t Def. - Angular lag that the Amplifier causes in the 60 Hz output
Entry. er signal. Value given in seconds.
Inverts the
signal of each
amplifier.
Operating
frequencies.
Figure 346 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode w / Amplif. User defined input extension
18 Hardware Settings Screen CE-7012/CE-7024

This is one of the main screens to present all the software. It is responsible for the
hardware configurations for perfect functioning in the tests performed.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The Settings screen is illustrated in the Figure below. This screen is active when you
click on the “Config. Hrd” located in the “home” menu in the “Hardware” part. In this
screen the user has the option to choose the working mode, whether the connection will be
made with or without External Hardware, whether the box will operate with all analog
outputs (standard or free mode) generating voltage, or generating current, or voltage and
current, the user can configure the initial state of the binary outputs, the operation mode of
the binary inputs (by contact or by voltage) and the value of the auxiliary source (default
options or “other” options).
Master Model of Serial number of Initial Value at
equipment equipment used the equipment state of which
configurations. as master. used as a master. the binary Auxiliary
outputs. Source will
be adjusted.
Standard
configura
tions of
voltage
channels.
Schematic
diagram of
connections.
Standard
External PT.
configura
tions of Operation mode of
current the binary inputs
channels. (contact, voltage or
measurement).
External CT.
Figure 347 – Hardware Configurations – Description of Hardware Configuration Standard Mode
To access the settings of the external TPs and TCs, just click on the three points then the
following screen, for TP and TC respectively, will open:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables / disables.
Description.
Max module.
Transformati
on Ratio.
Max./Min.
Frequency of
operation.
Polarity Polarity
inversion. inversion.
Delay time related
to angular lag.
Figure 348 – Hardware Configurations – Configuration Description of external TP and CT
If the user has an external CONPROVE amplifier to work with his CE-6003 / CE-
6006, it is necessary to inform some configurations of the case that will work in “SLAVE”
mode:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Model of the CONPROVE Serial number of CONPROVE

equipment used as a slave. equipment used as a slave.
Figure 349 – Hardware Configurations – Work mode with Amplif. Ext. CONPROVE
working as an analog output, it is necessary to inform some settings of the equipment that

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose Descri List RMS Nom. - Value of the input module in the Amplifier.
between ption of RMS Excit. - Output Module value in the Amplifier.
Anlg Output. of the others Offset Excit. - Correction of the offset value.
Inverts the
signal of each
amplifier.
Operating
frequencies.
Thermal
limits of
ampl. of
voltage.
Thermal
limits of
ampl. of
current.
Figure 350 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode with Amplif. Ext. Output set for user
working as an analog input, it is necessary to inform some settings of the equipment that
will work in “SLAVE” mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose Descri List RMS Nom. - Value of the Output module in the Amplifier.
between ption of RMS Cond. - Value of the Input Module in the Amplifier.
Anlg Output. of the others Offset Cond. - Correction of the offset value.
Inverts the
signal of each
amplifier.
Operating
frequencies.
Figure 351 – Hardware Configurations – Working mode w / Amplif. User defined input extension
19 Direction of analog channels I / O CE-6003 / CE-6006 / CE-7012 / CE-

7024
The concept of channel targeting was created at CTC. In this resource it is possible to
create voltage and current nodes in the software that is totally unrelated to the
hardware. With that, the whole sequence of data created in a specific test and with a specific
bag model is not lost when the equipment is changed. It is enough for the user to associate

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
the new hardware with the existing nodes. To access the settings, click on "Channel
Direction”, in the "Hardware" part located on the "Home" tab.
Access
Hardware Adjust I / Os - Adjust the number of Autoassociate -
configuration. channels according to the parameterized Automatically associates
hardware. the created channels with
Autoassociate - Automatically the respective virtual
Equipment
“Nodes”.
model. associates the channels created with the Clear - Clears all
existing Hardware. channels associated with
Serial number of Clean - Clears all channels.
the equipment.
a node.
Adding or
Removing
Nodes.
System
nominal
values. Manual association of a
Line and Association of “Hardware” with an
source Points with “Node” and an existing
parameters channels. “Point”.
equivalent.
Figure 352 – Description of the Output Channel Direction parameters
In the figure above a direction was made for the exit channels of the suitcase. Note in
the figure below the similarity of the data for the input direction (measurement). The basic
difference is that in CE-6003 / CE-6006 equipment there are only 3 voltage measurement
channels and 3 current measurement channels. In the CE-7012 / CE-7024, there are twelve
channels that can be parameterized for both voltage measurement and current measurement.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 353 – Targeting the Output Channels
In channel targeting there is also the ability to inject a current value that depends on
the sum of other channels or that other channels inject values that depend on a third
party. This feature is used, for example, for tests on distance relays whose measurement is
carried out at two points (a circuit breaker and a half system). To use this feature, associate a
different node for each hardware and keep the same point in the system, as shown in the
figure below (Three different nodes, three current channels and a single point in the system):

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Three different
Three different nodes.
hardware.
Same
point in
System.
Figure 354 – Sum of Channels - Part 1
The third node, which represents the third current channel, is tied to the other two
nodes so that this channel defines the value of the other two or the other two channels define
the value of that third.
Access to
summation
configuration.
Figure 355 – Sum of Channels - Part 2

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Node values
01 and 02
define the
value of the NODE 03
third channel. value defines
the value of
NODS 01 and
02, following a
proportion.
Desired
proportion of
each NODE in
the total sum.
Figure 356 – Sum of Channels Configuration
Current channel of
NO03 that defines the
current value of the
other Nodes.
Figure 357 – Sum of Channels - NO03
The figure below shows the direction of the channels of the binary outputs and
the GOOSE outputs, very similar to the process of the voltage and current generation
channels. The initial state of the binary outputs is defined by the hardware
configuration. The routing is done by associating a channel with a physical output. In the
case of GOOSE messages, in addition to associating a physical output to a channel, it is also
necessary to choose the dataset, for that click on the three buttons. In the case of CE-7012 /
CE-7024 equipment, the option of DC analog output is contemplated, both for voltage and
current.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Description of the targeted Description of the targeted channel.

channel. Associated Hardware.
Associated Hardware. Data type or dataset chosen by the user.
Type of contact.
Figure 358 – Direction of binary outputs and outputs by GOOSE message
Targeting the binary inputs and GOOSE inputs. Note in the figure below that the
channel direction of the transducer inputs (voltage and current) appears. The user simply
associates a channel with a physical entry:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 359 – Direction of binary outputs and outputs by GOOSE message
20 Directing Digital Channels (Sampled Values) I/O / CE-7012 / CE-7024
21 General Settings
The “GENERAL ADJUSTMENTS” option will be detailed below. This feature

appears in all CTC software and has details that will be part of the report along with the tests
performed by the user. The adjustment options that exist are: General information, Systems,
Notes & Obs, Explanatory Figures, Check List, Others and Connections. The figure below
shows the option “GENERAL INFORMATION” which contains data from
the report header.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Descr: Description of the Identif: Identification that the relay has.

test performed.
Type: Type of equipment protected by the multifunction relay,
Date: The date of the example: Line.
Test. This field is
automatically completed. Model: Specific name of a relay, example: model 7UM623.
Manufacturer: Name of the company that manufactures the relay.
Substation: Specific name of the location where Name: Name of the person responsible for
the relay is located. executing the test.
Bay: Name of the set of equipment that the relay Sector: Location of the company where the
makes Part. person responsible works.
Address, City, State: Exact location of the Registration: Secondary identification of the
substation. person responsible.
Figure 360 – Description of General Information

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “SYSTEMS” tab. In it, the
system's base values, impedance data of the line where the relay is connected and data from
the system's equivalent source are parameterized.
Base data for each

System node such
as: Frequency,
Seq. phase,
powers, primary /
secondary
voltages (TP),
primary /
secondary
currents (TC),
PHASE and
NEUTRAL RTP,
PHASE and
NEUTRAL RTC,
Polarity inversion
of TCs and TPs
and mult
constants. to seq.
negative and zero
voltage and
current.
Figure 361 – Description of Systems
Impedance data
of a possible line
/ feeder where
the relay can be
connected:
Reference from
Z to primary,
Current
correction, line
length, line
angle, ground
compensation
parameters
(Earth Factor),
parallel and
mutual line
compensation
parameters.
Figure 362 – Impedance Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
How the source’s

impedance will be
represented and
the parameters in
that way.
Figure 363 – Representation of the Source
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “NOTES & OBS” tab. In it,
the user has a space to report any abnormality, observation, opinion about the test. There is
also the option of extra customizable fields in order to offer more options for general
information.
Dedicated space
for writing user
notes and
observations.
Customizable
extra fields.
Figure 364 – Description of the Notes & Obs fields

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the

“EXPLANATORY FIGURES” tab. In it, the user can include up to three images in
the format .JPEG with space for description. The goal is to make it possible for the user to
include a single line, relay manual section or even photos.
Image Description.
Inserting the
figure.
Field where the Figure

will appear.
Figure 365 – Description of the "Explanatory Figures" fields
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “CHECK LIST” tab. In it,
the user can include several tasks to be performed during commissioning
and, when completed, a check box can be checked confirming the execution.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Check box to
be checked
when Insert ITEM in the
necessary. list or remove an
item from the list.
Figure 366 – Description of the Check List
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “OTHERS” tab. In it the
user can set the deglitch time (the input signal is registered with a time delay)
and debounce (the signal is only registered after a certain time) for binary inputs and inputs
via GOOSE message.
Deglitch / debounce time

for Hardware and
Software from binary
inputs.
Deglitch / debounce
time for Hardware
and Software of
GOOSE inputs.
Figure 367 – Description of the "Others" tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
22 Preferences
The “PREFENCES” option will be detailed below. This feature appears in all CTC
software and has details that will be part of the report along with the tests performed by the
user. This feature allows you to adjust default values for general adjustments that can be
loaded in their respective parameter windows by simply clicking on “Default”. It is possible
to choose directories from which the software can search for a file, choose the company logo
that will go to the report or define colors of the graph. Following is the directory screen.
Default
Choice of language
directories
(where the
for all
software software.
automatically
searches for a
file, when
requested) of
Tests,
explanatory
figures,
overcurrent
curves, comtrade
files (.CFG),
ATP files (.LIS), Choice of an audible
RIO file and alarm for indication of
IEC-61850 overload in the channels.
Substations.
Figure 368 – Software tab settings
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “REPORT” tab. In it, the
user can load the company logo on the report and can also choose the standard language in
which the report would be issued.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of the
Choice of the logo default language.
of the company that
owns the
equipment.
Figure 369 – Report tab settings
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “GRAPHICS” tab. In it, the
user can choose the gradient effect, grid types and colors of the graphics.
Choice of
the gradient
effect and
the colors
used.
Choose
the type of
grid and
the colors
used (grid
and
zoom).
Figure 370 – Graphics tab settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The figure below shows the parameters contained in the “VALUES DEFAULT”
tab. In it, the user can choose default values of “GENERAL SETTINGS”. For the values
parameterized here to be used in the “GENERAL SETTINGS”, the user simply clicks the
“Default” button.
Figure 371 – Settings of the Default Values tab
23 Firmware
24 Data Association
This feature is available in the SEQUENC, RAMPA, MASTER and MANUAL

software’s. It is possible for the user to associate the values of voltage, current, frequency,
impedance, Faults and etc, with default values, so that the saved test is universal for any
situation, just changing this default value. To do this, just right-click on the data you want to
associate and click on the Data Association option. Finally, just choose the variable you
want to associate with a constant.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 372 – Access to the "Data Association" resource
The field in question can be associated with a multitude of quantities that are present
in the software. Even, you can even add a value multiplier and / or adder easing further test
file.
Multiplier.
Greatness that will

be associated with
the field. Value of the
quantity that
can be
changed in
“General
Settings”.
Adder.
Figure 373 – Data Association Features

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
GOOSE MESSAGES
SETTINGS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
25 GOOSE Messages Settings
The GOOSE Messages Settings screen has as its main functionality the configuration
of GOOSE messages exchanged between Intelligent Electronic Devices, or Intelligent
Electronic Devices (IED), defined by the IEC 61850 standard. To view it, just click on the
“Home” tab and on the “Config GOOSE”.
Its main features are:
Reading of files in the SCD (Substation Configuration Description) format, which

contains the GOOSE messages sent by an IED;
Creation of new GOOSE messages, or new sets of DataSet, with attributes also
defined by the user;
Mapping attributes of the DataSet to receive, with 8 input channels, each capable of
monitoring an attribute, allowing the receipt of 8 attributes for the CE-6006. The CE-
7012 and CE-7024, on the other hand, allow the receipt of 44 attributes.
Mapping of DataSet attributes for sending, with 6 output channels, each capable of
sending up to 1 attribute, allowing the sending of up to 6 attributes to the CE-6006. The CE-
7012 and CE-7024, on the other hand, allow the sending of up to 16 attributes.
Figure 374 – Settings of Messages GOOSE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Imports the file Defines that all attributes Defines that all Shows the status
with the GOOSE come from a simulation. attributes come from of each attribute.
mgs. test.
Figure 375 – GOOSE Message Settings - General Setting
On the Settings screen of messages GOOSE principal fields Receive and Send are
displayed and manipulated the attributes to be received and those mapped to shipping.
Enables GOOSE input Adds or removes an

to receive attributes. attribute to a
GOOSE.
Name of the attribute

to be received.
All GOOSE that can
receive an attribute.
Figure 376 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Receive Attribute
On the Settings screen of messages GOOSE principal fields Receive and Send are
displayed and manipulated the attributes to be received and those mapped to shipping.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables GOOSE input
to receive attributes. Adds or removes
an attribute to a
GOOSE.
All GOOSE that can Name of the

send attribute. attribute to be sent.
Inverts the status of the

Attribute type.
GOOSE to be
received.
Figure 377 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Send Attribute
Filter for Select which GOOSE Adds / removes a

GOOSE mgs. mgs are listed. dataset or attribute.
Changes the
ordering of a
dataset or
attribute.
Descriptio
n of each
dataset
with its
attributes.
Figure 378 – Settings of GOOSE messages - GOOSE messages

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
When you select an attribute are obtained the following parameters.
Reference name of Reference

the GOOSE name of the
message control. DataSet.
GOOSE Application identifier.

message Numeric values only.
identifier.
Destination and source MAC address.
What is the revision
of the GOOSE Hexadecimal values.
messages used in the
IEDs. Numeric values Repeating values of the
only. GOOSE message.
Virtual LAN ID Indicates whether the

goose comes from an
and priority
IED in Test mode,
information. from any Test or
Time to live.
from commissioning.
Figure 379 – Settings of GOOSE messages - IED parameters

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
There is the option of mapping 4 parameters for sending GOOSE messages: Review,
Simulation Bit, Test and Commissioning Flag. To select these fields as attributes of a
GOOSE message is just put '#-attribute name'. The figure below exemplifies this
PROCEDURE n to:
Config. receiving the Config. of sending the Selection of the desired

selected parameter. selected parameter. parameters as attributes of
the GOOSE message.
Figure 380 – Settings of GOOSE messages - Map IED parameters
In order to receive GOOSE, there is, in addition to the 4 options previously

demonstrated in the GOOSE sending, the option of mapping the TTL parameter. This
procedure allows the user to check through the software if there was any problem in
receiving the GOOSE message (loss of link on the network). The figures below exemplify
this issue:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Selection of the desired

Config. receiving the
selected parameter. parameter as an attribute
of the GOOSE message.
Figure 381 – TTL mapping on GOOSE Receipt
The led on indicates

that there was a loss
of link in the network
in a time greater than
that configured above
(2000 ms).
Figure 382 – TTL Monitoring Demo

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
26 Settings Messages Sampled Values (SMV or SV)
The main functionality of the SMV Message Settings screen is the configuration
of Sampled Values messages exchanged between Intelligent Electronic Devices, or
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED), defined by the IEC 61850 standard. “Config SV” icon.
Its main features are:
Reading of files in the SCD (Substation Configuration Description) format, which

contains the SV messages sent by an IED;
Creation of new SV messages, or new sets of DataSet, with the attributes also
defined by the user.
Figure 383 – SMV Message Settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Imports the file Defines that all SV Shows the status of

with the SV mgs. messages are from a each SMV
simulation. message.
Figure 384 – SMV Message Settings - General Settings
On the main SMV Message Settings screen, in the Receive and Send fields, the SMV
messages to be received and those mapped for sending are displayed and manipulated.
Enables the input Adds or removes an

channels to receive SMV message to a
channel.
SMV.
Name of the SMV

message.
Error handling made by

the software to lose SV
mgs.
Figure 385 – Settings of Messages SMV - Receive SMV

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Config. error limits in

Sequence and per
second.
Select the types of error

handling:
-Simple interpolation.
-Replacement of delayed
packages.
-Simple interpolation and
replacement.
If you do not want to deal

with the error, configure
how the System should
behave with Ratio to the
delayed or lost packages.
Figure 386 – SMV Message Settings - SMV Receive Error Handling
Enables the output Adds or removes an

channels to send SMV message to a
channel.
SMV.
Name of the SMV

message.
Error simulation done

by the software for
SMV messages.
Figure 387 – Settings of Messages SMV - Send SMV

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Error simulation options:

-Package loss.
-Package delay.
-Duplicated package.
-Corrupted package.
-Error in Quality.
-Change simulation bit.
-Loss of false synchronism.
Configuring SMV packet

error simulation options.
Figure 388 – SMV Message Settings - SMV Send Error Simulation
Filter for SMV Select which SMV Adds / removes a

mgs. mgs are listed. dataset or attribute.
Changes the
ordering of an
SMV
message and /
or attribute.
Descriptio
n of each
SMV
message
with its
attributes.
Figure 389 – Settings of Messages SMV - Posts Sampled Values

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Looking at the previous figure, it appears that for each SMV Value (TCTR or TVTR)
there is a corresponding bitstring (BitString [14]). This field, according to IEC 61850 -7-3,
is called 'Quality Bits' and consists of 14 bits, each of which represents a parameter. The
parameters and their respective values will be explained below:
Table 1 – Details of Quality Bits
Bit(s) IEC 61850-7-3 BitString

Attribute Name Attribute Value Value Default
0-1 Validity Good 00 00
Invalid 01
Reserved 10
Questionable 11
2 Overflow TRUE FALSE
3 Out of Range TRUE FALSE
4 Bad Reference TRUE FALSE
5 Oscillatory TRUE FALSE
6 Failure TRUE FALSE
7 Old Data TRUE FALSE
8 Inconsistent TRUE FALSE
9 Inaccurate TRUE FALSE
10 Source Process 0 0
Substituted 1
11 Test TRUE FALSE
12 Operator Blocked TRUE FALSE
13 *Derived TRUE FALSE
* The Derived parameter is not originally found in IEC 61850-7-3, as it was added to
the Implementation Guideline for Digital Interface to Instrument Transformers using IEC
61850-9-2, being better known as Light Edition or 9-2LE.
Explanation of the meaning of each of the 14 parameters of Quality Bits:
 Validity - the SMV Value can receive three useful attributes:

o Good: indicates that there is no abnormal condition in the acquisition
function or the information source.
o Invalid: indicates that there is an abnormal condition in the
acquisition function or the information source. The value must not be
defined in this condition. Indicates to the customer that the data may
be incorrect and should not be used.
o Questionable: indicates that the supervision function detects an
abnormal behavior, but the value may still be valid. It is up to the
customer to decide whether the value should be used or not.
 Overflow: TIP that the value to be represented is higher than that supported
by the data type (used only for measurement values). For example, the value
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
is represented by the 16-bit unsigned integer data type and its content exceeds
65535.
 Out of Range: indicates that the value is beyond the defined limits (used
only for measured values). For example, the expected value is between 0 and
40,000; however the measured value is 41000.
 Bad Reference: indicates that the value may be incorrect, as the
reference is not calibrated (used only for measured values and binary
information).
 Oscillatory: indicates that the value is fluctuating unstably within a certain
time interval (used only for status information).
 Failure: indicates that the supervision function has detected an internal or
external failure.
 Old Data: indicates that the value has not been updated within a given time
interval.
 Inconsistent: indicates an inconsistency.
 Inaccurate: indicates that the value is outside the expected precision.
 Source - informs the origin of the value:
o Process: indicates that the value originates from an input function or
is calculated by some application function.
o Substituted: indicates that the value comes from an operator input or
an automatic function.
 Test: indicates that the value is for testing and should not be used for
operational purposes.
 Operator Blocked: indicates that the operator has blocked the update of the
value.
 Derived: this parameter must be set (TRUE) if the value was not obtained
from a physical sensor, but from calculations based on other values. For
example, the value of Neutral = Phase A + Phase B + Phase C. The parameter
must be reset (FALSE) if the value was obtained from a physical sensor.
In the configuration screen of the previous figure, it is observed that next to each
Quality there is a field ('Default') to configure each of the parameters. The value default is
all '0', and if the user wishes to configure the values, it must be done bit by bit in the MSB -
LSB direction. For example, for the Quality of the TCTR1 value, if you want to set bits 13
and 11, you must do it as: 10100000000000. The figure below exemplifies the procedure:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Quality
configuration
example.
Figure 390 – Example of Quality Bits Configuration
When you select an attribute are obtained the following parameters.
Reference name of Reference

the message control name of the
GOOSE. DataSet.
Message Application identifier.

identifier Numeric values only.
SMV.
Destination and source MAC address.
What is the revision
of the SMV messages Hexadecimal values.
used in the IEDs.
Numeric values only. SMV simulation.
Advanced settings
Virtual LAN ID and SMV
and priority message buffer.
information.
Figure 391 – Settings of Messages SMV - IED parameters

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
MULTIM
MEASUREMENT SOFTWARE
INSTANT

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
27 Multim - Software for instantaneous voltage and current

measurements.

In this software the user will be able to make measurements of current, voltage, its
harmonic distortions, apparent phase power in three-phase systems, for each of the phases
and also the impedance of each of the phases. The measured value is shown simultaneously
with the measurement process, is not stored and also does not generate a report.
To make the acquisitions, simply connect the equipment's measurement inputs to the
outputs and / or generators (for example, a three-phase source) whose values will be
measured, and click on the “Acquire” button, which changes to “Stop Acquisition”. The user
can choose the Clamp scale (for current measurements). You can also define whether you
are working with a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz.
With MULTIM, the user can view the waveforms of the generated signal, see its rms
values of amplitude and angle. You can also view all the harmonic components present in
the measured signal in the form of a graph and table.
This software has the feature “Open Settings at Start” (Software Options menu), if it
is active, when starting the Manual software, the Settings screen is active immediately, this
feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important specify the parameters
related to the test
Figure 392 – Multim – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 393 – Multim – Main screen


Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Restore, Move,
Size, Minimize, Equipment used
Maximize and and serial
Close. number.
Figure 394 – Multim – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 395 – Multim – General Button Resources
27.4 Home Menu
Figure 396 – Multim – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
figures. The following figure describes features of hardware configurations, editing of
results and generation control.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Reissue Shows the tests performed or Initiates
whether it is being performed
Orientation for Hardware the test signal
at the current time.
screen. Configuration. acts. generation.
for GOOSE and connecting to the new test. all tests. the current generation.
SV Configuration. suitcase. test.
Figure 397 – Multim – Home Menu – Hardware, Results and Generation
In the figure below, the resources for analysis options of the generated quantities are
shown, as well as the options for general adjustments and the creation of an
evaluation. Access to the report, options for viewing the units involved (time and module)
and general options for restoring and viewing the layout are also displayed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to
Waveform Phasor Harmonics Tab. time in the standard
Settings time in
Tab. Tab.
Screen. seconds. cycles. layout.
Habilita/
desabilita
abas para
Shows the Shows the Shows Shows Shows Shows values visualização
Evaluation configuration relative based on the
primary absolute
tab. secondary.
of the report. values. values. values.
Figure 398 – Multim – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
27.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 399 – Multim – View Menu – Windows and Layout

special inputs. It has other test file protection features, enabling automatic gain control (a
feature that generates a more reliable signal, but requires more computer processing), allows
the opening of the general settings screen when starting the software, activates

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert password in Opens the Enables / disables Prioritizes analog

Settings Screen
the Test file so as special inputs for inputs for
when starting
not to allow the the Manual transducer acquisition,
editing of certain software. calibration. increasing the
settings. sample rate.
Enables / disables a Enables standard Shows the

filter via software to acquisition mode. manufacturer’s
eliminate frequencies address, phone,
other than what is email and fax.
desired.
Figure 400 – Multim – Software Options Menu – General

Figure 401 – Multim – Adjustments button
data related to the test, the Test set device and the person responsible for the test, there is the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 402 – Multim – Settings Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
27.7.1 Input Tab Bin., GOOSE and An. DC
Enables all equipment measurements (analog measurement,

transducer, GOOSE, binary, Sampled Values, etc.).
It prioritizes only the binary inputs for analog

measurements and detection of actuation in the CE-
7024. In the case of CE-6006, only analog
measurement is enabled. In this option the number of
points per cycle is increased.
Enables / disables
special inputs for
transducer calibration.
DC voltage and current

values.
Figure 404 – Multim – Binary Input, GOOSE and An. DC
27.7.2

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
27.8 Waveform Tab

In the next tab the user can view only measured signals. You can choose which
channel will be the angular reference.
Figure 405 – Multim – Waveform Tab

sizes for
visualization of the
graphs.
following parameters
Opens the Assign of a single graphic or
Signals window, all of them: Title,
where the user Legend, Scale, Grid,
determines which Table and
values will be shown Dimensions.
in the graphs.
Extract the COMTRADE

or CSV file from the
waveforms.
Allows you to Insert Take a picture of the
or Edit Markings or chart by storing it on the
Comments in clipboard.
graphics.
Figure 406 – Multim – Binary Input, GOOSE and An. DC

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
27.9 Phasor Tab

In this screen it is possible to view the module and the value of the voltage or current
angle, as well as the Phasors graph for each channel. The only display option is as an analog
input. You can choose which measurement will be the angular reference.
Figure 407 – Multim – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
It allows four different

sizes for viewing the This option will be
graphics. shown in the next
Figure for more
details.

will be shown on the Take a picture of the chart by storing Scale, Grid, Table and
graphs. it on the clipboard. Dimensions.
Figure 408 – Multim – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

values: Module, Angle,
Actual value, Imaginary
value.
Figure 409 – Multim – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
27.10 Harmonics Tab

The user has the ability to view all harmonics in a bar graph format or in the table,
the data is displayed in RMS or as a percentage of the fundamental. The Options Will
display only as measured signal.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 410 – Multim – Harmonics Tab

of the graphs.
Opens the Assign

Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 411 – Multim – Harmonics Tab – Resources
27.11 Evaluation Tab

It is possible for the user to create some evaluations related to the measured values
(channel to channel), in order, for example, to evaluate RTCs, RTPs, Sampled Values
angular lag in a given medium, power factor calculation, measurement of impedance,
resistance, inductance, etc.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Consideration for
Evaluation between
module / angle, R / X, Rs / Multiplied Tolerance
Rp, Ls / Lp, Powers. It constant taken into
Channels that Theoretical
depends on what is Ratio account in the
will be parameterized on the value for Evaluation.
compared. obtained. Evaluation.
“Type” screen.
Evaluation type between channels. Ratio, difference,

Impedance (polar or quadrature), powers (S, P and Q), Constant Evaluation criteria.
primary and secondary resistance / inductance. It added to the Absolute error,
depends on what is parameterized in each channel
Ratio Relative error,
(voltage or current).
obtained. greater or lesser.
Figure 412 – Multim – Evaluation Tab
27.11.1Resource of the Evaluation Tab

Shows the angle Shows the angle
values between values in minutes.
+ 180 ° or between
0 and 360 °.
Shows which Shows the units of

Evaluation column the evaluated
is being edited. quantities.
Improve multipliers: Shows the values

u = (micro), m = to two decimal
(milli), k = (kilo) etc. places.
Shows the values User defines the

of the quantities as number of decimal
an integer. places of the
quantities.
Figure 413 – Multim – Evaluation Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
TRANSIENT
SOFTWARE FOR SIMULATION OF
MEASUREMENT SIGNALS IN TRANSITORY
REGIME

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
28 Transient - Software for reproducing measurement files on a transient

basis - COMTRADE Archives

This software reproduces (generates) signals measured in the field, stored in files in
the COMTRADE format (. Cfg), allowing checking the performance of relays under real
measurement conditions. The software allows the simultaneous and sequential generation of
several COMTRADE signals depending on the equipment used.
The user can also direct digital signals to be simulated on the six binary outputs and
the six GOOSE outputs on the CE-6006 or on the twelve binary outputs and several GOOSE
outputs on the CE-70XX.
What matters for the software are the waveforms. Thus, even if a given analog
channel (branch) of the file is current, for example, it can be directed to be generated as a
voltage signal. When directing a signal for generation, the user indicates a transformation
ratio for this signal, which allows the control of the amplitude of the signal to be
generated, and makes sure that the signal generation levels do not exceed the maximum
values allowed by the CE-600X or CE-70XX.
Using a cursor on the screen itself, the user can display the generation times for each
selected point on the graph. You can also view a summary of the binary oscillography and
comparisons.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting (Software
Options menu), if it is active, when starting the Transient software, the Settings screen is
active immediately, this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important to
Figure 414 – Transient – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 415 – Transient – Main screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in chapter 21.The Distance,
Timing, Import and Export fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.

Creates a new Opens a saved Saves the Customize the Software name and
test file. test. current test. Quick Access version.
Bar.
Equipment used
Restore, Move, number.
Size, Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 416 – Transient – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 417 – Transient – General Button Resources
28.4 Home Menu
Figure 418 – Transient – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the start menu, several resources are available. In the following figure are
described features of the hardware settings and editing sequence s such as insert, copy,
delete, scroll and select the reference.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Copies a Shifts the selected Separates

Orientation screen. for Hardware selected Sequence to the right binary nodes
Configuration. Sequence. or left. in the display.
Insert a Deletes a Changes the choice of

new selected automatic angular
Sequence. Sequence. reference to manual.
Connects between Opens a screen for Deletes all Shifts the selected
software and GPS Setup. Sequences. Sequence to the beginning
hardware. or end.
Figure 419 – Transient – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence
The following are the settings related to the management of results (reissue of tests,
exclusion of tests and choice of test for analysis) and generation control.
Starts the Pauses

Reissue the Select a test from a list signal signal
selected test. of others. generation generation.
process.
Deletes the Deletes all tests Number of repetitions

selected test. from the list. of Sequences created.
Figure 420 – Transient – Home Menu – Result and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, the resources for analysis options of the generated quantities
(waveforms, phasors, trajectories, harmonics, synchronoscope and impedance plane) are
displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General, distance and synchronism
settings). Access to the report, options for viewing the units involved (time and module) and
general options for restoring and viewing the layout are also displayed.
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Opens the Shows the Shows the
Settings Waveform Phasor Harmonics report time in time in
Tab. Tab. Tab.
Screen. configuration seconds. cycles.
window.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Tabs for
viewing and
Standard
layout.
Shows values
Shows the Shows the based on the Shows
Synchronoscope Impedance Shows
Trajectory primary. relative
plan absolute
tab. tab.
configuration. values. values.
Figure 421 – Transient – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
28.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 422 – Transient – View Menu – Windows and Layout

In the software options, the user can enable test file protection features, enable
automatic gain control (feature that generates a more reliable signal, but requires greater
computer processing), allows the opening of the general settings screen to the start the
software, and displays the manufacturer's contact.
Insert password in Opens the Settings Habilita o modo de Shows the

the Test file so as Screen when the controle de ganho manufacturer’s
not to allow the software is started. automático. address, phone,
editing of certain email and fax.
settings.
Figure 423 – Transient – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 424 – Transient – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General, Distance and Synchronism.
In Distance mode, there is the Distance Protection Adjustment tab. In it the user sets
the line length and the angle. Choose how the earth factor will be inserted. You can still
enable whether to remove the Arc Resistance and use Impedance Correction for Rated
Current. To facilitate the adjustment of the zones, there is an Import option whose purpose is
to read files .RIO. Some distance relays record line, zone and operating time settings in this
format. Importing this file, Transient reads automatically so that the user does not need to
adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a file. RIO once the feature was
entered by the user.
The Insert option opens a new window for the user to enter the name and number of
the zone, adjust the Trigger Time, Absolute and Relative Tolerances of the impedance and
the Absolute and Relative Tolerances for the time. You can use a specific earth factor and
enable the option to Remove Arc Resistance. If the relay does not generate a file .RIO there
is the option to design the zone to be Test set or to choose between predefined
zones. Depending on the type of zone chosen, options for load compensation and
directionality are opened.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows access to Inform tabs. General, Displays the tab

System, Notes & Obs., Explanatory for adjusting the
Distance
Figures, Check List, Others and function.
Connections.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
sync function.
Import
.RIO file
Export
.RIO Files
Figure 425 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Line length in ohms Enables Impedance Enables the correction of

and angle in degrees. values based on the Impedance for Nominal
primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
Insert a Edit a zone Deletes a zone that has Shows the design of
already inserted. already been inserted. the chosen zone.
new zone.
Figure 426 – Transient – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment
Let us see the window that opens when clicking on Insert, where the adjustments of
the protection zones are made.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 427 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone
To facilitate the visualization of the previous figure, it was divided into parts. In this
first part the user can enter the description of the added zone, choose the type of actuation,
select which loop (detection algorithm) that zone belongs to and enter the absolute and
relative tolerances of time and impedance.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the zone Color for the

to be edited. area in question.
Zone description.
Zone type registration:
Zone index. Departure, Performance,
Extended or Block.
Links the zone to a (Informative data).
specific type of
fault. Absolute (Ω) and
relative (%) tolerance
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
seconds and relative
tolerance in% of the
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.
In this second part the user has access to the various ways of drawing the desired
zone. The first form is drawing segment by segment, the second form uses known zones
(Mho, Quadrilateral and tomato / lens) where the user by comparison changes some intuitive
segments and the third form is using the presets of the relays themselves (Masks).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Initializes drawing Options to

after initial values draw or
of Rf and Xf are choose a
entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
after initialized Values of Rf
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
The following figure shows a quadrilateral area which was drawn using line
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 430 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area
In the next figure, the quadrilateral option was chosen directly. Note that the settings
to be entered are more intuitive with this option.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 431 – Transient – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone
Then the screen where system data 1 and 2 and the settings for synchronism are
inserted.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 432 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems
To facilitate understanding, the previous figure will be divided into two parts. Note
in the figure below that system one was adopted as the one to be synchronized. It is also
shown that it is possible to choose whether it is single-phase or three-phase, including the
reference phase, the angular offset of the elevation transformer (if the synchronism is done
in a Generator + Transformer system). Finally, the user can choose the way to start the
synchronism and parameterize the closing time of the circuit breaker (which will be taken
into account in the calculation of the relay).
Single-phase or Voltage used as a Pulse breaker start

three-phase reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
system. phase or phase-to- none.
neutral is chosen.
Angle lag caused by the Time to occur the effective

transformer depending on the closing of the circuit breaker.
connection scheme used. Check the circuit breaker manual.
Figure 433 – Transient – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Then system 2 is adopted as the side of the system that will receive the generation or
simply the infinite bar. In the figure below you can choose a three-phase or single-phase
system, the angular reference and the voltage and current levels in primary and secondary
values. Finally, you can change the phase sequence.
Single-phase Primary Voltage used as a Voltages, currents Phase

or three-phase voltage value. reference. Phase-to- and phase sequence sequence
system. phase or phase-to- values equal to for System
neutral is chosen. System 1. 2.
Primary current Secondary Secondary current

value. voltage value. value.
Figure 434 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2
28.8 Sync Adjustment screen

In the next figure, the limits of the synchronism region are adjusted. Lower and
higher values of voltage, frequency and time. The extremes of the frequency differences
between the two systems and dead zones are also adjusted. The maximum angular lag value
is configured. Choose whether voltage differences are shown in absolute values or as a
percentage of the reference voltage. Finally, the tolerances for voltage, frequency, time and
angle given by the manufacturer for reporting purposes, that is, validation of the Test set
points.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 435 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment
Maximum and minimum Enables / disables the

voltage deviation between voltage values shown as a
the two systems for percentage of the reference
synchronism to occur. voltage.
Maximum angle Maximum and minimum

deviation between the frequency deviation
two Systems for between the two Systems
synchronism to occur. for synchronism to occur.
Figure 436 – Transient – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1
Maximum voltage Minimum voltage value

value allowed for allowed for
synchronism to occur. synchronism to occur.
Maximum frequency value Minimum frequency

allowed for synchronism value allowed for
to occur. synchronism to occur.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables / disables Maximum time

values referenced to for synchronism
the primary. to occur.
Maximum and Minimum time

minimum frequency for synchronism
value to determine the to occur.
dead zone.
Relative and Angle tolerance

absolute voltage given by the relay
tolerances given by manufacturer.
the relay
manufacturer.
Relative and absolute

frequency tolerances
given by the relay
manufacturer.

time tolerances given
by the relay
manufacturer.
28.9 Sequence Tab

Following be will explained all available resources in the tab sequence.
28.9.1 Sub tab Node Output (NO)

As discussed in the section of the channels targeting the sequence s will only exist
for each node if voltage channels / chain are associated with them. That is, if there are two
nodes and one of them does not have any associated channels, the strings s will not exist for
that node. Note in the following figure, that there are 2 nodes and 3 sequences, however, no
voltage / current channel has been associated with NODE 2.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 440 – Transient – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Two Nodes and three Sequences
In the following explanations, we will adopt that only one node (NO01) was created
containing three voltage channels and three current channels. Remember that to
add sequence s click the Insert New Sequence. The figures below show the sequence modes
that can be entered in the test.
28.9.2 COMTRADE/ATP mode

Unlike Sequence and Master software, there are only two sequence modes in
the Transient software. It is the COMTRADE mode and the ATP, which will be seen in
detail in the following figures.
Total time of the

Sequence COMTRADE Sequence
Name. (not configurable).
Choose between
COMTRADE
file (.cfg
extension) or Access button for
ATP file (.lis parameterizing the
extension). comtrade / ATP file.
Figure 441 – Transient – Sequence Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
28.9.3 Resources of COMTRADE mode – Output targeting
By clicking on the access button to parameterize the COMTRADE mode and load a
file .cfg appears a screen where basically the user will redirect the COMTRADE signal
(voltage, current or binary signals) to a specific channel (analog or binary output). See the
figure with details below:
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the uploaded
box. file.
Playback time interval of the file

considered by the user.
Transformation Ratio Used -

Defined by the user.
Fields automatically filled with

information contained in each targeted
node.
Binary and GOOSE outputs

selected, graphic shown in
Picture box.
The user can direct binary
signals to be reproduced on
Directing the file
up to six binary outputs
node to the
and on up to six GOOSE
generation channels. outputs.
Channels automatically selected when

directed to generation, can also be selected
by the user, their waveforms are shown in the
Picture box.
Figure 442 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Channel targeting

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
28.9.4 Resources of ATP mode – Output targeting
By clicking on the access button to parameterize the ATP mode and load
a file. lis appears a screen where basically the user will redirect the simulation signal from
the ATP file (voltage, current) to a given analog channel. See the figure with details below:
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the file.
box. carregado.


Directing the file

node to the Fields automatically filled with
generation channels. information contained in each targeted
node.

Picture box.
Figure 443 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Channel targeting

Just as there is sequence s for the analog outputs AC, there is also the ability to
create sequence s for DC analog outputs. It is worth mentioning that only the CE-7012 and

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
CE-7024 equipment have this hardware feature. Every time a sequence is added, a DC
generation sub tab opens, both current and voltage.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence name.
Voltage and
current module.
Figure 444 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description

The user can change the status of the binary outputs of the equipment he is using.
The application of this feature would be for logic tests, signaling of some state to the relay
and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the switch between NO and NF in any
sequence (through a graphical resource), delay or advance the time of changing that state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.
State (open or closed) of Start and

the binary output in the end delay.
Sequence.
Figure 445 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
28.9.7 GOOSE Outputs

relay and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the message between NO and NC
in any sequence (through a graphic resource), delay or advance the time of changing that
state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

the GOOSE in the end delay.
Sequence.
Figure 446 – Transient – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description

(if the user presses a key before the time is counted, the software advances to the next
sequence). The option to consider an absolute or relative angle in the sequence change can
be checked in order to improve the transition and in the first sequence you can choose how
the set of sequence s will be started.
Advance type from It considers an angle

Sequence to Sequence. value when changing
It can be by time, time from one Sequence to
or logic (which is another. This can
answered first) and time prevent the change
or key (which is from being too sudden.
answered first).
Way to trigger the set
of parameterized
Sequences. (It only
appears in the first
Sequence).
Figure 447 – Transient – Sequence Tab – Sub tab Time and Advance – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
28.9.9 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user sees the signals directed to each channel. It features scroll bar
features on the time axis and instantaneous value verification..
Figure 448 – Transient – Waveform Tab

It allows 4 different Displays a new

graphs. further explanation.

Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
Allows you to file from the waveforms.
Take a photo of the chart
Insert or Edit either
by storing it on the
Markings or clipboard.
Comments in
graphics.
Figure 449 – Transient – Waveform Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Clicking on the Display option in the previous figure brings you to the following
options:
Analog and digital Analog signals are

graphics are displayed. shown as a waveform.
Shows the RMS values Shows the angles of

of the analog signals. the analog signals.
Shows the variation of

Shows the frequency of the frequency of the
the analog signals. analog signals.
Calls the harmonics /

Call the Phasor Tab or inter harmonics or
the Trajectories tab. synchronoscope tab.
Figure 450 – Transient – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
28.9.11Phasor Tab
In this screen it is possible to view for each channel the module and the value of the
voltage or current angle, as well as the Phasors graph.
This screen has the Transparency property, and can remain open while points are
inserted or edited in the test. The following screen is for a line Test set using Search Test.
Figure 451 – Transient – Phasor Tab
28.9.12 Resources of the Phasor Tab.


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

related lag.

Figure for more
details.

Figure 452 – Transient – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variation.

values for the difference
between the cursors:
Minimum, maximum or
average Instantaneous
Amplitude and the RMS
value in the period.
Figure 453 – Transient – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
28.9.13Trajectories Tab
With the voltage and current channels already directed with COMTRADE or ATP
file signals, we can represent an impedance path, so that if the user adds protection zones in
the Settings, it is possible to view the path of that COMTRADE or ATP in a fault region.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 454 – Transient – Trajectories tab
28.9.14 Resources of the Trajectories tab

It allows 4 different sizes It allows the

for visualization of the
visualization of
graphs.
values in module,
angle, real value and
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 455 – Transient – Trajectories tab – Resources
28.9.15 Harmonics Tab

With the voltage and current channels already directed with COMTRADE or ATP
file signals, we can represent a harmonic bar diagram, together with the same data in table
format.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 456 – Transient – Harmonics Tab

It allows 4 different sizes

graphs.
Opens the Assign

Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 457 – Transient – Harmonics Tab – Resources
28.9.17Synchronoscope tab
With the voltage and current channels already directed with signals from the
COMTRADE or ATP file, we can verify through a synchronoscope if these signals are able
to perform a synchronism. Note in the figure below that the light blue region is the
synchronism region and is determined in the Settings.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of
voltages that
represented
System 1 (to be
Synchronoscope synchronized)
of cursor 1 and 2. and System 2
(already
synchronized).
Figure 458 – Transient – Synchronoscope tab
28.9.18 Plane Z Tab

You can add sequence s pre-fault, fault and post missing inserted them directly in the
Z plane, displayed together with the function of protection feature 21.
Type of fault
to be inserted.
Impedance plan where the

Characteristic de Impedance
appears at the moment of
inserting the fault point.
Button to
Table with the insert a fault
various faults that sequence.
can be inserted.
Figure 459 – Transient – Plane Z Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
When clicking on the insert button, the following screen will appear:
Fault insertion
Description of the mode (smart, Z-I
Sequences that cte, Z-V cte and Z-
represented a fault. Source cte)
Pre-fault, fault and

Pre-fault and post-fault times.
post-fault modes.
Figure 460 – Transient – Plane Z Tab – Resources
After choosing the data in the figure above, just allocate the fault point with the
mouse in the impedance diagram, as shown in the figure below:
Confirmation
of the chosen
Table with several points point.
chosen and their
respective information.
Figure 461 – Transient – Plane Z Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
SEQUENC
FAULT SEQUENCE SIMULATION SOFTWARE

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29 Sequenc – Fault Sequence Generation Software

This software, developed primarily for testing protection functions where it is
necessary to inject voltages and currents on various modes (direct, harmonic, impedance,
inter-harmonics, etc.) and various sequences.
In it, the user defines the waveform of each signal, for the pre-fault conditions,
during the fault and post-fault, with harmonic content up to the 50th order, for
a fundamental frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. The user also has control of the number of cycles
generated in the pre-fault and post-fault conditions.
One can define a maximum of 50 sequence are signals to be generated for any type
of test.
The user controls the generation and checks the theoretical waveforms of each signal,
as well as the binary input and output signals. In it, the user defines the generation mode, the
amplitude of the signal and the angle generated, for each type of fault
of the selected sequence, and the time interval for the generation of each sequence.
comparisons.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting” (Software
Options men ) , if it is active, when starting the Sequenc software, the Settings screen is
Figure 462 – Sequenc – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 463 – Sequenc – Main screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in chapter 21. The
Distance, Timing, Import and Export fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.


Bar.
Software name and
version.
Opens the
Equipment used
options: Restore, and serial
Move, Size, number.
Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 464 – Sequenc – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 465 – Sequenc – General Button Resources
29.4 Home Menu
Figure 466 – Sequenc – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
described features of the hardware settings and editing sequence s such as insert, copy,
delete, scroll and select the reference.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Copy a Shifts the selected Separates


hardware. or end.
Figure 467 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence
The following are the settings related to the management of the results (reissue of
tests, exclusion of tests and choice of the test for analysis) and generation control.
Starts the signal Pauses

Reissue the Select a test from a list generation signal
process. generation.
selected test. of others.

Figure 468 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Result and Generation
(waveforms, phasors, trajectories, harmonics, synchroscope and impedance plane) are
displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General, distance and synchronism settings).
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Access to the report is also displayed, options for viewing the units involved (time and
module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout.
Calls the Shows Shows the Shows the Opens the Shows the Shows the
Settings the Waveform Harmonics report time in time in
Screen. Phasor Tab. Tab. configuration seconds. cycles.
Tab.
window.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Tabs for
viewing and
Standard
layout.
Shows values
Impedance Shows
Synchronos Trajectory tab. primary. relative
plan absolute
cope tab.
configuration. values. values.
Figure 469 – Sequenc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
29.5 View Menu

In the menu display are available are some visualization capabilities where the user
customizes the way you want. These features mainly cover window layouts such as floating,

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 470 – Sequenc – View Menu – Windows and Layout

manufacturer’s address,
the Test file so as simulation mode. Since Screen when the
phone, email and fax.
not to allow the in this mode there is no software is started.
settings. current.
Figure 471 – Sequenc – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 472 – Sequenc – Adjustments button
format. Importing this file, Sequenc automatically reads it so that the user does not need to
adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a file .RIO once the feature was

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows access to Inform tabs. General, Displays the

System, Notes & Obs., Explanatory tab for
Figures, Check List, Others and adjusting the
Connections. Distance
function.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
sync
function.
Import
Files
.RIO
Export
Files
.RIO
Figure 473 – Sequenc – Adjustment – General screen

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
Insert a Edit a zone Deletes a zone Shows the design of

new zone. already inserted. that has already the chosen zone.
been inserted.
Figure 474 – Sequenc – Parameters screen – Distance – Adjustment
Let's look at the window that opens when you click Insert and that
it is performed s settings of protection zones.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 475 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 478 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 479 – Sequenc – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert - Quadrilateral Zone
Then the screen where system data 1 and 2 and the settings for synchronism are inserted.
Figure 480 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen – Synchronism – System

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
into account when calculating the relay).
Single-phase Voltage used as a Pulse breaker start

or three-phase reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
neutral is chosen.

Figure 481 – Sequenc – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

or three-phase voltage value. reference. We opt and phase sequence sequence
system. for phase-phase or values equal to for System
phase-neutral. System 1. 2.

Figure 482 – Sequenc – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2

higher values of voltage, frequency and time. The extremes of the frequency difference
angle given by the manufacturer for reporting purposes, that is, validation of the points Test
set.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 483 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment


synchronism to occur. for synchronism to occur
Figure 484 – Sequenc – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment – Part 1



CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


dead zone.

tolerances given manufacturer.
by the relay
manufacturer.

given by the relay
manufacturer.

by the relay
manufacturer.
29.9 Sequence Tab

Next, all the features available on the Sequence tab will be explained.
29.9.1 Sub Tab Node Output (NO)

that node. Note in the following figure, there are two nodes and three sequences are
however, no channel voltage / current were associated to NO 2.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 488 – Sequenc – Sequence tab – NO sub tab – Two Nodes and three sequences

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.2 Direct Mode
Sequence Sequence duration

name. time.
Module
value. Choice of
operating
mode.
Description of
the targeted
channel.
Frequency
value.
Generic
point of the
System. Angle
value.
Figure 489 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Direct Mode Description
29.9.3 Resources of the Direct Mode

By right-clicking on the text box in direct mode, the following resources are
available.

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.
Figure 490 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
By clicking the voltages, currents or frequencies, the following resources are

available.
Calculates the value in

Data entry is done channel
channels with a by channel in Module and
generic voltage point angle (Free mode) or data
between phases. entry is made only by one
channel, and the others are
automatically matched to
Calculates the value in the first (Equal mode).
the channel with a
generic displacement
voltage point.
Calculates the value in the
channel with a generic
ground current point.
Data entry is done through

only one channel, and the Keeps the
balance and balancing frequency of all
(Sequence ABC or ACB) channels the
of the other phases is same.
automatically made.
29.9.4 Harmonics Mode

In this mode, the user directly enters the module value and angle of each harmonic
component (up to 50th order). Note in the figure below that only the total RMS (true RMS)
and the total harmonic distortion of the quantity involved are displayed, to enter the values
as described, the user has to access the modules and angles as described below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

name. time.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Description of
the targeted
Access to the
channel.
Module and
Angle of 50
harm orders.
Generic
point of the
System. RMS value and
Total Harmonic
Distortion
(THD) of the
entered
harmonic
orders.
Figure 492 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Harmonic mode
29.9.5 Harmonic modes Resources


harmonics.

Harmonic Order. Angle.
By right-clicking on the text box on the harmonics input screen, the following
formatting features of the input data fields are available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


places).
29.9.6 Inter-Harmonic Mode
interharmonic component (up to 10 interharmonic).

name. time.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Description of
the targeted Access to the Module
channel. and Angle of
interharmonical orders.
Generic
point of the RMS value and
System. Total Harmonic
Distortion (DHT) of
the inserted
interharmonic
orders.
Figure 495 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description interharmonic mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.7 Interharmonic Resources
Limpa valores de
módulo e ângulo já
parametrizados
Frequency of the
interharmonic of Module value and
interest. angle of the inter-
harmonic order in
question.
By right-clicking on the text box on the interharmonic input screen in Interharmonic

mode, the following input data formatting features are available.
Reduced number of
Clears all modules
decimal places.
and angles.
User-defined number
Default number of of decimal places.
decimal places (two
places).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

In this mode, the user enters voltages and currents of positive, negative and zero
sequence components. The software then calculates which values have to be generated by
the channels so that these quantities of symmetrical components are met.
Voltage and Sequence Sequence duration

current name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
condition of
symmetrical
component.
Definition of
symmetric Voltage and current
values. values in
symmetrical
component format.
Both module and
angle.
Figure 498 – Sequenc – NO sub tab – Description of the Symmetric Components Mode
29.9.9 Resources of the Symmetric Components Mode

By right-clicking on a text box in Symmetric Components mode, the following
features for formatting the input data are available.
Default number of
Voltage input mode.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.10 Phase-to-Phase Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário define o valor de tensão fase-fase Vab, a tensão de Sequence
zero e as correntes de fase. O software então calcula quais os valores que tem que ser
gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades de tensão fase-fase sejam atendidas.

current values name. time.
that will be
generated to
meet the Choice of
phase-to- operating
phase voltage mode.
condition.
Definition of
the Phase-
voltage, Sequence zero
Phase value. voltage and current in
the three phases.
Figure 500 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of Phase-to-Phase Mode
29.9.11 Resources of the Phase-to-Phase Mode

By clicking the right mouse button on the text box in the Phase-phase mode the

decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
Frequency entry decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.12 Power Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário define o valor de tensão fase – neutro das três fases, a
potência ativa e a reativa de cada fase. O software então calcula quais os valores que tem
que ser gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades de potência sejam atendidas.

current name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
Power
condition.
Definition of
phase active and
reactive powers.
Figure 502 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Mode Power
29.9.13 Resources of the Power Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Power Mode os
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.14 Fault Mode
Nesse modo, o usuário define o valor de tensão de curto-circuito, corrente de curto-

circuito, ângulo entre a tensão e a corrente e o Type of fault. O software então calcula quais
os valores que tem que ser gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades de falta sejam
atendidas.
current name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
fault
condition.
Defining the
phase, two-phase or
between voltage and
and fault current.
Figure 504 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Fault Mode
29.9.15 Resources do Fault Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Fault Mode os
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.16Constant ZI Mode
Nesse modo, o usuário define valores de Impedance e corrente que serão mantidas
constantes. O software então calcula quais os valores que tem que ser gerados pelos canais
para que essas quantidades de Z/I constante e V variável sejam atendidas.
Voltage and Sequence Sequence duration Choice of

current name. time. operating
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
enabling DC offset, start of the
fault (together with the
maximum / minimum offset or
Definition of a user-defined offset angle),
Z-I costant definition of the Impedance
values. that will be constant, definition
of the fault current that will be
the node or by the zone
adjustments).
Figure 506 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Constant ZI Mode
29.9.17 Resources do Constant ZI Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Constant ZI Mode
os seguintes Resources ficam disponíveis.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.18 Constant ZV Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário define valores de Impedance e tensão que serão mantidos
constantes. O software então calcula quais os valores que tem que ser gerados pelos canais
para que essas quantidades de Z/V constante e I variável sejam atendidas.
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
constant Z- definition of the Impedance
V values. that will be constant, definition
of the fault voltage that will be
adjustments).
Figure 508 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description Constant ZV Mode
29.9.19 Resources do Constant ZV Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Constant ZV Mode
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.20 Modo Z-font Constante

Nesse modo, o usuário define o modo e os valores da Impedance de font que será
mantida constante, juntamente com a Impedance de falta. O software então calcula quais os
valores que tem que ser gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades sejam atendidas.

values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
source. enabling DC offset, start of the
Definition of Z- a user-defined offset angle),
source constant definition of the fault
values. impedance, definition of the
source impedance and
node or by the zone
adjustments).
Figure 510 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Z mode description – constant source
29.9.21 Z Mode Resources – Constant Source

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no modo Z-Font
constante os seguintes Resources de inserção e formatação dos dados de entrada ficam
disponíveis.
Voltage input mode.
Default number of
decimal places (two
Current input mode. places).
Reduced number of
Frequency entry
decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.22 Z Mode - Smart
Nesse modo, o usuário define a Impedance de falta e os valores de falta são gerados
respeitando um limite definido pelo usuário, nesse caso, portanto, tanto a corrente como a
tensão variam.
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
source constant definition of fault impedance,
values. definition of limits (voltage
and current) and definition of
the node or by zone
adjustments).
Figure 512 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Z Mode - Smart
29.9.23 Resources do Z Mode - Smart

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no modo Z-Inteligente
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.24 Standby Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário cria uma espera, cujo avanço para a próxima Sequence só
ocorre após a confirmação por tecla. O usuário tem espaço para escrever o motivo e
adicionar figuras com o intuído de auxiliar quem estiver realizando o Test.
Sequence Choice of
name. operating
mode.
Definition of
the waiting
sequence.
Access button
for adding
image and
auxiliary text.
Figure 514 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Standby Mode
29.9.25 Standby Mode Resources

Ao clicar no botão direito de acesso das configurações auxiliares no Standby Mode
os seguintes Resources ficam de inserção e formatação dos dados de entrada disponíveis.
Insert an image or
change an existing
Area for text editing. one.
Deletes an existing
image.
Area for viewing the

image after insertion.
Adjusts the added

image to the size of
the preview screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
At the time of the test when this waiting sequence is reached, the following screen
will appear:
Adjusts the Confirmation

image to the button to
size of the advance the
viewing next
screen. Sequence.
29.9.26 Accommodation Mode

generation sub-tab, both current and voltage, is opened.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Sequence
name.
Duration of the Reference channel

transition in cycles. for starting
damping.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 517 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – NO sub tab – Description of the Accommodation Mode
29.9.27 DC Analog Output Sub Tab

Sequence duration
time.
Sequence name.
Voltage and
current module.
Figure 518 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description

The user can change the status of the binary outputs of the equipment he is using.
The application of this feature would be for logic tests, signaling of some state to the relay
and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the switch between NO and NF in any
sequence (through a graphical resource), delay or advance the time of changing that state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Sequence in question.
Figure 519 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

relay and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the message between NO and NC in
any sequence (through a graphic resource), delay or advance the time of changing that state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

the GOOSE exit on the end delay.
Figure 520 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description

the sequence set s will be started.

answered first) and time prevent the change from
or key (which is being too sudden.
answered first).
Way to trigger the set of
parameterized
Sequences. (It only
Sequence).
Figure 521 – Sequenc – Sequence Tab – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.31 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each channel for each generated
sequence. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value verification.
Figure 522 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab

It allows 4 different Displays a new window

sizes for shown in the Figure
visualization of the below for further
graphs. explanation.

Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 523 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:


Shows the frequency of Shows the variation of

the analog signals. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Call the Phasor Tab or Calls the harmonics /

the Trajectories tab. inter harmonics or
synchronoscope tab.
Figure 524 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – View
29.9.33 Phasor Tab

Figure 525 – Sequenc – Phasor Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


related lag.
Figure for more
details.

Figure 526 – Sequenc – Phasor Tab – Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variations.

Minimum, maximum or
Figure 527 – Sequenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.35 Trajectories tab

With the voltage and current channels already directed in the created sequences, we
can represent an impedance path, so that, if the user adds protection zones in the Settings, it
is possible to visualize the penetration of this set of sequences in a fault region.
Figure 528 – Sequenc – Trajectories tab

It allows 4 different It allows the

sizes for visualization of visualization of
the graphs. values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 529 – Sequenc – Trajectories tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

With the voltage and current channels already directed the sequence s created can
represent a diagram of harmonic bars, with the same data in table format.
Figure 530 – Sequenc – Harmonics Tab

sizes for visualization of
the graphs.
It allows the
visualization of
Opens the Assign values in module,
Signals window where angle, real value and
the user determines
imaginary value.
You can either insert

Take a photo of the
or edit comments to
chart by storing it on
the chart.
the clipboard.
Figure 531 – Sequenc – Harmonics Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
29.9.39 Synchronoscope tab

With the voltage and current channels already directed the sequence s created can
verify through a Synchroscope if these signals are able to perform a sync. Note in the figure
below that the light blue region is the synchronism region and is determined in the Settings.
Synchronoscope Choice of voltages that

of cursor 1 and 2. represented System 1 (to be
synchronized) and System 2
(already synchronized).
Figure 532 – Sequenc – Synchronoscope tab
29.9.40 Plane Z Tab

You can add sequence s pre-fault, fault and post missing inserted them directly in the
Z plane, displayed together with the function of protection feature 21.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of fault
to be inserted.

Button to
can be inserted.
Figure 533 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab
Fault insertion
represented a fault. Source cte).

post-fault modes.
Figure 534 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Confirmation
of the chosen
chosen and their
Figure 535 – Sequenc – Plane Z Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
RAMPA
SOFTWARE TO GENERATE SIGNAL
SEQUENCES WITH RAMP INCREMENTATION

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
30 Rampa – Software to generate signal sequences with ramp

incrementation

This software was developed to enable the generation of sequence s signals with type
adjustment ramp simultaneously. The ramps generated can be Direct or Pulsed, when
pulsed, the value always returns to a certain point before the next increment.
It is possible to work with increments of module, angle, module and
angle, frequency, module and frequency, df/dt, fault, power, phase-to-phase voltage,
constant ZI, constant ZV, constant source, Intelligent Z.
comparisons.
is active, when starting the Ramp software the Settings screen is active immediately, this
feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Import to specify the parameters
Figure 536 – Rampa – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 537 – Rampa – Main screen

test file. test. current test. Quick Access and version.
Bar.
Equipment used
Size, Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 538 – Rampa – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 539 – Rampa – General Button Resources
30.4 Home Menu
Figure 540 – Rampa – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
described features of the hardware settings and editing sequences such as insert, copy,
delete, and scroll and select the reference.
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Copies a Shifts the selected Separates


hardware. or end.
Figure 541 – Rampa – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence
Starts the Pauses

Reissue the Select a test from a list signal signal
selected test. of others. generation generation.
process.

Figure 542 – Rampa – Home Menu – Result and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
(waveforms, phasors, trajectories, harmonics, syncoscope and impedance plane) are
Calls the Shows Shows the Shows the Opens the Shows the Shows the
Settings the Waveform Harmonics report time in time in
Screen. Phasor Tab. Tab. configuration seconds. cycles.
Tab. window.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Tabs for
viewing and
Standard
layout.
Shows values
Trajectory plan primary. relative
tab. absolute
tab. configuration. values. values.
Figure 543 – Rampa – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
30.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 544 – Rampa – View Menu – Windows and Layout

In the software options the user can enable test file protection features, enable
simulation mode, allow the opening of the general settings screen when starting the
software, and display the manufacturer's contact.
settings. current.
Figure 545 – Rampa – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 546 – Rampa – Adjustments button
format. Importing this file, Sequenc automatically reads it so that the user does not need to
adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a file .RIO once the feature was

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows access to Inform tabs. General, Displays the

System, Notes & Obs., Explanatory tab for
Figures, Check List, Others and adjusting the
Connections. Distance
function.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
sync
function.
Import
Files
.RIO
Export
Files
.RIO
Figure 547 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
Insert a Edit a zone Deletes a zone that Shows the design of

new zone. already inserted. has already been the chosen zone.
inserted.
Figure 548 – Rampa – Parameters screen – Distance – Adjustment
Let us see the window that opens when clicking on Insert, where it is made the
adjustments of the protection zones.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 549 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.
Figure 550 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone – Part 2

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
Figure 551 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert - Zone
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 552 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 553 – Rampa – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone
Figure 554 – Rampa – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Systems

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

or three- reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
phase phase or phase-to- none.
system. neutral is chosen.

Figure 555 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Figure 556 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2

set.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 557 – Rampa – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment


Figure 558 – Rampa – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Adjust Synchronization - Part 1



CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


dead zone.

by the relay
manufacturer.

given by the relay
manufacturer.

by the relay
manufacturer.
30.9 Sequence Tab

30.9.1 Sub Tab Node Output (NO)

that node. Note in the following figure, that there are 2 nodes and 3 sequences, however, no

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 562 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Two Nodes and three Sequences
add sequences click the Insert New Sequence. The figures below show the sequence modes
30.9.2 Ramp Mode

Unlike Sequenc and Master software, there is only one sequence mode in
the Rampa software. It is the ramp mode, which will be seen in detail in the following
figures.
Total ramp sequence

Sequence time (not configurable).
name.
Access button for ramp

parameterization.
Figure 563 – Rampa – Sequence Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
30.9.3 Ramp Mode Resources – Module Type

When clicking on the access button for the ramp parameterization, the following
screen appears. Choose the option “Module” in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure below, all
features that can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or pulsed
type, initial ramp values, final values, increment, reset values (in case the pulsed type is
chosen), generation and reset times.
Choosing the Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each
type of ramp. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific increment is being generated
generation time the ramp goes to a specific value). and the time in which each
value of the reset time.
Final limit of the module ramp,

the value of the module Module, angle and
increment, the variation in time frequency values for the
(d/dt) of the module increment, reset state (accessed
Initial values of
number of steps and time after the generation
module, angle and
(depends on the previous fields). time has elapsed). In
frequency of the ramp.
this window you can
choose how to reset the
ramp. NOTE: these
States of the GOOSE fields are only enabled
States of the binary outputs in the increment for pulsed ramp.
outputs in the increment
and reset states.
and reset states.
Figure 564 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Module mode
30.9.4 Ramp Mode Resources –Angle Type
screen appears. Choose the "Angle type" option in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the Choose between Direct (no return for a specific value) Time in which each increment is
type of ramp. or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation time the being generated and the time in
ramp goes to a specific value). which each value of the reset
time.
Initial values of Final limit of the angle ramp, the value

module, angle and of the angle increment, the variation in Module, angle and
frequency of the ramp. time (d/dt) of the angle increment, frequency values for the
number of steps and time (depends on reset state (accessed
the previous fields). after the generation
time has elapsed). In
this window you can
States of the binary States of the GOOSE choose how to reset the
outputs in the increment outputs in the increment ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states. and reset states. fields are only enabled
for pulsed ramp.
Figure 565 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Angle mode
30.9.5 Ramp Mode Resources – Frequency Type
screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the Frequency option. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each
type of ramp. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation increment is being generated
time the ramp goes to a specific value). and the time in which each
value of the reset time.
Inal limit of the Frequency ramp,

the value of the frequency Module, angle and
increment, the variation in time frequency values for the
(d/dt) of the frequency increment, reset state (accessed
Initial values of
number of steps and time after the generation
module, angle and
frequency of the ramp.
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
States of the binary States of the GOOSE fields are only enabled
outputs in the increment outputs in the increment for pulsed ramp.
and reset states. and reset states.
Figure 566 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in order Frequency
30.9.6 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Angle
screen appears. Choose the "Module and Angle" option in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure
below, all features that can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or
pulsed type, initial ramp values, final values, increment, reset values (in case the pulsed type
is chosen), generation and reset times.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each increment is
ramp type. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation being generated and the time in
time the ramp goes to a specific value). which each value of the reset time.
Final limit of the Module and

Module, angle and
Angle ramp, the value of the
frequency values for the
Module and Angle increment,
Initial values of reset state (accessed
number of steps and time
module, angle and after the generation
(depends on the previous fields).
frequency of the ramp. time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 567 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources in the way and Angle Module
30.9.7 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Frequency
screen appears. Choose the option Module and frequency in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each increment
ramp type. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific is being generated and the time
generation time the ramp goes to a specific value). in which each value of the
reset time.
Final limit of the Module and Angle

ramp, the value of the Module and
Final limit of the Module and Module, angle and
Frequency ramp, the value of the frequency values for the
Initial values of increment of the Module and reset state (accessed
module, angle and Frequency, number of steps and time after the generation
frequency of the ramp. (depends on the previous fields). time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
outputs in the increment for pulsed ramp.
States of the binary
outputs in the increment and reset states.
and reset states.
Figure 568 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Module and Frequency mode
30.9.8 Ramp Mode Resources – dF/dt
screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the option dF/dt. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Start and end limit of the dF / dt

ramp, the value of the dF / dt Module, angle and
Initial values of increment, number of steps and frequency values for the
module, angle and time (depends on the previous reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. fields). after the generation
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 569 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in dF/dt mode
30.9.9 Ramp Mode Resources – Symmetric Components
screen appears. Choose “Symmetrical components” in the “Ramp type”. In the figure below,
all features that can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or pulsed

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Initial values of definition

of Symmetric
Components (voltage and Final limit of the Module ramp
current) and the module, and angle of the Symmetric Module, angle and
angle and frequency of the Components, the value of the frequency values for the
ramp directly in the increment of the Module and reset state (accessed
channels (depends on the angle of the comp. symmetrical, after the generation
definition tab). number of steps and time time has elapsed). In
(depends on previous fields). this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 570 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in order Symmetrical Component
30.9.10 Ramp Mode Resources – Phase to Phase
screen appears. Choose the “Phase-Phase” option in the “Ramp Type”. In the figure below,
all features that can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or pulsed

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
ramp type. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific being generated and the time in
generation time the ramp goes to a specific value). which each value of the reset time.

of phase-to-phase voltage, Final limit of the Module ramp
V0, phase currents and the and phase-to-phase voltage angle, Module, angle and
module, angle and V0, phase currents, the value of frequency values for the
frequency of the ramp the Module increment and phase- reset state (accessed
directly in the channels to-phase voltage angle, V0, phase after the generation
(depends on the definition currents. Time (depending on the time has elapsed). In
tab). settings above). this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
fields are only enabled
States of the GOOSE for pulsed ramp.
States of the binary outputs in the increment
and reset states.
Figure 571 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Phase-phase mode
30.9.11 Ramp Mode Resources – Power
screen appears. Choose the “Power Ramp Type” option. In the figure below, all features that
can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or pulsed type, initial
ramp values, final values, increment, reset values (in case the pulsed type is chosen),
generation and reset times.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
ramp type. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific being generated and the time in
generation time the ramp goes to a specific value). which each value of the reset time.
Initial values of definition Final limit of the Module ramp,

of phase-neutral voltage, angle, P and Q of the phase-
mono and three-phase neutral voltage, mono and three-
phase powers, the value of the Module, angle and
powers and the module,
increment of the Module, angle, frequency values for the
angle and frequency of the
P and Q of the phase-neutral reset state (accessed
ramp directly in the
voltage, mono and three-phase after the generation
channels (tied to the
powers. Ramp time. time has elapsed). In
definition tab).
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 572 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in Power mode
30.9.12 Ramp Mode Resources – Icc and Zlin impedance
screen appears. In the "Ramp Type", choose the Icc and Zlin Impedance option. In the figure

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
/
time the ramp goes to a specific value). which each value of the reset
time.
Initial values of definition Final limit of the module ramp

of Impedance of fault, Icc, and angle of Impedance of fault,
Impedance of the line, Icc, the value of the increment of
Module, angle and
inclusion of offset, the the Impedance of fault and the
module, angle and current of short. Ramp time.
reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp after the generation
directly in the channels. time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 573 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp in mode impedance Icc and Zlin
30.9.13 Ramp Mode Resources –Vcc and Zlin impedance
screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the option Vcc and Zlin impedance. In the
figure below, all features that can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as
direct or pulsed type, initial ramp values, final values, increment, reset values (in case the
pulsed type is chosen), generation and reset times.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each
Choice of
value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific increment is being
ramp type.
generation time the ramp goes to a specific generated and the time
value). in which each value of
the reset time.

of Impedance of fault, and fault impedance angle, Vcc,
Vcc, Impedance of the the value of the fault impedance
Module, angle and
line, inclusion of offset, increment and the short current.
the module, angle and Ramp time.
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 574 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp mode impedance at Vcc and Zlin
30.9.14 Ramp Mode Resources – SIR and Zlin impedance
screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the SIR and Zlin Impedance option. In the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of
ramp type.
the reset time.

of Impedance of fault, and fault impedance angle, SIR,
SIR, Impedance of the the value of the fault impedance
Module, angle and
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 575 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Resources Ramp mode impedance in SIR and Zlin

Just as there are sequences for the analog outputs AC, there is also the ability to

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence name.
Voltage and
current module.
Figure 576 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – DC Analog Outputs sub tab – General Description
30.9.16 Outputs Binary sub tab:

state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Figure 577 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Figure 578 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description

O usuário pode alterar a maneira de como o software irá mudar de uma Sequence
para a outra. Pode ser pela contagem do tempo, tempo ou lógica (o que for atendido
primeiro) e tempo ou tecla (caso o usuário aperte uma tecla antes da contagem de tempo, o
software avança para a próxima Sequence). Pode ser marcada a opção de considerar um
ângulo absoluto ou relativo na mudança de Sequence a fim de melhorar a transição e na
primeira Sequence pode-se escolher como será iniciado o conjunto de Sequences.

answered first).
parameterized
Sequences. (It only
Sequence).
Figure 579 – Rampa – Sequence Tab – Sub tab Time and Advance – General Description

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals directed from each channel to each
parameterized ramp. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value
verification.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 580 – Rampa – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 581 – Rampa – Waveform Tab - Resources
Clicking on the View option in the previous figure brings up the following options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Shows the frequency of Shows the variation of

the analog signals. the frequency of the
analog signals.

Figure 582 – Rampa – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
30.9.21 Phasor Tab

Figure 583 – Rampa – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

sizes for visualization between the time-
of graphs. related or channel-
related lag.

Figure for more
details.
Opens the Assign It allows changing the

Signals window where following parameters of
the user determines the graph: Title,
shown on the graphs. Table and Dimensions.
Take a photo of the chart by
storing it on the clipboard.
Figure 584 – Rampa – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:
Enables or disables
the display of the
following values:
Module, angle,
actual value,
imaginary value, lag,
instantaneous
and frequency
variation.
Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 585 – Rampa – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

With the voltage and current channels already parameterized with their respective
ramps, we can represent an impedance trajectory, so that if the user adds protection zones in
the Settings, it is possible to visualize the penetration of this COMTRADE or ATP in a
region of lack.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 586 – Rampa – Trajectories tab


sizes for visualization visualization of
of the graphs. values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 587 – Rampa – Trajectories tab - Resources

ramps, we can represent a harmonic bar diagram, together with the same data in a table
format.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 588 – Rampa – Harmonics Tab

of the graphs.
Opens the Assign

Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 589 – Rampa – Harmonics Tab - Resources

ramps, we can verify through a synchronoscope if these signals are able to perform a
synchronism. Note in the figure below that the light blue region is the synchronism region
and is determined in the Settings.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Synchronoscope Choice of voltages that represented

of cursor 1 and 2. System 1 (to be synchronized) and
System 2 (already synchronized).
Figure 590 – Rampa – Synchronoscope tab
30.9.28 Plane Z Tab

You can add sequence s pre-fault, fault and post missing insert n of them directly in
the Z plane, displayed together with the function of protection characteristic 21.
Type of fault
to be inserted.

Button to
can be inserted.
Figure 591 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Fault insertion
strings that cte, Z-V cte and Z-

post-fault modes.
Figure 592 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab - Resources
Confirmation
of the chosen
chosen and their
Figure 593 – Rampa – Plane Z Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
MASTER
SOFTWARE TO GENERATE SEQUENCES OF
ALL TYPES OF SIGNS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31 MASTER – Software to Generate Sequences of all Types of Signs

This software is designed to generate "n" sequences to be played by the EC-600X /
70xx enabling tests with various purposes. It is capable of generating sequences to test
distance relays, conducts tests on instruments under conditions lack of. It allows the
generation of up to 6 voltage or 6 current signals. In it, the user defines the waveform of
each signal, for the pre-fault and post-fault conditions, with harmonic content up to the 50th
order, for a fundamental frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. The user also has control of the number
of cycles generated in the pre-fault and post-fault conditions.
This software also reproduces (generates) signals measured in the field, stored in
files in the COMTRADE format (.Cfg), allowing the verification of the performance of
relays under real measurement conditions. The user can also direct digital signals to be
simulated on the six binary outputs and on the six GOOSE outputs. What matters for the
software are the waveforms. Thus, even if a given analog channel (branch) of the file is
current, for example, it can be directed to be generated as a voltage signal. When directing a
signal to the generation, the user indicates a transformation relation for this signal, which
allows the control of the amplitude of the signal to be generated, and makes the signal
generation levels do not exceed the maximum values allowed by the CE-600X / CE-
70XX . In addition, the software allows the generation of sequence s signals with adjustment
of a ramp. The generated ramps can be Direct or Pulsed, when pulsed, the value always
returns to a certain point before the next increment. It is possible to work with increments of
modulus, angle, modulus and angle, frequency, modulus and frequency, and df / dt.
The user can send to generate sequences of any kind, interspersed with each other.
Being able to use a smooth accommodation process to make such intercalations. It is then
possible, using the MASTER software to reproduce real COMTRADE / ATP signals
together with signals defined by the user. Using a cursor on the screen itself, the user can
display the generation times for each selected point on the graph. You can also view a
summary of the binary oscillography and comparisons. This software has the feature
"Opens Settings when Starting"(Software Options menu), if it is active, when starting the
Master software the Settings screen is active immediately, this feature is interesting since,
before starting the tests it is Important to specify the parameters related to the test.
Figure 594 – Master – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 595 – Master – Main screen

Software name and

version.
Bar.
Equipment used
and serial
Opens the
options: Restore, number.
Move, Size,
Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 596 – Master – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 597 – Master – Resources General Button
31.4 Home Menu
Figure 598 – Master – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the start menu dive resources are available. In the following figure are described
features of the hardware settings and editing sequence s such as insert, copy, delete, scroll
and select the reference.

Orientation for Hardware selected Sequence to the right binary nodes
screen. Configuration. Sequence. or left. in the display.

software and GPS Setup. strings. Sequence to the beginning
hardware. or end.
Figure 599 – Master – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence
Starts the signal Pauses

Reissue the Select a test from a list generation signal
process. generation.
selected test. of others.
Deletes the Deletes all Number of repetitions

selected test. tests from the of Sequences created.
list.
Figure 600 – Master – Home Menu – Result and Generation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
(waveforms, phasors, trajectories, harmonics, syncoscope and impedance plane) are
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Opens the Shows the Shows the
Settings Phasor Waveform Harmonics report time in time in
Screen. Tab. Tab. Tab. configuration seconds. cycles.
window.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Tabs for
viewing and
Standard
layout.
Shows values
Trajectory plan primary. relative
tab. absolute
tab. configuration. values. values.
Figure 601 – Master – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
31.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 602 – Master – View Menu – Windows and Layout

Insert password in Opens the Settings Shows the

the Test file so as Screen when the
not to allow the software is started.
editing of certain
settings.
Figure 603 – Master – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 604 – Master – Adjustments button
tab called Others for configuring digital signal filters and finally a Connections tab allowing
the user to structure all the connections between the test bag and the equipment to be Test
set.
format. When importing this file, the Master automatically reads it so that the user does not
need to adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a file .RIO once the feature
was entered by the user.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Distance
Connections.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
sync function.
Import
Files
.RIO
Export
Files
.RIO
Figure 605 – Master – Adjustment Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
new zone.
Figure 606 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 607 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.
Figure 608 – Master – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
Figure 609 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone
The following figure shows a quadrilateral zone that was drawn using straight line
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 610 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 611 – Master – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Quadrilateral Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 612 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems

or three- reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
phase phase or phase-to- none.
system. neutral is chosen.

Figure 613 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Figure 614 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Systems – Part 2

set.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 615 – Master – Adjustment screen – Synchronism – Synchronization adjustment

voltage deviation between voltage values shown as
the two systems for a percentage of the
synchronism to occur. reference voltage.
Maximum angle Maximum and

deviation between the minimum frequency
two Systems for deviation between the
synchronism to occur. two Systems for
synchronism to occur.
Figure 616 – Master – Adjustment Screen – Synchronism – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Maximum frequency Minimum frequency

value allowed for value allowed for


dead zone.

by the relay
manufacturer.
Relative and
absolute frequency
tolerances given by
the relay
manufacturer.
Relative and
absolute time
tolerances given
by the relay
manufacturer.
31.9 Sequence Tab

Next, all the features available in the Sequence tab will be explained.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.1 Node Output (NO) Sub tab

for each node if voltage channels / chain are associated with them.
Figure 620 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Two Nodes and three Sequences
add sequences click the Insert New Sequence. The figures below show the sequence modes
31.9.2 Direct Mode

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

name. time.
Module
Choice of
value. operating
mode.
Description
of the
targeted
channel. Frequency
value.
Generic
point of the
System. Angle
value.
Figure 621 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Description of the direct mode
31.9.3 Resources of the Direct Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Direct Mode os
seguintes Resources ficam disponíveis.
Voltage input mode.
Default number of
decimal places (two
Modo de entrada das places)
correntes
Reduced number of
Frequency entry
decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.
Figure 622 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources – Part 1
By clicking the voltages, currents or frequencies, the following resources are

available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Data entry is done channel

Calculates the
by channel in Module and
value in channels
angle (Free mode) or data
with a generic
entry is made only by one
voltage point
channel, and the others are
between phases.
automatically matched to
Calculates the the first (Equal mode)
value in the
channel with a
generic Calculates the value in the
displacement channel with a generic
voltage point. ground current point.
Data entry is done through

only one channel, and the Keeps the
balance and balancing frequency of all
(Sequence ABC or ACB) channels the
of the other phases is same.
automatically made.
31.9.4 Harmonics Mode
In this mode, the user directly enters the module value and angle of each harmonic
component (up to 50th order). Note in the figure below that only the total RMS (true RMS)
and the total harmonic distortion of the quantity involved are displayed, to enter the values
as described, the user has to access the modules and angles as described below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

name. time.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Description
of the Access to the
targeted Module and
channel. Angle of 50
harm orders.
Generic
point of the
System. RMS value
and Total
Harmonic
Distortion
(THD) of
the entered
harmonic
orders.
Figure 624 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Harmonics mode
31.9.5 Harmonic Mode Resources


harmonics.

Angle.
Harmonic Order.
By right-clicking on the text box on the Harmonics input screen in the Harmonics

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


places).
31.9.6 Interharmonics Mode
interharmonic component (up to 10 interharmonic).

name. time.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Description of
the targeted Access to the Module
channel. and Angle of
interharmonical orders.
Generic
point of the RMS value and
System. Total Harmonic
Distortion (DHT) of
the inserted
interharmonic
orders.
Figure 627 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Interharmonic mode description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.7 Interharmonic Resources
Clears values of
module and angle
already
parameterized.
Frequency of the
interharmonic of Module value and angle
interest. of the inter-harmonic
order in question.
By right-clicking on the text box on the interharmonic input screen in interharmonic


User-defined number
Default number of
of decimal places.
decimal places (two
places).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

In this mode, the user enters voltages and currents of positive, negative and zero
sequence components. The software then calculates which values have to be generated by
the channels so that these quantities of symmetrical components are met.

current name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
condition of
symmetrical
component.
Definition of
symmetric Voltage and current
values. values in
symmetrical
component format.
Both module and
angle.
Figure 630 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Symmetric Components
Mode

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no modo Componentes
Simétricas os seguintes Resources ficam disponíveis.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
decimal places.
Frequency entry
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.10 Phase-to-Phase Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário define o valor de tensão fase-fase Vab, a tensão de Sequence
zero e as correntes de fase. O software então calcula quais os valores que tem que ser
gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades de tensão fase-fase sejam atendidas.

current values name. time.
that will be
generated to Choice of
meet the phase- operating
to-phase voltage mode.
condition.
Definition of voltage, Sequence zero
the Phase- voltage and current in
Phase value. the three phases.
Figure 632 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Phase-to-Phase Mode
31.9.11 Resources do Phase-to-Phase Mode

By right-clicking on the text box in the Phase-to-phase mode, the following
features for formatting the input data are available.
Voltage input mode.

Default number of
decimal places (two
Reduced number of
Frequency entry
decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.12 Power Mode

In this mode, the user defines the phase - neutral voltage value of the three phases,
the active and reactive power of each phase. The software then calculates which values have
to be generated by the channels in order for these amounts of power to be met.

current Name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
Power
condition.
Definition of
phase active and
reactive powers.
Figure 634 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Power Mode
31.9.13 Power Mode Resources

By right-clicking on a text box in Power mode, the following features for formatting
the input data are available.
Voltage input mode.

Default number of
decimal places (two
Reduced number of
Frequency entry
decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.14 Fault Mode

In this mode, the user defines the value of short-circuit voltage; short-circuit current,
angle between voltage and current and the type of fault. The software then calculates which
values have to be generated by the channels in order for these missing quantities to be met.

current name. time.
values that
will be Choice of
meet the mode.
fault
condition.
Defining the
phase, two-phase or
between voltage and
and fault current.
Figure 636 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Fault Mode
31.9.15 Fault Mode Resources

Ao clicar com o botão direito do mouse sobre caixa de textos no Fault Mode os
seguintes Resources de formatação dos dados de entrada ficam disponíveis.
decimal places (two
places).
Current input mode.
Reduced number of
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.16 Constant ZI Mode

In this mode, the user defines impedance and current values that will be kept
that these amounts of constant Z / I and variable V are met.

values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
Z-I costant definition of the Impedance
of the fault current that will be
adjustments).
Figure 638 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Constant ZI Mode
31.9.17 Constant ZI Mode Resources

By right-clicking on a text box in constant ZI mode, the
following formatting features for the input data are available.
Voltage input mode.

Default number of
decimal places (two
Reduced number of
Frequency entry
decimal places.
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.18 Constant ZV Mode

In this mode, the user defines impedance and voltage values that will be kept
that these quantities of constant Z / V and variable I are met.

values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
constant Z-V definition of the Impedance
of the fault voltage that will be
adjustments).
Figure 640 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Constant ZV Mode
31.9.19 Constant ZV Mode Resources

By right-clicking on a text box in constant ZV mode, the following input data
formatting features are available.
Voltage input mode.

Default number of
decimal places (two
Frequency entry Reduced number of

mode. decimal places.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.20 Constante Z Source Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário define o modo e os valores da Impedance de fonte que será
mantida constante, juntamente com a Impedance de falta. O software então calcula quais os
valores que tem que ser gerados pelos canais para que essas quantidades sejam atendidas.

values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
source constant definition of the fault
values. impedance, definition of the
source impedance and
node or by the zone
adjustments).
Figure 642 – Master – Sequence Tab – NODE sub tab – Description of the Z mode – constant source
31.9.21 Z Mode Resources – Constant Source

By right-clicking on a text box in constant Z-Source mode, the following formatting
features for the input data are available.
Voltage input mode.

Default number of
decimal places (two
Reduced number of
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.
Figure 643 – Master – Sequence Tab - Resources– Part 13

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.22 Z Mode - Smart

In this mode, the user defines the fault impedance and the fault values are generated
respecting a limit defined by the user, in this case, therefore, both the current and the voltage
vary.

current Name. time. operating
values that mode.
will be
generated to
meet the
source phase or single-phase),
condition. enabling DC offset, start of the
source constant definition of fault impedance,
values. definition of limits (voltage
and current) and definition of
node or by zone adjustments).
Figure 644 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Z Mode - Smart
31.9.23 Z Mode Resources - Smart

By right-clicking on the text box in Z-Smart mode, the following features for
formatting the input data are available.

decimal places (two
Reduced number of
mode.
User-defined number
of decimal places.
Opens the data

association screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.24 Standby Mode

Nesse modo, o usuário cria uma espera, cujo avanço para a próxima Sequence só
ocorre após a confirmação por tecla. O usuário tem espaço para escrever o motivo e
adicionar figuras com o intuído de auxiliar quem estiver realizando o Test.
Sequence Choice of
name. operating
mode.
Definition of
the waiting
sequence.
Access button
for adding
image and
auxiliary text.
Figure 646 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Standby Mode
31.9.25 Standby Mode Resources

By clicking on the right access button of the auxiliary settings in standby mode, the
following input data formatting features are available.
Insert an image or
change an existing
Area for text editing. one.
Deletes an existing
image.
Area for viewing the

image after insertion.
Adjusts the added

image to the size of
the preview screen.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
At the time of the test when this waiting sequence is reached, the following screen
will appear.
Adjusts the Confirmation

image to the button to
size of the advance the
preview next
Sequence.
screen.
31.9.26 Accommodation Mode

In this mode, the user enters a sequence that will make the transition to the next in a
more muted way. This mode only appears between two sequences, never at the
beginning or end of a set of sequences.
Choice of
operating
mode.
Sequence
name.
Duration of the
transition in cycles.
Reference channel
for starting
damping.
Figure 649 – Master – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab– Description of the Accommodation Mode
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.27 Ramp Mode

This is the Ramp Mode, which will be seen in detail in the following figures.
Total Master Sequence

Sequence Time (non-
name. parameterizable).
Access button for ramp

parameterization.
Figure 650 – Master – Sequence Tab
31.9.28 Ramp Mode Resources – Module Type

screen appears. Choose the option “Module” in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of Choose between Direct (no return for a specific value) Time in which each increment is
ramp type being generated and the time in
or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation time the
which each value of the reset time.
ramp goes to a specific value).
Final limit of the module ramp,

the value of the module Module, angle and
Initial values of increment, the variation in time frequency values for the
module, angle and (d/dt) of the module increment, reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. number of steps and time after the generation
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 651 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in Module mode
31.9.29 Ramp Mode Resources – Angle Type

screen appears. Choose the “Angle type” option in the "Ramp Type". In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
being generated and the time in
ramp type. or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation time the
Final limit of the angle ramp, the

value of the angle increment, the Module, angle and
Initial values of variation in time (d / dt) of the frequency values for the
module, angle and angle increment, number of steps reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. and time (depends on the after the generation
previous fields). time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 652 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in the Angle mode
31.9.30 Ramp Mode Resources – Frequency type

screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the Frequency option. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the Choose between Direct (no return for a specific Time in which each increment is
type of ramp. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation
time the ramp goes to a specific value).
Final limit of the Frequency

ramp, the value of the frequency Module, angle and
Initial values of increment, the variation in time frequency values for the
module, angle and (d/dt) of the frequency increment, reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. number of steps and time after the generation
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 653 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in order Frequency
31.9.31 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Angle

screen appears. Choose the “Module and Angle” option in the "Ramp Type”. In the figure

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
type of ramp. being generated and the time in which
value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific
each value of the reset time.
generation time the ramp goes to a specific value).
Final limit of the Module and

Angle Master, the value of the Module, angle and
Initial values of Module and Angle increment, frequency values for the
module, angle and number of steps and time reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. (depends on the previous fields). after the generation
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 654 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp on the way and Angle Module
31.9.32 Ramp Mode Resources – Module and Frequency

screen appears. Choose the “Module and Frequency” option in the "Ramp Type”. In the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Limite final da Master de Módulo

e Frequência, o valor da Module, angle and
Initial values of incrementação do Módulo e frequency values for the
module, angle and Frequência, número de passos e reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. tempo (depende dos campos after the generation
anteriores). time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 655 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in mode Module and Frequency
31.9.33 Resources do Ramp Mode – dF/dt

screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the option dF/dt. In the figure below, all

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
ramp type. or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation time the
Start and end limit of the dF / dt

ramp, the value of the dF / dt Module, angle and
Initial values of increment, number of steps and frequency values for the
module, angle and time (depends on the previous reset state (accessed
frequency of the ramp. fields). after the generation
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
Figure 656 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in mode dF/dt
31.9.34 Ramp Mode Resources – Symmetric Components

screen appears. Choose the "Symmetric Components" option in the "Ramp Type”. In the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

of Symmetric Final limit of the Module ramp
Components (voltage and and angle of the Symmetric
current) and the module, Components, the value of the Module, angle and
angle and frequency of the increment of the Module and frequency values for the
ramp directly in the angle of the comp. symmetrical, reset state (accessed
channels (depends on the number of steps and time after the generation
definition tab). (depends on previous fields). time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 657 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in mode Symmetrical Component
31.9.35 Resources do Ramp Mode – Phase to Phase

screen appears. Choose the "Symmetric Components" option in the "Ramp Type”. In the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
type of ramp. being generated and the time in
value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation

of phase-to-phase voltage, Final limit of the Module ramp
V0, phase currents and the and phase-to-phase voltage angle,
module, angle and V0, phase currents, the value of Module, angle and
frequency of the ramp the Module increment and phase- frequency values for the
directly in the channels to-phase voltage angle, V0, phase reset state (accessed
(depends on the definition currents. Time (depending on the after the generation
tab). above settings). time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 658 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in the Phase-to-Phase Mode
31.9.36 Ramp Mode Resources – Power

screen appears. Choose the "Power Ramp Type" option. In the figure below, all features that
can be parameterized in this mode are characterized, such as direct or pulsed type, initial
ramp values, final values, increment, reset values (in case the pulsed type is chosen),
generation and reset times.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the Choose between Direct (no return for a specific value) Time in which each increment is
type of ramp. or Pulsed (at the end of a specific generation time the
Initial values of definition Final limit of the Module ramp,

of phase-neutral voltage, angle, P and Q of the phase-
mono and three-phase neutral voltage, mono and three-
powers and the module, phase powers, the value of the Module, angle and
angle and frequency of the increment of the Module, angle, frequency values for the
ramp directly in the P and Q of the phase-neutral reset state (accessed
channels (tied to the voltage, mono and three-phase after the generation
definition tab). powers. Master’s time. time has elapsed). In
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 659 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources the ramp in Power Mode
31.9.37 Ramp Mode Resources – Icc and Zlin Impedance

screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the option Vcc and Zlin impedance. In the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the
type of ramp. value) or Pulsed (at the end of a specific increment is being
the reset time.

of Impedance of fault, Icc, and angle of Impedance of fault,
Impedance of the line, Icc, the value of the increment of
Module, angle and
inclusion of offset, the the Impedance of fault and the
module, angle and current of short. Ramp time.
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 660 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in Impedance Icc and Zlin mode
31.9.38 Resources do Ramp Mode – Impedance Vcc e Zlin

screen appears. In the "Ramp Type", choose the Icc and Zlin Impedance option. In the figure

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the
type of ramp.
the reset time.
Initial values of definition Final limit of the module Master

of Impedance of fault, and angle of Impedance of fault,
Vcc, Impedance of the Vcc, the value of the increment
Module, angle and
line, inclusion of offset, of the fault Impedance and the
the module, angle and short current. Ramp time.
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 661 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in Vcc and Zlin Impedance mode
31.9.39 Ramp Mode Resources – SIR and Zlin Impedance

screen appears. Choose in the "Ramp Type" the SIR and Zlin Impedance option. In the
pulsed type is chosen), generation and reset time.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choosing the
type of ramp.
the reset time.

of Impedance of fault, and fault impedance angle, SIR,
SIR, Impedance of the the value of the fault impedance
Module, angle and
this window you can
ramp. NOTE: these
and reset states.
Figure 662 – Master – Sequence Tab – Resources of the ramp in SIR and Zlin Impedance mode
31.9.40 COMTRADE/ATP Mode

Unlike the Transient and Master software, there are only two sequence modes in

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Total time of the

name.
(not configurable).
Choose between
COMTRADE file Access button for
(.cfg extension) parameterizing the
or ATP file (.lis comtrade / ATP file.
extension).
Figure 663 – Master – Sequence Tab
31.9.41 COMTRADE mode Resources – Output targeting

When clicking on the access button for the parameterization of the COMTRADE
mode and loading a .cfg file, a screen appears where basically the user will redirect
the COMTRADE signal (voltage, current or binary signals) to a certain channel (analog or
binary output). See the figure with details below:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the uploaded
box. file.



node.

Picture box.
Directing the file up to six binary outputs
node to the
generation channels.
outputs.

Picture box.
Figure 664 – Master – Sequence Tab – Channel Direction
31.9.42 ATP mode Resources – Channel Direction

When clicking on the access button for the parameterization of the ATP mode and
loading a .lis file, a screen appears where basically the user will redirect the simulation
signal from the ATP file (voltage, current) to a certain analog channel. See the figure with
details below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the file.
box. carregado.


Directing the file

node.

Picture box.
Figure 665 – Master – Sequence Tab – Channel Direction

generation sub tab is opened, both current and voltage.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence name.
Voltage and
current module.
Figure 666 – Master – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description

state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Figure 667 – Master – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
relay and so on. It has the ability to change the state of the message between NO and NC
in any sequence (through a graphic resource), delay or advance the time of changing that
state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.
State (true or false) of the Start and

GOOSE exit on the end delay.
Figure 668 – Master – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs Sub tab – General Description

O usuário pode alterar a maneira de como o software irá mudar de uma Sequence
para a outra. Pode ser pela contagem do tempo, tempo ou lógica (o que for atendido
primeiro) e tempo ou tecla (caso o usuário aperte uma tecla antes da contagem de tempo, o
software avança para a próxima Sequence). Pode ser marcada a opção de considerar um
ângulo absoluto ou relativo na mudança de Sequence a fim de melhorar a transição e na
primeira Sequence pode-se escolher como será iniciado o conjunto de Sequences.

answered first).
parameterized
Sequences. (It only
Sequence).
Figure 669 – Master – Sequence Tab –Time and Advance Sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

In this tab, the user sees the signals created for each sequence for each channel. It
features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value verification.
Figure 670 – Master – Waveform Tab
31.9.48 Waveform Tab Resources



values will be Table and
shown on the Dimensions.
graphs.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 671 – Master – Waveform Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Clicking on the View option in the previous figure brings you to the following
options:



the frequency of the
the analog signals.
analog signals.

Figure 672 – Master – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
31.9.49 Phasor Tab

Figure 673 – Master – Phasor Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.50 Phasor Tab Resources

It allows 4 different Allows you to choose

of the graphs. related or channel-
related lag.

Figure for more
details.

shown on the graphs. Take a photo of the chart by Table and Dimensions.
Figure 674 – Master – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:
Enables or disables
the display of the
following values:
Module, angle,
actual value,
instantaneous
and frequency
variation. Enables or disables the
Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 675 – Master – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

With the voltage and current channels already directed with COMTRADE / ATP file
signals, sequences or ramps we can represent an impedance path, so that if the user adds
protection zones in the Settings, it is possible to visualize the penetration of that
COMTRADE or ATP in a fault region.
Figure 676 – Master – Trajectories tab
31.9.52 Trajectories tab Resources


visualization of
graphs.
values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.

Take a photo of the
or edit comments to
the chart.
the clipboard.
Figure 677 – Master – Trajectories tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

With the voltage and current channels already directed with COMTRADE / ATP file
signals, sequence s or ramps, we can represent a harmonic bar diagram, together with the
same data in table format.
Figure 678 – Master – Harmonics Tab
31.9.54 Harmonics Tab Resources


sizes for visualization visualization of
of the graphs. values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Signals window It allows changing the
where the user following parameters
determines which of the graph: Title,
values will be shown Legend, Scale, Grid,
on the graphs. Table and
Dimensions.

Take a photo of the
or edit comments to
the chart.
the clipboard.
Figure 679 – Master – Harmonics Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
31.9.55Synchronoscope tab
With the voltage and current channels already directed with signals from the
COMTRADE / ATP file, sequence s or ramps, we can check through a synchronoscope if
these signals are able to perform a synchronism. Note in the figure below that the light blue
region is the synchronism region and is determined in the Settings.
Synchronoscope Choice of voltages that represented

of cursor 1 and 2. System 1 (to be synchronized) and
System 2 (already synchronized).
Figure 680 – Master – Synchronoscope tab
31.9.56 Plane Z Tab

It is possible to add pre-fault, fault and post-fault sequences by inserting them
directly into the Z plane, displayed together with the protection feature of function 21.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of fault
to be inserted.

Button to
can be inserted.
Figure 681 – Master – Plane Z Tab
Fault insertion

post-fault modes.
Figure 682 – Master – Plane Z Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Confirmation
of the chosen
chosen and their
Figure 683 – Master – Plane Z Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
SOBRECOR
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING OVERCURRENT
RELAYS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
32 Sobrecor - Software for testing overcurrent relays

This software performs automatic tests on overcurrent relays. It allows the user to
adjust the current in order to check pickup, drop-out and operating times of functions 50 and
51. Another feature is to check the directionality of the overcurrent elements
The user can configure the tests specifying which generation channels are directed to
the voltages and currents, and can also enable Pre-Simulation conditions 1 and 2 and a Post-
Simulation condition.
The tests performed are: Pickup Test and Time Test. For all tests, it is possible to
visualize waveforms, phasors and directional regions.
is active, when you start the Sobrecor software, the Settings screen is active immediately,
this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests, it is Important to specify the
parameters related to the test.
Figure 684 – Sobrecor – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 685 – Sobrecor – Settings Screen
The field Sobrecor is will discussed throughout this chapter.

The Figure abaixo mostra de forma detalhada cada função da barra padrão de
série.
test. current test. Quick Access version.
test file.
Bar.
Opens the Equipment used

options:
and serial
Restore,
Move, Size, number.
Minimize,
Maximize
and Close.
Figure 686 – Sobrecor – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 687 – Sobrecor – Resources General Button
32.4 Home Menu
Figure 688 – Sobrecor – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the start menu, several resources are available . The following figure describes
process.
Clears the
selected
point and
returns to
the status of
Not Tested.
Connects between Opens a screen Go to the Clears all spots

software and for GPS Setup. next line. and returns to the status of
hardware. Not Tested.
Figure 689 – Sobrecor – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms and phasors) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General Settings
and overcurrent). Access to the report, options for viewing the units involved (time and
module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout are also displayed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows the Shows Shows the Shows the Returns to Enables /

Waveform the time in time in the standard disables
Tab. Phasor seconds. cycles. layout. tabs for
Tab. viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
Calls the report Shows values Shows Shows
Settings configuration based on the absolute relative
Screen. window. primary. values. values.
Figure 690 – Sobrecor – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
32.5 View Menu

The menu display are available are some visualization capabilities where the user

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Position the Superimposes the Hide the windows Returns to Enables /

selected window. the standard
selected window: for better viewing. disables tabs
layout.
on the left; to the for viewing.
right, above,
below or as a
document.
Figure 691 – Sobrecor – View Menu – Windows and Layout

the Test file so as simulation mode. Since Screen when the manufacturer’s
not to allow the in this mode there is no software is started. address, phone,
editing of certain insertion of voltage and email and fax.
settings. current.
Figure 692 – Sobrecor – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 693 – Sobrecor – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Current.
In General mode, there is the “General Information” tab, where the user enters all the
data relating to: the Test, the Test set Device and the person responsible for the Test, there is
the “Reference Values” tab, where the user informs the nominal values of voltage, current
and power for system 1, there is also a tab for “Notes and Observations”. In the other tab
“Explanatory Figures” it is possible to insert up to 3 figures in the most used image
extensions, such as: Bitmap; JPGE; PNG; JPG; etc.
In the Sobrecor mode, there is the “Settings” tab. Here the user can skilful it air
directionality and polarization mode. For the time test, it is possible to define whether the
time considered is that of the shortest curve or if it will respect the characteristic of each one.
Another feature is to define if the value of the pickup is given in amps, if it

is defined as the nominal current or even a specific current can be defined. The possibility
exists d the current graphic display at multiple time is pickup x time or values Amperes
versus time.
You can choose between automatic or user-defined scale, adjust the values
of the negative sequence and zero sequence multipliers and configure the current, time and
angle tolerances associated with the test.
There is another tab called "overcurrent elements” which configures the phase
elements, residual sequence and negative sequence zero. Considering a make element, for
example, you can adjust it as function 51, 50 or 67.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
32.8 Settings Screen –Overcurrent – Definitions

The figure below shows the parameterization of general adjustments, such as:
enabling directionality, choosing the polarization quantity, curves composition mode (the
software will compose all 50/51 curves so that only the shortest sections will be taken into
account in the test or the software will respect the definitions of each 50/51 curve testing all
sections).
It also has a definition of the pickup adjustment (in amps, relative to a nominal
current or relative to a defined current), curve display mode (choice of module or multiple
pickup and the reference of the multiples that can be between a value defined or the smallest
pickup), scale type, multipliers for negative and zero sequence tests (depends on the
equipment Test set) and module, angle and time tolerances in absolute or relative scales.
Figure 694 – Sobrecor – Definitions
32.9 Settings Screen – Overcurrent Screen – Overcurrent Elements

In this screen the user can register the elements of Phase,
Residual, Negative Sequence and Zero Sequence and the directional characteristic of each
element, if it is parameterized in the relay and the user wants to test it. As an example, the

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
following figure shows three phase elements, the graph of which is shown in the Total
Characteristic tab.
Figure 695 – Sobrecor – Overcurrent elements - Characteristic Total
Selecting one of the elements, you can adjust particular characteristics for each
element. In the figure below, the individual characteristic of the inverse time unit (51) is
shown, on this screen the description, the choice of the standardized curve, the adjustment of
the time dial, the pickup value and the drop-out ratio are made.
Note two specific settings: pickup test multiple (some relays apply this multiple to
their already parameterized pickup) and ∆t (some relays apply this waiting time after the
curve time is reached).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 696 – Sobrecor – overcurrent elements – Single Characteristic
The figure below shows the screen where the individual directionality of the selected
element is parameterized. Note that the polarization quantity is not available, as it has
already been selected in the "Settings" tab. It is observed that for each element (50 or 51)
different adjustments can be applied (directionality, ATM, Vmin and etc.). This is due to
some relays that allow such an adjustment in the 50/51 directionality.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 697 – Sobrecor – overcurrent elements - Individual Directionality
32.10 Overcurrent Chart Tab
After entering the settings, these are shown in the Overcurrent Chart tab.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 698 – Sobrecor – Overcurrent Chart Tab
Double clicking on the Graph tab maximizes this screen.
Figure 699 – Sobrecor – Graphic tab maximized

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
32.10.1Resources of the Graphics Tab

Maximizes the graphics tab.
Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
test.
Shows the frequency
and voltage values on
the x and y axes.
Figure 700 – Sobrecor – Graphics Tab - Resources
32.11 Waveform Tab
Figure 701 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab
32.11.1Resources of the Waveform Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


values will be shown Table and
on the graphs. Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
file from the waveforms.
Allows you to Insert or
Take a photo of the chart
Figure 702 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab - Resources
options:

Shows the RMS values

Shows the angles of
Shows the frequency of the analog signals.
the analog signals.
Chama a Phasor Tab. analog signals.
Figure 703 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
32.12 Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 704 – Sobrecor – Phasor Tab
32.12.1 Resources of the Phasors Tab.


related lag.
Allows you to choose This option will be

between Angle of each shown in the next
phasor or phasor lag. Figure for more
details.

which values will be Take a photo of the chart by Legend, Scale, Grid,
shown on the graphs. storing it on the clipboard. Table and Dimensions.
Figure 705 – Sobrecor – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables or disables
the display of the
following values:
value, imaginary
value, lag,
instantaneous
and frequency Enables or disables the
variation. display of the following
Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 706 – Sobrecor – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
32.13 Directionality Tab

Figure 707 – Sobrecor – Synchronism Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
32.14 Test of Pickup

This test aims to evaluate pickup and / or drop-out of the registered
elements. Can if choose freely what kind of missing this test will be assessed. The options
are three-phase, two-phase, single-phase fault, negative sequence and zero sequence.
Figure 708 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test
The previous figure shows the result of a Pickup test. For a better explanation of this
test, this figure is divided into parts.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose how the tests Shows which element Shows the nominal Shows the percentage
will be shown. Each is being tested. and actual DropOut and absolute errors of
point individually or in value, that is, what Pickup and DropOut.
a group. was found.
Shows the type Informs the value of the Shows the nominal Shows the voltage
of fault and the nominal, minimum, DropOut factor and current values
angle when there maximum pickup and and the one found. injected in the test.
is directionality. what was found.
Figure 709 – Sobrecor – Main screen –Pickup Test - Options
As an example leaving the options “Fault & Ang”, “Ref Curve” and “Info Pickup” of
the previous figure marked, the following data are shown:
Test Type of Angle Name of Nominal, minimum, Validation of

point fault. of the maximum and actual points under test.
number. action. element. pickup values.
Figure 710 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Test Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Edit a point
already tested.
Creates a
new point
Not available for test.
for this test.
Removes the
Removes all selected
tested points point.
Figure 711 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Insert / Edit Points
When the user clicks on “New Point” it is possible to choose whether DropOut will
be Test set and for which type of fault it is desired to do the Pickup and / or DropOut test.
Figure 712 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – General Options
The following figure shows the plot of the points before they are Test set. The
moment they are Test set they turn green if they pass or red if they fail.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 713 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Overcurrent Graph
The next illustration shows the legend for the graph of the performance of the inverse
curve and the time defined in the software.
Type of fault and

angle of the
tested point.
Colors representing
status of points:
Orange: Not Tested;
Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Value of the multiple of

the pickup and the time
of the position of the
cursors in the graph.
Figure 714 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Pickup Test – Legend

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
32.15 Time Test

The purpose of the time test is to verify that the actuation times of each element are
within the tolerance given by the relay manufacturer.
Figure 715 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test
The previous figure shows the result of a search test. To facilitate the understanding,
each tab of this test will be shown in detail in the next figures. For each row the user can
choose what type of data will be shown in the table according to the figure below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose how the test will Shows which Shows Shows the expected Shows the voltage
be shown. Each point multiple is which time and the time and current values
individually or in a being tested. element is that was found. injected in the test.
group. being tested.
Shows the type Shows the fault Shows the nominal Shows the
of fault of the current and the angle DropOut factor percentage and
tested point. when there is and the one found. absolute errors of
directionality. the operating time.
Figure 716 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Options
As an example only leaving Options "missing" "Curve ref ", "Time" and "Error” of
the previous figure are shown the following data:
Test Type Element Time set Time Percentage and absolute Test
point of under in the found in error between nominal validati
number. fault. test. relay. the test. and real time. on.
Figure 717 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Test set Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a
sequence of
lines.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
added lines.
Figure 718 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Insert / Edit Lines
When the user clicks on “New Line” the settings of the fields shown below are
available.
Enables / disables the option to Type of fault Value of the Current value in
choose which element your pickup to be tested. multiple of the amps for the test.
will be used as a multiple base. pickup for the
test.
Figure 719 – Sobrecor – Main screen –Time Test – General Options
When clicking on “Sequence” the user defines an initial, final and step current value.
In this way, several lines are automatically inserted.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose one
or more types
of fault.
Current values in amps from the

beginning, end and step to create
the Sequence of lines
automatically.
Figure 720 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – General Options - Sequenc
The following figure shows the graph of the lines before they are Test set. The
moment they are Test set they become green points if they pass or red points if they fail.
Figure 721 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Overcurrent Graph

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Type of fault and

angle of the
tested point.
Colors representing
status of points:
Orange: Not Tested;
Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Current values of the

mouse position when
on the previous
graphic.
Figure 722 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Time Test – Legend
32.16 Test Settings

In the Test Settings tab, the user directs the voltage and current generation channels,
enabling up to two pre-simulation conditions and one post-simulation condition. It is also in
this tab that the user defines the amplitude and angle values of the pre-simulation and post-
simulation situations and the duration of each one.
Figure 723 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the following figure, the designation of channels and the insertion of pre and post
fault are detailed.
Enables pre-simulation
1 and 2 and post-
simulation conditions.
Designates the generation Module and angle values of each Module and angle values of
channels either current or channel for pre-simulation each channel for post-
voltage. condition - 1 and 2. simulation condition.
Figure 724 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channels – Pre-Simulation
and Post-Simulation
The figure below shows the location in the Test Configuration tab where the user
determines the status of each binary output (BO), each GOOSE output (GO) and the pre-
and post-fault time.
The user defines the generation time for the Pre-

Simulation and Post-Pre-Simulation cycles.
Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Defines the states of the
Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and
GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when
configured) in the configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Post-
Simulation cycle. Simulation 1 cycle. Simulation cycle 2. Simulation cycle.
Figure 725 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary
and GOOSE Outputs.
The figure below shows the line voltage / phase voltage adjustments applied to three-
phase, two-phase and ground-to-earth faults in directional protections. The ratio between the
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
earth and phase transformation ratios for TPs and TCs is adjusted. Finally, the user can
invert the polarities of the TCs and TPs.
For elements with

directionality, the line
voltage value for biphasic
faults is adjusted.
For elements with
directionality, the phase
voltage value is adjusted
for all types of faults
Ratio between the except for biphasic.
transformation ratio of the
displacement and phase
TPs.
Ratio between the
transformation ratio of the
earth and phase CTs.
Reverses the Polarity of
the phase and / or
displacement TPs.
Reverses the Polarity of the
phase and / or ground CTs.
Figure 726 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Adjustments
Minimum waiting Minimum absolute

time between and relative
increments in the increment of the
Pickup test for the Pickup test.
same point.
Logic for blocking
Maximum generation biphasic faults
time when the point which can be:
is outside the region None, Per phase or
of operation. For Single.
elements with
directionality.
Extra time in the
test of the timed
curve.
When enabled, there

When enabled, the software performs a is no measurement /
waveform buffer and then reproduces it correction of the
completely faithfully. generated signal.
Figure 727 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Other Adjustments

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Group of
phase
elements,
residual,
positive,
negative
and zero
sequence.
Stop
interface
Element for the
number. trip
signal.
Name of Stop interface for the

the element pickup signal.
Stopwatch trigger interface by: Insert logic between binary Trigger time
software, GPS, or by binary logic. inputs or GOOSE messages. delay.
Allows “E” or “OR” logic.
Figure 728 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings –Interfaces
Minimum value of negative Minimum value of

Sequence voltage for negative Sequence
pickup to occur. current for pickup to
occur.
Minimum voltage value Minimum current value
of Sequence zero for of Sequence zero for
pickup to occur. pickup to occur.
Minimum value of positive Minimum value of

Sequence voltage for positive Sequence
pickup to occur. current for pickup to
occur.
Figure 729 – Sobrecor – Main screen – Test Settings – Pickup Limits

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
DIFERENC
SOFTWARE FOR TESTINGS IN
DIFFERENTIALS RELAYS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33 Diferenc - Software for tests on differential relays

This software performs automatic tests on differential relays. A variety of predefined
differential relay models are registered in the software, allowing the user greater facilities for
entering test data. However, if the relay is not registered, the compensation characteristics
can be easily parameterized.
the windings from 1 (one) to 4 (four), can also enable Fault conditions, and Pre-Fault
conditions 1 and 2.
The tests performed are: Configuration Test, Point Test and Search Test. For all tests
it is possible to view the characteristic curve. The software also allows you to direct
the Fault, Pre-Fault 1 and Pre-Fault 2 pulse conditions to the Binary and GOOSE outputs .
This software has the feature "Open settings at startup" ( Software Options menu ) ,
if it is active when starting the software Diferenc the screen settings becomes active
Figure 730 – Diferenc – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.2 Main screen
Figure 731 – Diferenc – Main screen
The options on the screen settings are described in detail in Chapter 21. Field
Diferencial will be discussed throughout this chapter.

test file. test. current test. Quick Access and version.
Bar.
Opens the
Restore, and serial
Move, Size, number.
Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 732 – Diferenc – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the Trip information.
software. View Manufacturer data.
Figure 733 – Diferenc – Resources General Button

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.5 Home Menu
Figure 734 – Diferenc – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Orientation for Hardware signal generation. next point.
screen. Configuration. generation
process.
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to Untested
status.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
Opens a screen Setup of sample of Not
Connects between for GPS Setup. value and goose Tested.
software and messages.
hardware.
Figure 735 – Diferenc – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms, phasors, System represented by the case, internal currents to the relay and
special adjustments for tests in the SEL relay) are displayed, as well as the adjustment
options (General Settings and Differential). Access to the report, options for viewing the
units involved (time and module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout
are also displayed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Settings Waveform Phasor System that a time in time in the standard
Screen. Tab. Tab. test set will seconds. cycles. layout.
simulate.
Enables /
Shows the Opens the Restore all disables tabs
Special details of the report graphics.
settings for for viewing.
relay before configuration
SEL relays. and after window.
compensation.
Figure 736 – Diferenc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
33.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
window: on the left; selected window. for better viewing. the standard disables tabs
to the right, above, layout. for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 737 – Diferenc – View Menu – Windows and Layout

the Test file so as simulation mode. Since Screen when the manufacturer’s
not to allow the in this mode there is no software is started. address, phone,
editing of certain insertion of voltage and email and fax.
settings. current.
Displays
information
about which
trip signal
should be
captured on
earth faults.
Figure 738 – Diferenc – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 739 – Diferenc – Adjustments button
In it there are two display modes: General and Differential.
data related to the test, the Test set device and the person responsible for the
set.
In Differential mode, there is the Protected Equipment / CTs tab and the Differential
Protection Adjustment tab. In the Protected Equipment / CTs tab, the user chooses the
protected equipment (Transformer, Generator, Line, Bus or Motor), the rated power, and the
rated voltage. If the equipment is a transformer, it is necessary to inform the connection, the
vector group and on which side the ground is.
In this same tab it is possible to parameterize the CTs that make the measurements on
both sides and the data that must be entered are: primary current, secondary current and the
connection. If the connection of these CT banks is for electromechanical relays (option D or
Y), their vector group can be adjusted. Finally, it is possible to parameterize the connection
of auxiliary CTs, which are used for the correction of mismatch in the electromechanical
differential protection, the parameterization data are: primary current, secondary current,
connection and vector group.
In the Protection Adjustment tab, there are two “sub-tabs”: Adjustments and Slope
Definition. In the Settings sub tab, the user can define a pre-registered relay in the “data

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
entry” field, in addition to the differential and instantaneous adjustments along with their
operating times.
If the user tests equipment that does not exist in the register, it is possible and
necessary for the user to enter data such as: restriction current, lag compensation, tap
compensation and zero sequence elimination. Finally, in this tab the user can enter time,
current and angle.
In the “Slope definition” sub tab, the user defines between a single Slope (slope) or
several slopes and defines what the Idiff x Irest characteristic is through points in the
graph. If the user uses a relay already registered, this tab will show parameterization options
with the same name that appears in the relay parameterization software.
Displays the tab

for adjusting the
Differential
function.
Figure 740 – Diferenc – Adjustment Screen – General
In the figure are shown are the Adjustments dealing with the nominal data of the
protected equipment and the set of CTs that perform measurements for protection, as
previously mentioned.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of equipment Grounded No. of Windings

(Trans., Generator, Winding (Only (Transformer) or No. of
Engine, Line or Bar). No. of for Transf.). inputs and outputs (Bar
phases. and Line).
Voltage level.
Equipment
Winding
power. Vector or lag
connection
group
(Transf. only).
(Transformers
only).
Primary current
of the CTs. CT bank connection
(neutral point
Secondary closing side).
Current of the
CTs.
Figure 741 – Diferenc – Protect Equipment – Differential – Settings
In the figure are shown are the adjustments dealing with the nominal data of the
protective relay and adjustment that are part of the differential function, as previously
mentioned.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose between a Differential pickup Snapshot pickup and Current, time and
preset relay or user and time setting time setting (87-2). angle tolerance
mode (all (87-1). (Relative and
compensations are Absolute).
editable).
Choosing the
method of
calculating the
restraint current.
Parameterization
of the module
compensation.
Parameterizati
Enables or does not on of the
enable Zero angle
Sequence compensation.
compensation.
Figure 742 – Diferenc – Adjust Prot. Differential – Differential – Adjustment
In the figure is shown below the screen where they are entered are the data of the
differential characteristic (Irest x Idiff).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Definition of the Fixed slope If the user use the pre-setting, the
number of slopes (if value, if only 1 fields below will come according to
the user uses the user slope is used. the relay (number of slopes, specific
mode). names and etc)
Curve editing
Characteristic
Idiff x Irest.
Figure 743 – Diferenc – Adjust Prot. Differential – Differential – Slope Definition

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.9 Systems Tab
To appear this tab, click on the top Home tab and click on the Systems icon. To
maximize the visualization, double click on the created Zxt tab. After inserting the desired
characteristic, a diagram is shown in the Systems tab in which the relay is inserted. When
test points are inserted, the current flow is indicated.
Figure 744 – Diferenc – Maximized Systems Tab
33.10 Relay Details Tab (Diagram)

To display this tab, click on the top Home tab and click on the Relay icon to
maximize the view. Double-click on the Relay Details tab created. In this tab it is possible to
view the currents before and after the compensations, it also shows how these
compensations are made and already calculates the restraining current and the differential
current.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 745 – Diferenc – Relay Details tab
33.11 Graphics Tab
After inserting the desired characteristic, it is shown in the Graphic tab.
Figure 746 – Diferenc – Graphic Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Double clicking on the Graph tab maximizes this screen. In it, the user sees the
differential characteristic parameterized in the settings.
Figure 747 – Diferenc – Graphic tab maximized.
33.11.1Resources of the Graphics Tab

Maximizes the
Place a test point in graphics tab.
the desired position.
Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
test.
Shows or hides the
Shows or hides a scale on the X axis.
simpler, named scale
on the axes.
Show or hide the

scale on the Y axis.
Shows a grid for
easy viewing.
Figure 748 – Diferenc – Graph Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.12 Waveform Tab
Figure 749 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 750 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

Call the Phasor Tab. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Figure 751 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab – Resources - Display
33.13 Phasor Tab

inserted or edited in the test. The following screen is for a point Test set using Point Test (It
will be explained below).
Figure 752 – Diferenc – Phasor Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


related lag.

Figure for more
details.

shown on the graphs. Take a photo of the chart by Table and Dimensions.
Figure 753 – Diferenc – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
value, imaginary
value, lag,
instantaneous
and frequency
variation.
Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 754 – Diferenc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.14 Test Set

The first tab viewed on the Main Screen is the Configuration Test tab. This test is
done to confirm that the parameterization of the relay is in accordance with what we
expect. It is based on the reading of the currents measured on the display of the relay being
compared with the currents calculated by the software.
When clicking on the New Point button on the Insert / Edit Points tab, the
selections in the General Options field are active, where the user can select the type of
Data Entry:
 Short current;
 Winding currents;
 IDif and IRest.
The user can also define which winding the Source is in and, consequently, the Short.
Also in this tab, the user can insert one of points, or edit the inserted points, or even
remove them.
It is also possible to view the illustrative drawing of the system under test, details of
the Relay in the form of Diagram, Characteristic Curve, injected waveform and phasors.
On the left in the Main Screen, a table is shown with the Test set Points and the
current status of each one of them.
After inserting the test points, just click on generate, and the software automatically
tests all points.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 755 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set
The figure below shows how the insertion, partial / total removal and editing of test
points are done.
It is active when there are points

Copies a inserted for test in the points
selected point in table, tested allows you to change
the table. them.
Insert a new
point for test in
the table.
Insert a Sequence of points in
the table for the test.
Removes the
selected point
from the tested Removes all points from
points table. the test table.
Figure 756 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Insert / Edit Points
In the figure below, a test point was inserted in the configuration test, all fields are
detailed:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Configuration Test tab. Characteristic region Test result for each

where the point is point.
positioned.
Differential Current in Restraint Current for Current situation

each Winding. each winding. of the point.
Figure 757 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Test sets Points
The way in which data is entered for a test point of the type “Short currents” is
detailed below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose to enter the When clicking on the

Sequence button this area Selects the type
value of the Short of short circuit.
Circuit Current as the becomes active, here the
Short current user defines the limits to
data type for the Test. value must be> 0.
create a Sequence of
points to be tested.
Selects the Type

of fault.
Enables Load Windings 3 and 4 if
any. They are active when
windings have been selected on
the Parameters Screen. Confirms the Point or the Cancel point or
Sequence of Points entered. Sequence of points,
that is, do not insert
The user selects which winding is short and
in the Table of
which is the Source. Tested Points.
Figure 758 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – General options – Short current
The way in which data is entered for a test point of the type “Currents in windings” is
detailed below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choose to enter the values of the

Winding Currents for the
Configuration Test.
Cancel point or
sequence of points,
that is, do not insert
Confirms the Point in the Table of
or the Sequence of Tested Points.
Points entered.
User enters the Current User enters the Current

Amplitude and angle Amplitude and angle
values for each Phase values for each Phase
of the Winding 1. of Winding 2.
Figure 759 – Diferenc –General Options – Winding Current
Below is detailed the way in which data is entered for a test point of the type “Idiff
and Irest (differential current and restraint current)”.
Choose to enter the values of the User enters the value of

Differential and Constraint Selects the Type Restriction Current.
Currents, rather than letting the of fault.
software calculate them.
User enters the value
of the Differential
Current.
Enables Load and Windings 3 and 4 if any. They are active when
windings are selected on the Parameters Screen. Confirms the Point
or the Sequence of
Points entered.
The user selects which winding is
short and which is the Source.
Cancel point or sequence of points, that is, do not insert
in the Table of Tested Points.
Figure 760 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set –General Options – IDif and IRest

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Following figures below is shown the manner already described that the flaps mind
remained after inserting a test point of any type (short currents, currents in the windings or
differential current and constraint current).
Figure 761 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – System
Figure 762 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Relay Details (Diagram)

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 763 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Characteristic
Figure 764 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Set – Waveform

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 765 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test – Phasors
33.15 Point Test

This test aims to allow the user to define points in the relay's characteristic (Idiff x
Irest) and analyze its operation. For this Type of Test there is only one type of Data Entry:
IDif and IRest. Test points are inserted:
a) Clicking on the New Point button and then clicking on the region of the
graph where you want to test or:
b) Clicking on the New Point button and then typing the values of the currents
in the corresponding fields, and then clicking on Confirm

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 766 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test
For this test the Sequence button is disabled, it is only possible to insert points,
inserting them one by one all the points to be Test set. This test allows the user to test points
in the Operating and Non-Operating Regions of the relay characteristic. After entering the
test points, just click on generate, and the software automatically tests all points. In
the figure below is detailed all the items that appear in the Test set points table.
Restriction current value Point Location Region Expected response Current

at the inserted Point. on the Characteristic time. situation of the
Curve. point.
Number of Differential Test result for each Operating time

Points Current Value at point. found.
entered. the inserted point.
Figure 767 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test– Test set Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
points are done.
Edit selected
point.
Insert a new test
point.
Insert a sequence
of points.
Removes selected
point. Removes all
stitches.
Figure 768 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points
The way in which data is entered for a point in the point test is detailed below.
Field shows the value of the Point Restriction Current

Displays the nature Selects Type of inserted when clicking on the Characteristic Curve, or
of Data Entry. fault. can be filled in by the user.
Field shows the value of the Point

Differential Current inserted when
Confirms the clicking on the Characteristic Curve, or
inserted Point. can be filled in by the user.
Choice of source Cancels the test

and short location. point.
Figure 769 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test - General Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 770 – Diferenc – Main screen – Point Test – Characteristic
33.16 Search Test

The purpose of the search test is to find for each restriction current the value of the
operating current, exploring the relay's characteristic. For this test the user can enter a new
point or a sequence of points, the data input is the Restriction Current, and the software
calculates the expected rated Differential Current for each point, and searches (searches)
until the relay operates, the actual value of the Differential Current.
tests all points.
When selecting the tab of one of the tests, if any other tab contains test points, a
message requesting that the data of the other test be removed is shown to the user in the tab
of the intended test, as shown in the figure below:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 771 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test
Figure 772 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the Test set thread table are detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Current status of the

point.
Restriction Value calculated by the

Current Value, software for the
No. of Points. value informed by Differential Current.
the user.
When the software screen is not

maximized, the user can select which
of the data in the table he prefers to
view, for this example he is viewing
the theoretical data.
Figure 773 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
points are done.
It is active when there are points inserted

for Test, it allows to change them.
Insert a new point

for test.
Insert a Sequence of points
for the test.
Removes the
selected point from
the test point list.
Removes all points
from the Test.
Figure 774 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points
The way in which data is entered for a test point in the point test is detailed below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The user selects which

winding is at the
source and which one
is short.
Restraint current
reported by the user.
When you click on the Sequence

button, this area becomes active.
Here the user defines the beginning,
the end, the number of steps and the
number of points in a Sequence of
points for test.
Confirms
inserted
points.
Selects the Type
of fault. Cancels the insertion of the
point or the Sequence.
Figure 775 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – General Options
Figure 776 – Diferenc – Main screen – Search Test – Characteristic

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
33.17 Test Settings
In the Test Settings tab, the user directs the current and voltage generation channels
for each winding, being able to enable up to two pre-fault conditions.
It is also in this tab that the user defines the waiting time for entering the
Configuration Test data and the Tolerance multiples, the absolute and relative resolutions for
the Search Test, and the waiting and reset times for all tests.
The user can also direct Fault and Pre-fault situations to the Binary
and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition.
In this tab, the nominal working frequency and the phase sequence of the relay are
selected. Selections are also made for the Stop and Trigger interfaces, which, just like in the
other software CE-600X and CE-70XX, can be performed by one of the Binary
Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations.
The figure below shows the test settings tab. This screen will be divided into the
following figures to facilitate understanding.
Figure 777 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings
Below is shown how to designate the channels for each winding, and enabling two
pre-faults along with the mode, modules, angles and times.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Selects generation mode: Nominal,

Enables Pre-fault conditions.
Independent, or Three-Phase Balanced.
The user enters the amplitude and The user enters the amplitude and
Winding angle values of each channel for angle values of each channel for
identification. the Pre-fault 1 condition. the Pre-fault 2 condition..
Identifies each
phase of each
winding. The user selects which
generation channel to direct to Time of
each phase of each winding. each Pre-
fault.
Figure 778 – Diferenc – Main screen – Generation Channels Direc – Current
Below is shown the way to change the states of the binary outputs
and GOOSE outputs of the case in the fault and pre fault situations.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The user defines the generation time for

the Pre-fault cycles.
Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Binary Defines the states of the Binary
Binary Outputs and GOOSE Outputs and GOOSE Outputs Outputs and GOOSE Outputs
Outputs (when configured) (when configured) in the Fault (when configured) in the Pre-
in the Fault cycle. cycle. fault 2 cycle.
Figure 779 – Diferenc – Main screen – Pre-Fault Time and Binary Outputs and GOOSE
Below is shown the way to change the software interface stopping, starting interface
and access for use of logic in these two resources (stopping and starting).
Opens the Stopwatch

Logic Screen.
Sets the
Opens the
Selects whether Generation Trigger
Delay
the Generation Logic Screen. Time.
stop is Disabled
or will be made Selects whether the
by one of the Generation Trigger will be
Binary Inputs, or
via Software, or by any of
by a Logic.
the Binary Inputs, or by
Logic, any signal
Externo ou GPS.
Figure 780 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings – Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The following figure details general options for the configuration test, point test,
search test and other configurations.
Defines the waiting

Defines the multiple of time for entering
the Tolerance for the the Configuration
Configuration Test. Test data.
Operation Timeout.
After the theoretical
time has exceeded, the
suitcase continues to
generate for that time. Defines Absolute
Resolution for
Search Test.
Defines Relative
Operation Resolution for
Timeout. After Search Test.
the theoretical
time has
exceeded, the Reset time for all Tests.
suitcase continues
to generate for
that time.
Only this enabled

option causes the
software to perform
the generation and
measurement at the
same time, causing,
due to the processing
of the computer, any
generation time to be
exceeded for a short
time.
Before generating, the software processes

all the information that needs to be sent
to the suitcase, only to occur after
generation. This process takes more
memory from the computer.
Figure 781 – Diferenc – Main screen – Test Settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
RESTHARM
SOFTWARE FOR HARMONIC RESTRICTION
TESTS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
34 RestHarm – Software for Harmonic Restriction Tests

This software allows the user to perform tests with second (2nd), third (3rd) and
fifth (5th) order harmonic currents.
It is possible to carry out Point tests (test a triggered point and check its response
according to the region in which it is located, and compare the response time with the
expected time), Search Tests (Go through the Characteristic of the Restriction Region for the
Operation Region and captures the current value at which the relay operates)
and CrossBlock tests (Crossblock, when this function is enabled, the presence of harmonic
Current in at least one of the phases of the relay must restrict the operation in the other
phases).
The user can configure the tests specifying which generation channels are targeted
for each Phase, can also enable Fault conditions, and Pre-Fault conditions 1 and 2.
The software also allows you to direct the Fault, Pre-Fault 1, Pre-Fault 2 and Post-
Fault conditions to the Binary and GOOSE outputs.
is active, when starting the Distanc software, the Settings screen is active immediately, this
Figure 782 – RestHarm – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
34.2 Main screen
Figure 783 – RestHarm – Settings Screen
Harmonic Restrain fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.

The figure below shows in detail each function of the standard quick access toolbar.
The user can view the name of the software used, the version of the software, which
equipment is being used with its respective serial
number.
Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Minimize, Maximize
and serial
number.
Figure 784 – RestHarm – Quick Access Bar.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 785 – RestHarm – Resources General Button
34.5 Home Menu
Figure 786 – RestHarm – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Opens a Channel Opens a screen Starts the signal Pauses signal Move on to the
Orientation screen. for Hardware generation generation. next point.
Configuration. process.
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to the status
of Not
Tested.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
of Not
Connects between Tested.
Opens a screen
software and
for GPS Setup.
hardware.
Figure 787 – RestHarm – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms and phasors) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General
Settings). Access to the report, options for viewing the units involved (time and module) and

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to
Settings Waveform Phasor Tab. time in time in the standard
Screen. Tab. seconds. cycles. layout.
Enables /
disables tabs
Opens the report for viewing.
configuration
window.
Figure 788 – RestHarm – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
34.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
below or as a
document.
Figure 789 – RestHarm – View Menu – Windows and Layout

settings. current.
Figure 790 – RestHarm – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 791 – RestHarm – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Harmonic Restriction.
In Harmonic Restriction mode there is the Harmonic Restriction Adjustment tab. For
each harmonic (second, third or fifth order) Test set there is a sub- tab. In these sub-tabs the
user chooses in which reference the markings in the% Harm x Idiff graph (In or TAP) will
be made, edit the curve informing from which percentage of harmonic the relay does the
blocking. For CrossBlock it is possible to parameterize the blocking time and minimum
percentage for blocking for infinite time. It is necessary for the user to parameterize the
initial (87-1) and final (87-2) limits, as well as their operating times. Finally, the user has the
option of entering current and time tolerances.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows access to Inform tabs. General,

System, Notes & Obs., Explanatory
Figures, Check List, Others and
Connections.
Displays the tab

for adjusting the
Harmonic
Restriction
function.
Figure 792 – RestHarm – Adjustment Screen – General
In the figure below, the entire window where the parameterization of the harmonic
restriction test is performed is detailed. The user can see that what is done for the 2nd
harmonic is also repeated for the 3rd and 5th harmonic.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Choice of the reference Sub tab with the parameters Reference value, which
for marking on the of the harmonic that will be can be by In or TAP.
graph. In or TAP. tested.
Edit the curve

with% harm.
Crossblock
time and the%
harm value for
which the
block is
infinite (some
relays).
Initial value
(87-1) and
final value
(87-2) with
their
respective
times.
Relative and absolute tolerances
of current and time.
Figure 793 – RestHarm – Parameters Screen - Harmonic Restriction - Adjustment
34.9 Waveform Tab

In this tab the user visualizes the waveforms of the currents coming from the points
or lines chosen in the respective tests. Note in figure distortion sine go due to the generation
of harmonics.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 794 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 795 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab - Resources
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

Call the Phasor Tab. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Figure 796 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
34.10 Phasor Tab

In this screen it is possible to view for each channel the module and the current angle
value, as well as the Phasors graph.
Figure 797 – RestHarm – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

related lag.

details.

Figure 798 – RestHarm – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:
Enables or disables
the display of the
following values:
Module, angle,
actual value,
instantaneous
and frequency Enables or disables the
variation. display of the following
Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 799 – RestHarm – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
34.11 Point Test

This test aims to allow the user to define points in the harmonic characteristic of the
relay [(Ih / Iaplic. ) % X Iaplic (In)] and to analyze its operation.
The user clicks on New Point and clicks on the region in the harmonic characteristic
of the relay and then immediately clicks Confirm, automatically the values of Applied
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Current, percentage ratio between harmonic current and applied current and the angle of the
inserted point will be filled in the Currents or the user can enter each of these values in their
respective fields and the inserted point will be marked on the Characteristic graph.
After entering all the points he wants to test, the user must click on the Generate
button for the software to start the tests automatically.
Figure 800 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test
In the figure below it is detailed all the items that appear in the Test set points table.
Current situation of
Restraint current Location of the Performance time
the point in test.
value, percent point on the found.
harmonic at each Characteristic curve.
point.
Number of points Value of the applied current Test result. Expected

entered in the test. (in Ratio to the nominal). performance time.
Figure 801 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
points are done.
Edit selected
point.
Insert a new test
point.
Copy selected point.
Removes selected
point.
Removes all
stitches.
Figure 802 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points
Selects the harmonic Values calculated by the

order, it is only active software for the point
when the first Test point inserted in the
is inserted. Characteristic. The user
can also enter each of Fields enabled only for Search and
these values. CrossBlock Tests.
Confirm the point by Cancel point

writing it to the Tested without inserting
Selects if single phase fault it in the Table.
Points Table.
in which of the phases or if
three phase fault.
Figure 803 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – General Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 804 – RestHarm – Main screen – Point Test – Characteristic
34.12 Search Test

The purpose of the search test is to find for each applied current the percentage value
of the harmonic current by the applied current, exploring the harmonic characteristic of the
relay. For this test the user can enter a new point or a sequence of points, 2nd, 3rd or 5th
harmonic order (the order must be selected before the insertion of the first point
or sequence), and the software searches (searches), starting from the Restriction region until
the relay operates, the actual harmonic percentage value for each point.
tests all points.
message requesting that the data of the other test be removed will be shown to the user in the
tab of the intended test, as shown in the figure below:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 805 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test
In the figure below an overview of the search test is displayed, it will be detailed in
the following parts in order to facilitate the understanding.
Figure 806 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the Test set thread table are detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Theoretical percentage
value.
Number of Current situation

Tested of each point.
Points.
Current applied at Value found for

each point. each point.
Figure 807 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
points are done.
It is active when there are points inserted

for Test, it allows to change them.
Insert a new point
for test.
Insert a Sequence of points

for the Test.
Removes the
selected point from
the Test point list. Removes all points
from the Test.
Figure 808 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 809 – RestHarm – Main screen – Search Test – Characteristic
34.13 Crossblock Test

This test, also known as Cross Lock Test, aims to test the correct function of the
function of the same name in the Test set relay. When this function is enabled, the presence
of Harmonic Current in at least one of the phases of the relay must restrict the operation in
the other phases. For this test, the inserted points must be in the blocking region, above the
value of the initial Pickup. After inserting the test points, just click on the Generate button
and the software automatically performs the test of all points.
Figure 810 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the Crossblock test points table
are detailed.
Number of Tested
Points.
Current
situation of
each point.
Value of the applied
current.
Real time elapsed between the
start of the Generation and the
Percent harmonic restriction current calculated relay blocking action.
by the software for each point. Expected Lockout
Time.
Figure 811 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Test set Points
Na Figure abaixo é mostrado como é feita a inserção, remoção parcial/total e a

edição de pontos de Test:
Edit selected point.

Insert a new test
point. Copy selected point.
Removes selected
point. Removes all
stitches.
Figure 812 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Insert / Edit Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Detailed below is a man threshing and data entry is made to a point test in
test Crossblock.
Figure 813 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – General Options
Figure 814 – RestHarm – Main screen – Crossblock Test – Characteristic
34.14 Test Settings

In the Test Settings tab, the user directs the current generation channels for each
phase, being able to enable up to two pre-fault conditions, and enable the generation of
voltages.
It is also in this tab that the user defines the current multiples in the Phases without
Harmonic for the CrossBlock Test , the absolute and relative resolutions for the Search Test,
enabling whether there will be a new Search at each increment, and the waiting and reset

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
time for all tests. The user can also direct Fault, pre-fault and post-fault situations to the
Binary and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition.
In this tab, the nominal working frequency and the phase sequence of the relay are
selected. Selections are also made for the Stop and Trigger interfaces, which, just like in the
other software CE-600X and CE-70XX, can be performed by one of the Binary
Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations. In the figure below, all channel routing,
enabling two pre- faults and enabling a post fault is detailed. It also indicates the location
from which to set the time for each pre / post fault.
Enables Pre- Selects whether generation is independent,

Nominal or Three Phase Balanced.
fault conditions.
Cycle duration.
Lag angle between Selects whether there will be a post-fault cycle, and defines the
voltage and current in the voltage and current conditions for this cycle. Attention: The
pre / post fault. performance in the Post-Fault is only considered and analyzed in
the condition in which the fault currents are maintained, removing
only the Harmonics (Missing without Harm.).
Selects the current channel for
generating each phase. (The
connections of the CE-600X must
be made respecting this selection).
N these fields the user defines the modules and angles of the values that will be generated in each channel
for the Pre-fault cycles. (In case the mode is NOMINAL, that field is blocked).
Figure 815 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel
In the figure below is showing the process to change the state of binary outputs
and GOOSE each pre - fault cycle.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Defines the state of the Defines the state of the Defines the status of the Binary
Binary and GOOSE outputs Binary and GOOSE outputs and GOOSE Outputs for the
for the Pre-fault cycles. post-fault cycle.
for the Fault cycle.
Figure 816 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – Binary Outputs & GOOSE
Opens the
Stopwatch Logic
Screen.
Defines a delay
Selects whether the interfaces (trip and stop) will be between the
activated via change of state or voltage level at the Opens the Logic activation of the
trigger interface and
Binary Inputs, or will be by Logic, or disable the Shooting
the effective start of
Stop and enable the software trip. Screen. generation.
Figure 817 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings –Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, all the configurations and parameterizations inherent to the
specific search test and to the other tests are detailed.
Defines waiting times for

Defines the resolutions tests.
for the Search Test.
Disregard
Characteristic%
Harm x IDiff
Enables
resetting the
timer at each
search point.
Defines current
multiplier for generation Sets the reset
in phases without time for all Tests.
Harmonics for the
CrossBlock Test.
Figure 818 – RestHarm – Main screen – Test Settings – General Settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
DIRECPOT
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING DIRECTIONAL
POWER RELAYS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
35 DirecPot - Software for testing directional power relays

This software performs automatic tests on directional power relays, whether active,
reactive or apparent power. It allows the user to change the values of apparent power and
angle or active and reactive power to evaluate the perfect function of the function.
voltages and currents, and can also enable Pre-Simulation conditions 1 and 2 and a Post-
Simulation condition.
The tests performed are: Trigger Test, Search Test and Course Test. For all tests it is
possible to view the region of operation and non-operation. To facilitate visualization, this
region can be maximized.
The software allows you to control the test mode with constant voltage or constant
current.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting” (Software
Options menu), if it is active, when starting the DirecPot software the Settings screen is
Figure 819 – DirecPot – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 820 – DirecPot – Settings Screen
The options on the screen settings are described in detail in Chapter 21. The Field
Directional Power is will discussed throughout this chapter.

Creates a new test file. Opens a Saves the Customize the Name and
saved test. current test. Quick Access version of the
Bar. software.
Opens the options:

Restore, Move, Size, Model and
Minimize, Maximize serial number.
and Close.
Figure 821 – DirecPot – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

By clicking on the General Button or the File option, highlighted in the figure
below, options on how to create a new file, save, open, close, among others, which are the
main control actions, will appear in the upper left corner.
Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 822 – DirecPot – Resources General Button
35.4 Home Menu
Figure 823 – DirecPot – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
described hardware configurations of resources and generation of controls such as
in t cesium, stop, transition to next point / line, excluding one or all the Test set points.
Setup of sample value and goose

messages.
Clean the
spot
selected and
returns to
the status of
Not Tested.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
Connects between Opens a screen Setup of sample Go to the of Not
software and for GPS Setup. value and goose next line. Tested.
hardware. messages.
Figure 824 – DirecPot – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms and phasors) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options. Access to the
report, options for viewing the units involved (time and module) and general options for
restoring and viewing the layout are also displayed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Restore all Returns to
Settings Waveform Phasor time in time in graphics. the standard
Screen. Tab. Tab. seconds. cycles. layout.
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
report
configurati Shows values Shows
Shows the on based on the absolute Shows relative
Synchronism tab. window. primary. values. values.
Figure 825 – DirecPot – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
35.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 826 – DirecPot – View Menu – Windows and Layout

settings. current.
Figure 827 – DirecPot – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 828 – DirecPot – Adjustments button
There are two display modes: General and Directional Power.
and power for system 1 , there is also a tab for “Notes and Observations”. In the other tab
In the Directional Power mode there is the “Settings” tab. In it, the user
configures the pickup adjustment mode. Adjusts the relative and absolute tolerance
values for power time and angle. You can also limit a maximum or minimum value of
voltage and current together with the relative and absolute tolerances.
There is another tab called “Directional Power Elements” where the active power,
reactive power and apparent power elements are configured. For each element, the pickup
value, operating time and directionality must be configured for each element.
35.8 Settings Screen – Directional Power – Settings

The following figure defines the pickup adjustment mode (in absolute power values,
in relation to the nominal apparent power or in relation to an apparent power defined by the
user). It has power, angle and time tolerance adjustments in absolute or relative scales.
Another detail is the adjustment of minimum or maximum values for both voltage
and current. When these adjustments are active, the relative and absolute voltage and current
tolerances must be entered.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 829 – DirecPot – Settings
35.9 Settings Screen – Directional Power – Elements Power Directional
In this screen the user can register the elements of Active power, Reactive power and
Apparent power. It should If configure individual directionality each element , forward or
reverse, trip or trip the minimum to the maximum, the maximum torque angle or ATM such
as normal or reversed define a specific angle. You can configure the W0 factor to
compensate for measurement errors of the angle and finally define the positive and negative
angular lag in relation to the ATM.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 830 – DirecPot – Directional Power Elements
35.10 Graphics Tab

After entering the settings, these are shown in the Graphics tab.
Figure 831 – DirecPot – Graphic tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
By double-clicking on the Graph tab and clicking on the Maximize icon.
Figure 832 – DirecPot – Maximized Graph Tab
35.10.1 Resources of the Graphics Tab

Place a test point in

the desired position.
Enables / disables
Maximizes the the display of the
graphics tab. line in the Search
Test.
The origin is
centered within the
Zooms in or out for
graph tab.
easy viewing of the
test.
Shows a grid for
easy viewing.
Central axes are in
bold for greater
emphasis.
Figure 833 – DirecPot – Graphic Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
35.11 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each voltage or current channel for each
point / line or test path added. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and
instantaneous value verification. In this tab, the states of the Binary Outputs and Binary
Inputs are checked.
Figure 834 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 835 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

the Trajectory tab. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Figure 836 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
35.12 Phasor Tab

Figure 837 – DirecPot – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Allows 4 different sizes Allows you to choose

for visualization of between the time-
related lag.

Figure for more
details.

Figure 838 – DirecPot – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variation.

Minimum, maximum or
Figure 839 – DirecPot – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
35.13 Trajectories tab

With the points / test lines created can view the trajectories impedance.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 840 – DirecPot – Trajectories tab

It allows 4 different sizes It allows the visualization

for visualization of the of values in module, angle,
graphs. real value and imaginary
value.
Opens the Assign

which values will be of the graph: Title,
shown on the graphs. Legend, Scale, Grid,
Table and
Dimensions.
You can either insert Take a photo of the

or edit comments to chart by storing it on the
the chart. clipboard.
Figure 841 – DirecPot – Trajectories tab - Resources
35.14 Shooting
This test aims to allow the user to test whether the operation occurs for a given
power or not. When in a region of operation it must operate within a predicted time plus the
tolerances.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 842 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting
The previous figure shows the result of a Shooting. For a better explanation of this
For each test set point the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the
Shows the Shows the Shows Shows the Shows Operating Voltage
phases power the reference whether the time. and
involved in values. power element. point acted current
the Test and factor. or not. values.
the angle of
the System.
Figure 843 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Options
For example leaving only the s options "Performance" and "Time" of the previous
figure selected the following data are shown.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test point Expected Effective Theoreti Time found. Final result.

number. answer. response cal time.
.
Figure 844 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Test set Points
points are done.
Edit a point
already tested.
Creates a
new point
for test.
Creates a
Sequence of
points.
Removes the
selected
point.
Removes all
tested points
Figure 845 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Insert / Edit Points
When the user clicks "New Point" settings d the type of test, apparent power, angle,
capacitive or inductive load, power factor, active power, reactive power, current, voltage and
angle system are requested.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test type, three-phase or Apparent power

single-phase. angle.
Apparent Power
Power. factor.
Reactive
Load Power.
type.
Voltage
value.
Active
Power. System angle.
Current value. Confirm the point for the test. Cancel the point for the Test.
Figure 846 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – New Point
When clicking on “Sequence” the user sets the following values.
Test type, three-phase or single-

phase.
Apparent, initial, final and Angle, start, end and

step power values. step values.
Figure 847 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – Sequence
The following figure shows the graph with the points already inserted. The moment
they are Test set they turn green if they pass or red if they fail.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 848 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting – Graph
Next illustration is shown and the meaning of subtitle display mode of the graph.
Colors representing
status of points:
Test points and Orange: Not Tested;
untested icons. Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Power values of the

selected point.
Graph display mode.
Figure 849 – DirecPot – Main screen – Shooting –Legend
35.15 Search Test

The purpose of the search test is to find the border between the region of non-
operation and operation. For this test the user can enter a line or a sequence of lines,
the s entry s data values are power start and end.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 850 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test
When Shows Shows the Shows the Shows the real Shows the
enabled as whether the apparent reference time when the voltage and
Line it test is three- power element for relay is current values
shows the phase or values and the test. activated. found at the
initial and single- their angle edge of the
final power phase. and the operating
values. active and region.
reactive
power.
Figure 851 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test– Options
For example leaving only the s options "General Info" and "Power" of the previous
figure selected the following data are shown:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test point Test Type: Apparent power Active and Final test
number. three-phase or value and its found Reactive power result.
single-phase. angle. value found.
Figure 852 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
points are done.
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a
sequence of
lines.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
added lines.
Figure 853 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines
When the user clicks on “New Line”, the settings of the test type, apparent power,
angle, active power, reactive power, current and voltage of the start and end points are
requested.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test Type: three-phase or

single-phase.
Initial values of apparent power

and angle, active and reactive
power, current and voltage.
Final values of apparent power and angle, active Confirm the line Cancel the line
and reactive power, current and voltage. for the test. for the test.
Figure 854 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – General Options
When clicking on "Sequence" the user defines the line variable and creates a
sequence of lines according to the chosen definition.
Test Type: three-phase, Number of lines

single-phase or both. created
automatically.
Line type: apparent,

active or reactive power. Initial, final value and
step. The variable will
depend on the
Initial and final value of the line. definition of the line.
Confirm the Sequence. Cancels the Sequence.
Figure 855 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence
moment they are Test set they become green points if they pass or red points if they fail.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 856 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Graph
The following figure details the meaning of the legend and how to view the graph.
Colors representing status of

Icons of the search points:
lines as well as the Orange: Not Tested;
points not tested and Green: Approved;
already found. Red: Failed.
Values of apparent power

and its angle or of the active
and reactive power of the
point of intersection.
Graph display mode.
Figure 857 – DirecPot – Main screen – Search Test – Legend
35.16 Route
This test aims to allow the user to test whether the operation occurs when both the
voltage and the current vary.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 858 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route
The previous figure shows the result of a route test. To facilitate the understanding,
Type: Course Shows the Start and Step Size Reference If Total
or Group. type and end and Time of element. operation time of
When in the mode of points of Duration of has the
Group omits the test. the Power occurred. power
the last 3 powers. Variation. variation.
options.
Figure 859 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route– Options
The figure below details the items when the options “Step” and “Duration” are
selected.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Line number of Variable used: Step value Step time Total time of Final test
the route tested. apparent power, angle, used. used. the power result.
active or reactive variation.
power.
Figure 860 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Test set Points
The figure below shows how the insertion, partial / total removal and the editing of
test path lines are carried out.
Edit a line that has

already been
tested. Creates a new
line.
Creates a line
group.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
tested lines.
Figure 861 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Insert / Edit Lines
When the user clicks on “New Line” the settings of the fields shown in the following
figure are available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Three-phase or Apparent power and Route by: Step or Greatness

single-phase test. angle or active and Damped. type:
reactive power. apparent,
angle,
active or
reactive.
Start and
end points
of the Step size
power of and time.
the
created
route.
Total
travel
time.
Confirms the route. Cancel the route.
Figure 862 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – General Options
In the next figure, the light region represents a non-operating region and the dark
region the operating region since the operating time has been exceeded.
Figure 863 – DirecPot – Main screen –Route – Graph

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The following figure details the legend along with the graph display.
Colors representing line

Dotted line not yet status:
tested. Continuous line Blue: Not Tested;
already tested. Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Values of apparent
power, angle, active
power and Reactive Graph display mode.
Power.
Figure 864 – DirecPot – Main screen – Route – Legend
35.17 Test Settings

enabling up to two pre-simulation conditions and one post-simulation condition. It is also in
this tab that the user defines the amplitude and angle values of the pre-simulation and post-
simulation situations and the duration of each one.
It is possible to choose between two methods, constant voltage or constant
current. For the search test, the values of the current tolerances are relative or absolute,
the maximum waiting time in the non-operating region, the over-waiting time in the
operating region and the reset time are adjusted.
In this window, the user defines the Binary Inputs (actuation interfaces). Another
option is to adjust the simulation, pre-simulation and post-simulation situations for the
Binary and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition. Selections are also made for the
Stop and Trigger interfaces, which, just like in other software, can be performed by one of
the Binary Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 865 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings
A greater detail of the previous figure is shown below. The figure below shows how
to insert pre and post fault conditions, in addition to adjusting the voltage and current
channels.
Enables pre-simulation 1 and 2

and post-simulation conditions.
It associates the Module and angle values of Module and angle values
voltage and current each channel for pre- of each channel for post-
generation channels. simulation condition - 1 and simulation condition.
2.
Figure 866 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel – Pre -
Simulation and Post -Simulation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The figure below shows how to insert the pre and post fault timings and also how to
change the status of the binary and GOOSE outputs (if configured) .
The user defines the generation time for the

Pre-Simulation and Post-Simulation cycles.
Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Defines the states of the
Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and
GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when
configured) in the configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Post-
Simulation cycle. Simulation 1 cycle. Simulation cycle 2. Simulation cycle.
Figure 867 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and Binary
and GOOSE Outputs
The following shows where to set the voltage or constant current test mode, as well
as the polarity of the potential transformers and current transformers.
Test Mode: Voltage or

current and the
magnitude value.
Ratio of displacement potential

transformers divided by phase.
Ratio of phase current transformers

divided by phase.
Invert the Polarities of the phase
and displacement potential
transformers.
Invert the Polarities of the phase
and ground current transformers.
Figure 868 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Test Mode
In the figure below, specific settings of the search test and the general reset time are
detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Search Test for: Absolute and relative current Waiting time when the point
minimum resolution or resolution. is inserted in a non-
tolerance. operating region.
Additional waiting
time when the point
is inserted in an
operating region.
Reset time with each

increment.
Generation Methods of
attempts in case generations of test
of error. set.
Figure 869 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test
In the figure below, the direction of the interfaces and the software stop/
start interface are detailed.
Directional Power Test set interface Initial state of the

element. connected to the relay relay output: NO or
output. NC.
Mode of triggering the

Logic for triggering
Test set by: Software,
the case. Intentional
Logic, Binary and
GPS. triggering delay.
Figure 870 – DirecPot – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
DISTANC
SOFTWARE FOR TESTINGS DISTANCE
RELAY

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
36 Distanc - Software for testing distance relays

This software performs automatic tests on distance relays. A variety of predefined
distance relay models have been registered in the software with their zone characteristics ,
allowing the user greater facilities for entering test data. However, if the relay is not
registered, the feature of the zone can be drawn easily.
voltages and currents, and can also enable Pre-Fault conditions 1 and 2 and a Post-Fault
condition.
The tests performed are: Point Test and Search Test. For all tests, it is possible to
view the characteristic zone. The software also allows you to direct the Pre-Fault 1, Pre-
Fault 2 and Post-Fault pulse conditions to the Binary and GOOSE outputs.
This software has the feature "Open Settings at Start” (menu Software Options), if it
is active, when you start the software Distanc at her settings becomes active immediately,
this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests is Important to specify
the parameters related to the test.
Figure 871 – Distanc – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 872 – Distanc – Settings Screen
The Distance, Import and Export fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.


Bar.
Software name and

version.
Opens the options:

Restore, Move,
Size, Minimize, Equipment used
Maximize and and serial
Close. number.
Figure 873 – Distanc – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 874 – Distanc – Resources General Button
36.4 Home Menu
Figure 875 – Distanc – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
process.
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to Untested
status.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
Connects between Opens a screen Go to the Go to the next of Not
software and for GPS Setup. next line. Type of fault. Tested.
hardware.
Figure 876 – Distanc – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms, phasors, impedance trajectory and Zxt graph) are displayed, as well as the
adjustment options (General and Differential Settings). Access to the report is also
displayed, options for viewing the units involved (time and module) and general options for
restoring and viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Settings Waveform Phasor Zxt Tab. time in time in the standard
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
report
Shows the Special configurati
settings for Shows values Shows
Trajectory on
SEL relays. based on the absolute Shows relative
tab. window. values.
primary. values.
Figure 877 – Distanc – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
36.5 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 878 – Distanc – View Menu – Windows and Layout

simulation mode (offline generation , without voltage and current), allow the opening of the
settings. current.
Figure 879 – Distanc – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 880 – Distanc – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Distance.
In mode General 's tab General Information , where the user enters all of for the test,
the dispositive state and responsible by t this, there is the flap systems , where the user enters
the nominal values of frequency, voltage, current and power, among others , there is a tab
for Notes and Observations for various records.
set.
Current.
To facilitate the adjustment of the zones, there is an Import option whose purpose is
format. Importing this file automatically reads the Distanc of so that the user does not need
to manually adjust it. Another option would be to export a file .RIO once the feature was
enable the option to Remove Arc Resistance.
If the relay does not generate a file .RIO there is the option to design the zone to be
Test set or to choose between predefined zones. Depending on the type of zone chosen,
options for load compensation and directionality are opened.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Connections.
Displays the tab

for adjusting the
Distance
function.
Import
Files
.RIO
Export
Files
.RIO
Figure 881 – Distanc – Adjustment Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
already inserted. already been inserted.
new zone. the chosen zone.
Figure 882 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 883 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 886 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert –
Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 887 – Distanc – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert –
Quadrilateral Zone
36.8 Graphics Tab
After inserting all the desired zones, these are shown in the Graphics tab.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 888 – Distanc – Graph Tab
Figure 889 – Distanc – Maximized Graph Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Place a test point in Maximizes the

the desired position. graphics tab.
Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
test. The origin is
centered within the
graph tab.
Shows the resistance
and reactance values
on the x and y axes. Shows a grid for
easy viewing.
The line impedance is
shown in the graph to
facilitate the analysis.
Central axes are in
bold for greater
Hides tolerances from emphasis.
protection zones.
Figure 890 – Distanc – Graph Tab - Resources
36.9 Zxt Tab

To appear this tab, click on the top Home tab and click on the Zxt Graph icon. To
maximize the visualization, double click on the created Zxt tab. To view this tab, you must
perform a dot test or, as in the following figure, a search test.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 891 – Distanc – Graph Tab
36.9.1 Resources of the Zxt Tab

Zooms in or out for easy viewing Increases or decreases

of the test. the number of values
shown on the scales.
Enables / disables values to

be shown in X.
Enables / disables
Shows the grid to facilitate values to be shown in
the visualization of values. Y.
Figure 892 – Distanc – Zxt Tab – Resources

With the introduced areas and points / test lines created can represent path
impedance, so that, if the user performs the addition of buffer zones in the settings, you can
view the trajectory of these set sequences in a region of lack.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 893 – Distanc – Trajectories tab

It allows 4 different sizes It allows the visualization

for visualization of the of values in module, angle,
graphs. real value and imaginary
value.
Opens the Assign Signals

window where the user It allows changing the
determines which values following parameters
will be shown on the of the graph: Title,
graphs.
Table and
Dimensions.
You can either insert or Take a photo of the

edit comments to the chart by storing it on the
chart. clipboard.
Figure 894 – Distanc – Trajectories tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
36.11 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each channel for each test point / line
added. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value verification.
Figure 895 – Distanc – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 896 – Distanc – Waveform Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

Call the Phasor Tab or the frequency of the
the Trajectories tab. analog signals.
Figure 897 – Distanc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
36.12 Phasor Tab

inserted or edited in the test. The following screen is for a line Test set using Point Test.
Figure 898 – Distanc – Phasor Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


of graphs. related or channel-
related lag.

details.

Figure 899 – Distanc – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variations.

Minimum, maximum or
Amplitude and the
RMS value in the
period.
Figure 900 – Distanc – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
36.13 Point Test

This test is intended to allow the user to define points impedance d come in or out of
a zone of protection and determine whether it occurs or not acting. The test points are
inserted in two ways:
a) Click on the New Point button ; then pick up the type of fault, click If on
the chart area where you want to test and generate
commands or:
b) Click on the New Point button; then enter the values of the module or
angle in the corresponding fields. This is if the Data Entry is selected Z and
θ. Otherwise, the resistance and impedance values are entered. The next
step is to confirm the point and generate the signals
Figure 901 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test
The solid lines of the zones in the graph represent the limit of each zone given by its
nominal value. The dotted lines represent the transition region from one zone to
another considering the tolerance given by the manufacturer.
For this test the Sequence button is disabled, it is only possible to insert points,
inserting them one by one all the points to be Test set.
This test allows the user to test points in the Operating and Non-Operating Regions
of the relay characteristic.
tests all points.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
For each point the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the
Shows the Shows the Impedance related

Shows which to the line or zones according
resistance and
zone the point to the user’s default.
reactance value of
belongs to.
the tested point.
Shows the Impedance

Displays the Shows the voltage and
value, being its user’s current values that
module and angle. adjustment time were generated to
and the actual obtain the Impedance
actuation time. required by the user.
Figure 902 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test –Test set Points Options
In the figure below it is detailed all the items that appear in the Test set points table.
Inserted point Zone to which the

number. point belongs.
Type of fault chosen.
Test result Time set in Performance time

Current situation
for each the relay. found in the test.
of the point.
point.
Figure 903 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test– Test set Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
points are done.
Edit selected
point.
Insert a new test
point.
Insert a sequence of
points.
Removes selected
point. Removes all
stitches.
Figure 904 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test – Insert / Edit Points
If enabled, the Choose how to enter The Impedance

tested point has the data: module and given in
the same angle angle or resistance percentage
as the line. and reactance. relative to the line
or the zone.
Module Resistance and Confirm the point for

values and reactance the test.
angle of the values of the Cancel the point for
tested point. tested point. the Test.
Figure 905 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test - General Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 906 – Distanc – Main screen – Point Test –Graph
36.14 Search Test

The purpose of the search test is to find the edge of the region of operation of any
zone. For this test the user can enter a line or a sequence of lines, the input is the impedance,
and the software calculates for each line the transition region from one zone to another.
After inserting a new test line and choose the type of fault, just click generate and
test software to the s automatically lines.
message requesting that the data of the other test be removed will be shown to the user in the
tab of the intended test, as shown in the figure below:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 907 – Distanc – Main screen – Remove Points
This test aims to find the border between one zone and another. Test points are
entered in two ways:
a) Click on the button New Line; then choose the type of fault, click on the
region of the graph choosing a starting point and ending point, a line is
automatically created between the points.
b) b) Click on the button New Line; then enter the values of the module or
angle in the corresponding fields. This is if Data Entry is selected Z and
θ. Otherwise, the resistance and impedance values are entered. The next
step is to insert the module and Angle of the length.
The figure below shows some points already found and some lines of research that
have not yet been Test set.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 908 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the test set thread table are detailed.
Nominal
impedance Impedance
Zone
module and module and angle
Number of the boundary.
angle. used in the test.
tested point.
Figure 909 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
points are done.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Edit a line that has already

been inserted.
Insert a new line
Insert a for test.
Sequence of
lines for test.
Removes the last
inserted line.
Removes all
inserted lines.
Figure 910 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Points
The Impedance The total length given

Choose how to in percent relative to
of origin given
enter the data: the line or the zone.
If enabled, the tested in percentage
module and angle Otherwise, value in
point has the same angle relative to the
or resistance and Ω.
as the line. line or the
reactance.
zone.
Module Resistance and Confirm /

values and reactance values of Cancel the Initial, final angle and the
angle of the tested point.
the tested
point for the step for creating Sequence
point. test. of lines.
Search: Finds the transition
of zones without considering Check: Find the zone transition
tolerances
considering the tolerances. (dotted
(linha cheia).
line).
Figure 911 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – General Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 912 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test – Graph
36.15 Test Settings

enabling up to two pre-fault conditions and one post-fault condition.
It is also on this tab which the user sets the amplitude and angle of the situations pre-
fault and post-fault and the duration of each. You can adjust the relationship between ground
and phase CTs, displacement and phase CTs as well as their polarities. For the search test it
adjusts the absolute and relative resolutions, reset time and under waiting time.
In this tab, the user adjusts the pickup generation limits by adjusting the maximum
current generation values for each channel, minimum voltage value, minimum current,
minimum displacement voltage, minimum earth current and
minimum negative sequence current. You can adjust the way the test will be carried out:
intelligent, constant current, constant voltage and constant source impedance.
Another option is to adjust Fault and Pre-fault situations for the Binary
and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition. Selections are also made for the Stop
and Trigger interfaces, which, just like in other CTC software, can be performed by one of
the Binary Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations. Finally, there is the situation of the
angle for the start of the fault as: Random, Maximum or Minimum Off set and Fixed angle.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 913 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings
The top screen will be divided into several parts for easy viewing. The designation of
each channel and the insertion of pre / post faults are detailed in the figure below.
Enables the voltage Selects generation

and current generation Enables the Pre- mode: Nominal,
channels with each fault and post-fault Independent or
phase. conditions. Three Phase
Balanced.
Vdelta = displacement Module and angle values of

Module and angle values for
voltage // IE = Neutral each channel for post-fault
each channel for Pre-fault
current // IE Comp Pll = earth condition.
condition 1 and 2.
current for parallel line
compensation.
Figure 914 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channel

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the Figure below, the fields dealing with relations between earth and phase of TPs
and CTs, inversion of TPs and phase and ground CTs and the choice of the start of the
timing are detailed.
Potential transformation ratio

between displacement voltage and
phase.
Current transformation
ratio between earth current
and phase current.
Enables Polarities of the phase
and / or offset TPs connected
inverted.
Enables reversed
connected phase and / or
earth CT polarities.
Figure 915 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Relationship between CTs and TPs - Polarities of
CTs and TPs
In the figure below, the fields dealing with the relationship between earth and phase
of TPs and CTs, inversion of TPs and phase and ground CTs and the choice of the start of
the timing are detailed.
Enables the pre-fault

current and voltage values The user defines the generation time
for the phases where there for the Pre-fault and Post-Fault cycles.
are no faults.
Defines the states of Defines the states of Defines the states of Defines the states of
the Binary Outputs the Binary Outputs and the Binary Outputs and the Binary Outputs and
and GOOSE Outputs GOOSE Outputs GOOSE Outputs GOOSE Outputs
(when configured) in (when configured) in (when configured) in (when configured) in
the Fault cycle. the Pre-fault1 cycle. the Pre-fault2 cycle. the Post-Fault cycle.
Figure 916 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Fault, Post-Fault Time and Binary
and GOOSE Outputs
The test mode and the characteristics of each mode are detailed in the figure below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Maximum value Minimum voltage Minimum current value at the

of current value at the time of time of the fault. If it is less,
generated per the fault. If it is less, an error signal is shown on the
channel at the an error signal is screen. And the test is not
time of the fault. shown on the screen. performed.
Maximu
m
multiple
of the
voltage
used in
the fault.
Way to perform the

Minimum Test: Intelligent,
Minimum Minimum negative Constant Current,
displacement earth current Sequence current Constant Voltage or
voltage at the time at the time of at the time of the Constant Source
of the fault. the fault. fault. Impedance.
Figure 917 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Pickup Generation Limits - Test Mode
In the figure below, all the specific configurations of the search test and other tests
are detailed.
Sets absolute resolution for Search Test.
Defines relative resolution for Search Test.
Multiple of the tolerance to

determine the checkpoint.
Time to start a new test.
Extra time for waiting for

performance.
Figure 918 – Distanc – Main screen – Search Test
Below is shown the way to change the software interface stopping, starting interface,
access to the use of logic in these two resources (stopping and starting) and the manner of
early faults.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Configures whether the Shows the logic for Defines generation

generation stop is disabled, stopping the generation. trigger delay time.
whether it will be done Which outputs are
through one of the binary involved and the type of
outputs or through logic.
logic: AND // OR.
Configures whether the Shows the logic for Selects the fault start mode:
generation trigger triggering the generation. Random, Maximum off Set,
through: Software, Logic, Which outputs are Minimum Off Set and Fixed
Binary Output, GPS or involved and the type of Angle.
external signal. logic: AND // OR.
Figure 919 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Interface –Fault Start
The figure below details all possible ways of generating voltage and current that the
equipment provides through the software.
Checks whether tripping occurs during

a two-phase fault due to the healthy
phase entering the operating region
before the missing phases.
Some relays have algorithms that, due

to certain Pre-fault and fault
conditions, end up accelerating the
trip.
When enabled, there is no

measurement / correction of the
generated signal.
When enabled, the software performs

a waveform buffer and then
reproduces it completely faithfully.
Figure 920 – Distanc – Main screen – Test Settings – Advanced Parameters

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
PSB_OoS
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING DISTANCE
RELAYS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37 PSB_OoS - Software for testing distance relays

This software performs automatic testing of distance relays s functions is
the will Power Swing (PSB) or Out-of-Step (OOS). It allows the user to create his power
fluctuation together with fault situations. This allows the Trip of the distance
function, the Trip of the Out-of-Step function and the alarm of the Power swing to be
evaluated. The first test called System Simulation is done through an equivalent system
given by two sources and a line, admit going two situations swings:
The first is Synchronous Oscillations where the sliding angle between the two
sources does not exceed 180°, that is, the frequency of the system varies, but ends up
returning to the nominal value. In this situation, it is expected that a blocking of the distance
relay will occur.
The second would be Asynchronous Oscillations where the angle exceeds 180 °, that
is, there is a loss of synchronism. This situation is expected to trip the Out-of-Set function.
The second test is the Trajectory Simulations where the user defines initial
impedance and creates a trajectory defining an impedance variation
with time. Different trajectories can be created in the same test.
For both tests, it is possible to configure which generation channels are directed to
reproduce the voltages and currents, it also allows enabling Pre-Simulation conditions 1 and
2 and a Post-Simulation condition. One can specify which binary inputs are
responsible will batch the alarm power swing, the Trip distance function and Trip the
function of Out-of-Step.
This software has the feature “Opens Settings when Starting”(Software
Options menu) , if it is active, when starting the Power
Swing and OutOfStep software, the Settings screen is active immediately, this feature is
interesting since, before starting tests it is Important to specify the parameters related to the
test.
Figure 921 – PSB_OoS Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.2 Screen Initial
Figure 922 – PSB_OoS – Main screen
Distance, Import and Export fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.

test file. test. current test. Quick Access version.
Bar.
Opens the
Restore,
and serial
Move, Size,
Minimize, number.
Maximize
and Close.
Figure 923 – PSB_OoS – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 924 – PSB_OoS – Resources General Button
37.5 Home Menu
Figure 925 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to Untested
status.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
Connects between Opens a screen for Go to the of Not
software and GPS Setup. next group. Tested.
hardware.
Figure 926 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms, phasors and impedance trajectories) are displayed, as well as the adjustment
options ( General and Differential Settings ). Access to the report is also displayed, options
for viewing the units involved (time and module) and general options for restoring and
viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to
Settings Waveform Phasor time in time in the standard
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
report
Shows the configurati Shows values Shows
Trajectory on based on the absolute Shows relative
tab. window. primary. values.
values.
Figure 927 – PSB_OoS – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
37.6 View Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Position the Superimposes the Hide the windows Returns to Enables /

selected window. the standard
selected window: for better viewing. disables tabs
layout.
on the left; to the for viewing.
right, above,
below or as a
document.
Figure 928 – PSB_OoS – View Menu – Windows and Layout

simulation mode ( offline generation , without voltage and current), allow the opening of the
settings. current.
Figure 929 – PSB_OoS – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 930 – PSB_OoS – Adjustments button
Current.
To facilitate the adjustment of the zones, there is an Import option whose purpose is
to read .RIO files. Some distance relays record line, zone and operating time settings in this
format. Importing this file, Distanc reads automatically so that the user does not need to
adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a .RIO file once the feature has been
enable the option to Remove Arc Resistance.
If the relay does not generate a .RIO file, there is the option to design the zone to be
Test set or to choose between predefined zones. Depending on the type of zone chosen,
options for load compensation and directionality are opened.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Connections.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
Distance
function.
Import
Files
.RIO
Export
Files
.RIO
Figure 931 – PSB_OoS – Adjustment Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
Insert a Edit a zone Deletes a zone that Shows the design of

new zone. already inserted. has already been the chosen zone.
inserted.
Figure 932 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 933 – PSB_OoS – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert –
Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.
Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
Zone
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Zone Quadrilateral

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.9 System Tab
Figure 938 – PSB_OoS – System
37.9.1 System / System Tab

Double clicking on the System tab makes viewing easier. In this window, you must
adjust the voltage values for each source, choose the method of characterizing the
sources. Finally, the line impedance value is set together with the earth factor (only available
when the Enable fault option is checked).
Figure 939 – PSB_OoS – System – System

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.9.2 System Tab / Fault

Enables single- Disable / enable

phase, two-phase or DC component.
three-phase fault
Fault location. “0”

In which of the 3 being the beginning
lines does the and “1” the end of
the line.
fault occur.
Choose between:
Fault starts
Fixed, Maximum, between 0 and
Minimum or 360 °.
Random.
Fault Angle.
Reference phase
for the fault.
Resistance at the Simulation

time of the fault. extra time.
Figure 940 – PSB_OoS – System – Fault
37.9.3 System Tab / Evaluation

To appear this tab, click on the Evaluation option. Below is a breakdown of each
field on this tab.
There is a Choose the

choice between interface to
the occurrences evaluate.
or not of the
stop interface.
Opening
moment to
Enables / count the
disables Time time.
Evaluation.
Tolerances
given by the
Expected time manufacture
for r of the
relay.
performance.
Figure 941 – PSB_OoS – System – Fault

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.9.4 System Tab / Relay Location in the System

By clicking on the Relay Location option in the System, you can choose which side
the relay is positioned on.
Figure 942 – PSB_OoS – System – Location of the Relay in the System
37.10 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each channel for each oscillation / test
path added. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value
verification.
Figure 943 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

By right-clicking on the previous tab, the following features are available.


Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
Allows you to COMTRADE or CSV
Insert or Edit either file from the waveforms.
Markings or Take a photo of the chart
Comments in by storing it on the
Figure 944 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab - Resources
options:


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

Figure 945 – PSB_OoS – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
37.11 Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 946 – PSB_OoS – Phasor Tab

Allows 4 different sizes Allows you to choose

for visualization of between the time-
related lag.
Figure for more
details.

Figure 947 – PSB_OoS – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variation.

Minimum, maximum or
Figure 948 – PSB_OoS – Resources – Show Columns

With the zones introduced and the test oscillations created, we can represent an
impedance path, so that, if the user adds protection zones in the Settings, it is possible to
visualize the path of this set of sequences in a fault region.
Figure 949 – PSB_OoS – Trajectories tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
It allows 4 different It allows the visualization

sizes for visualization of values in module, angle,
of the graphs. real value and imaginary
value.
Opens the Assign

the user determines following parameters of
which values will be the graph: Title,
shown on the graphs. Legend, Scale, Grid,
Table and Dimensions.
You can either insert or Take a photo of the chart

edit comments to the by storing it on the
chart. clipboard.
Figure 950 – PSB_OoS – Trajectories tab - Resources
37.12.2
37.13 System Simulation Test
This test aims to allow the user to create power fluctuations and thus test situations
where there is a Power swing, the distance function or the Out-of-Step function . To start a
test, follow these steps:
Click on the “New Oscillation” button; then choose the type of oscillation:
"Synchronous" or "Asynchronous".
a. Synchronous: In this case, a slip angle value greater than -180° and less
than 180° must be defined, the duration time, the data from the two
sources, the evaluations of whether a function will act and how long,
finally the location of the relay in the system must be adjusted. NOTE: In
synchronous oscillation, it is not allowed to insert a fault.
b. Asynchronous: In this situation, the number of turns, the sliding
frequency, the data from the two sources, the evaluations of whether a
function is going to act and how long, must finally be set, the location of
the relay in the system must finally be adjusted. A fault can be inserted
together with the oscillation.
37.13.1 Synchronous Type System Simulation Test

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 951 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation Test
The previous figure shows the result of a System Simulation test. To facilitate the
understanding, each adjustment of this test will be shown in detail in the following figures.
For each point the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the table
according to the figure below.
When enabled, it When enabled, it shows in the When enabled, it displays

shows the Type and Test result the Interface, the the Time Reference,
Time of the Oscillation Nominal Performance and Nominal Time and Real
in the Test result. whether it actually acted or not. Time.
Figure 952 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Options Oscillations Test set
In the figure below it is detailed all the items that appear in the table of simulations in
the test set system.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test Oscillation Oscillation Acting Performanc Final performance of

interface. the Test and
point chosen. duration. e expected
conclusion of the
number. by the Test. Test.
Figure 953 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation– Result Test set Oscillations
points are done.
Edit an
already tested
oscillation.
Creates a
new
oscillation.
Creates a
sequence of
oscillations. Removes the
selected
Removes all oscillation.
tested
oscillations.
Figure 954 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Oscillations
The following screens show the settings when the user chooses the option "New
Oscillation" and "Type of Oscillation" Synchronous.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the oscillation to It provides the fault

be tested: Synchronous option for asynchronous
or Asynchronous. oscillation.
If enabled, it
defines the
module and
disb angle of the
electrical center.
Difference
between
the angles If enabled, it
of the two limits the
Current value.
sources.
Oscillation
time.
Confirm Test Cancel test
point. point.
Figure 955 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation - General Options - Synchronous
37.13.2 Asynchronous System Simulation Test

The following screens show the settings when the user chooses the "New Range" and
"Type Oscillation" Asynchronous.
Allows you to choose the Defines the type of If enabled, it allows If enabled, it
Oscillation duration. Whether oscillation. Being inserting fault in the defines the module
by number of spins or by time. Synchronous or asynchronous and angle of the
oscillation. electrical center.
Asynchronous.
The number
of times the
angle varies
from 0 ° to
360 °.
If enabled, it
Time in limits the
seconds of current value
the in the test.
oscillation.
Sliding When enabled, the slip is due

frequency to the difference in frequency.
in Hz. of the sources.
Figure 956 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation - General Options - Asynchronous
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
There is the option "Sequence", where the user can vary a parameter with a certain
step, from an initial value to a final value and automatically creates several tests. Can be
varied slip angle and / or the duration of oscillation and the number of cycles (only
asynchronous oscillation). Another possibility is the variation of the parameters of sources 1
and 2. It is possible to change the values of modulus, voltage angle, resistance s and
impedance s, either phase or ground.
Figure 957 – PSB_OoS –Sequence
The following figure shows a test for synchronous simulation where the sliding angle
is varied from 0° to 180° using a 10 step. In this test, the performance of the PSB alarm is
evaluated, which, according to the setting, acts from 50° angles. There is the option of
inserting a second Sequence in addition to the possibility of evaluating the performance time
of each test allowing a more complete test.
Figure 958 – PSB_OoS – Define Sequence

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
By clicking on the “Confirm” button, it is still possible to make adjustments in

the “System” and “Relay Location in the System” tabs. The “Fault” option is disabled for
testing synchronous oscillations and the “Evaluation” tab is defined in the “Define
Sequence” screen, being disabled in the following figure:
Figure 959 – PSB_OoS – System Simulation - System
By clicking on the “Confirm” button again, a test list is created automatically.
Figure 960 – PSB_OoS – System Simulation – Sequence – Points Created

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.14 Trajectory Simulation

The goal trajectories simulation is to create power swings through the variation d the
impedance values over time . The user can create oscillations that go directly through a
specific protection zone, stay for a certain time and then go out featuring a power
oscillation. It can also start from an initial impedance to fall quickly to an area of operation
characterizing a fault.
Figure 961 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation
The previous figure shows the result of a Simulation of Trajectories test. To facilitate
the understanding, each option of this test will be shown in detail in the next figures.
It has two types: When enabled, shows When enabled, it When enabled, it shows
Individual or the Type and Time of shows in the Test “Time Reference”,
Group. When in a the Oscillation result the “Interface”, “Nominal Time” and
group it shows the duration in the Test the “Nominal “Real Time” in the Test
result. result.
time and status of Performance” and if it
the Trajectory. really acted or not.
Figure 962 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation – Test set Trajectory Options

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the test set trajectories table are
detailed.
Oscillati Number With Duration Acting Expected Real result Final

nominal evaluation of
on of or of each interface. performance. in terms of
witho oscillation. the
number points. performanc oscillation.
ut e.
entered.
fault.
Figure 963 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Trajectory Simulation – Result of Trajectories Test set
points are done.
Edit an already
tested
oscillation.
Creates a new
Trajectory.
Creates a group
of Trajectories.
Remove
selected
Removes all Trajectory.
tested
Trajectories.
Figure 964 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Trajectories
The way in which data is entered for a test point in the trajectory test is detailed
below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The seven values (in this case) to Impedance module and Variation of Time between
angle values or
create the Impedance Trajectory Impedance one
resistance and
reproducing oscillations. reactance. over time. Impedance
and another.
Data entry | Z |
and θ, or R and
X.
Number of
points inserted.
Variation of
Impedance over
time. Deve ser
diferente de
zero.
Figure 965 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Trajectory
Below is detailed the way in which data is entered for a test point in the trajectory
test, informing data from the simulated system.
Voltage source Several

module and methods to
angle. define phase
and ground
impedance.
Ground impedance.
(In this case Ze = Zs
x Ks).
Phase impedance.
Figure 966 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – System
Below is detailed the way in which data is entered for a test point in the trajectory
test, informing data of a fault in the system.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the Choose between constant Value of the Choose

option to current, constant voltage magnitude of values
insert a and constant source. the fault mode. between “0”
= beginning
fault.
of the line
and “1” =
end of the
line.
Pre-fault
duration
Choose the
time. angle to start
the fault:
whether
Fault fixed,
duration maximum,
time. minimum or
random.
Post-Absence Resistance Reference

Disable angle for
duration time. value for the offset.
fault. fault.
Figure 967 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Fault
The way in which the evaluation of the trajectory test is performed is detailed below.
Enables whether performance Enables the

is expected or not. quantity to be
monitored.
Enables the
Evaluation of
the
performance
time.
Nominal
adjustment
time plus the
tolerances Enables the moment
given by the
to start counting the
manufacturer.
time.
Figure 968 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – System Simulation – General Options – Evaluation

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
37.15 Test Settings

enabling up to two pre-fault conditions and one post-fault condition.
It is also in this tab that the user defines the amplitude and angle values of the pre-
fault and post-fault situations and the duration of each one. You can adjust the relationship
between ground and phase CTs, displacement and phase CTs as well as their polarities.
In this tab, the user defines the Binary Inputs (actuation interfaces) for the PSB
Alarm, for the Trip of the Distance function and the Trip of the Out-of-Step function.
Another option is to adjust the Fault and Pre-fault situations for the Binary
and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition. Stop and trigger interfaces are also
selected, which, like other CE-600X software, can be performed by one of the Binary
Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations.
Figure 969 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings
In order to facilitate the understanding, the previous figure is separated into

parts. The designation of each channel and the insertion of pre / post faults are detailed
in the figure below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables the voltage Selects generation mode:

Enables the Pre- Nominal, Nominal
and current generation Simulation, Independent or
channels with each fault and post-fault
conditions. Three Phase Balanced.
phase.
“Vdelta” = displacement Module and angle values for Module and angle values of
tension. “IE” = Neutral each channel for Pre-fault each channel for post-fault
current. condition 1 and 2. condition.
Figure 970 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel – Pre-
Simulation and Post-Simulation
In the figure below, the fields dealing with the relationship between earth and phase
of TPs and CT’s, inversion of TPs and phase and ground CT’s and the choice of the start of
the timing are detailed.
Potential transformation ratio

between displacement voltage and
phase.
Current transformation
ratio between earth current
and phase current.
Enables Polaritys of the phase and
/ or offset TPs connected inverted.
Enables reversed
connected phase and / or
earth CT polarities.
Figure 971 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Ratio between CTs and TPs - Polarities of CTs
and TPs
In the figure below, the initial status of the binary outputs and GOOSE outputs, pre /
post fault times and the option to maintain pre-faults in phases not affected by the fault are
detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The user defines the generation time for

the Pre-fault and Post-Fault cycles.
Defines the states of Defines the states of the Defines the states of the Defines the states of the
the Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and Binary Outputs and
GOOSE Outputs GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when GOOSE Outputs (when
configured) in the Fault configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Post-
(when configured) in
cycle. fault 2 cycle. Fault cycle.
the Fault cycle.
Figure 972 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre- Simulation, Post- Simulation Time and
Binary Outputs and GOOSE
Sets binary or GOOSE input for

the PSB Alarm signal, the
Distance trip and the Out-of-Step
trip.
Insert logic between binary

inputs or GOOSE messages.
Allows “E” or “OR” logic.
Defines whether the trigger Trigger

interface is via: software, logic, time delay.
binary input, GPS or External.
Figure 973 – PSB_OoS – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
SYNCHRONISM
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING
SYNCHRONISM RELAY

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
38 Synchronism - Software for testing synchronism relay

This software performs automatic tests on synchronism relays. It allows the user
to adjust the voltage range by frequency and check if synchronization is possible.
the voltages, can also enable Pre-Simulation conditions 1 and 2 and a Post-Simulation
condition.
The tests performed are: Trigger Test, Search Test and Course Test. For all tests, it is
possible to view the region where synchronism is allowed. To facilitate visualization,
this region can be maximized and it also has a button for the purpose of transparency.
The software allows directing the voltage and frequency control interfaces to the
Binary outputs for the voltage regulator and speed regulator respectively.
This software has the feature “Open Settings at Start” (Software Options menu), if it
is active, when starting the Synchronism software, the Settings screen is active immediately,
this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important to specify the
Figure 974 – Synchronism – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 975 – Synchronism – Settings Screen
Synchronism field will be discussed throughout this chapter.

A Figureabaixo mostra de forma detalhada cada função da barra padrão de
série.
test file.
Bar.
Equipment used
and serial
Opens the options:
number.
Minimize, Maximize
and Close.
Figure 976 – Synchronism – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

to create a new file, save, open, close, among others, which are the main control actions ,
will appear in the upper left corner.
Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 977 – Synchronism – Resources General Button
38.4 Home Menu
Figure 978 – Synchronism – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
process.
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to Untested
status.
Clears all
spots
and
returns to
the status
Connects between Opens a screen for Go to the of Not
software and GPS Setup. next line. Tested.
hardware.
Figure 979 – Synchronism – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms, phasors and synchronoscope) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options
(General Settings and Synchronism). Access to the report, options for viewing the units
involved (time and module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout are also
displayed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Phasor the standard
Settings Waveform time in time in values related
Tab. layout.
Screen. Tab. seconds. cycles. to
synchronism.
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
report
configurati Shows values Shows
Shows the on based on the absolute Shows relative
Synchronism tab. window. primary. values. values.
Figure 980 – Synchronism – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
38.5 Display Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 981 – Synchronism – View Menu – Windows and Layout

simulation mode (offline generation , without voltage and current), allow the opening of the
settings. current.
Figure 982 – Synchronism – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 983 – Synchronism – Adjustments button
In Synchronism mode, there is the “Systems” tab. In it, the user configures whether
the voltage of system 1 used as a reference is single-phase, or three-phase. In the latter case,
it is possible to choose between phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages. The same
adjustments are made for system 2, which also has fields for adjusting the primary voltage,
primary and secondary current in addition to the phase sequence. There is an option that
copies the settings from system 1 to system 2.
For the circuit breaker there are time adjustments for effective closing to occur, and
for reporting whether the signal emitted is a pulse or continuous. If the option “none” is set,
the circuit breaker closing time is disregarded.
There is another tab called “Synchronism Assessment” where the differences in

voltage, frequency and angle between each system are adjusted. The time for maximum and
minimum voltages and the maximum and minimum frequencies s allowed for synchronism
are defined. In this screen, adjustments are made to the relative and absolute tolerances for
voltage, frequency, time and angle.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Adjustment
of phase-to-
phase and
neutral phase
voltages for
System 1.
Figure 985 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen – General - Systems
Then the screen where system data 2 and the settings for synchronism are inserted.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 986 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems
into account in the calculation of the relay).

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

or three-phase reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
neutral is chosen.

Figure 987 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems – Part 1


Figure 988 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2

is configured . Choose whether voltage differences are shown in absolute values or as a
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
set.
Figure 989 – Synchronism – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment


Figure 990 – Synchronism – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Sync Settings – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL




dead zone.
Relative and absolute Angle tolerance

voltage tolerances
given by the relay
given by the relay
manufacturer. manufacturer.
Relative and
absolute frequency
tolerances given by
the relay
manufacturer.

by the relay
manufacturer.
38.9 Graphics Tab

After entering the settings, these are shown on the Graphics tab.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 994 – Synchronism – Graph Tab
Figure 995 – Synchronism – Maximized Graph Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Place a test point in Maximizes the

the desired position. graphics tab.
Enables / disables
Zooms in or out for the display of the
easy viewing of the line in the Search
test. Test.
The origin is
centered within the
graph tab.
Shows the frequency
and voltage values on
the x and y axes. Shows a grid for
easy viewing.
Central axes are in
bold for greater
Hides tolerances from
emphasis. the synchronism graph.
Figure 996 – Synchronism – Graph Tab - Resources
38.10 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each channel for each point / line or test
path added. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value
verification.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 997 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
Allows you to Insert or COMTRADE or CSV
Edit either Markings or file from the waveforms.
Comments in graphics. Take a photo of the chart
by storing it on the
clipboard.
Figure 998 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab - Resources
options:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

the Synchronoscope the frequency of the
tab. analog signals.
Figure 999 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
38.11 Phasor Tab

inserted or edited in the test. The following screen is for a line Test set using Trigger.
Figure 1000 – Synchronism – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

related lag.

Figure for more
details.
Opens the Assign Signals

window where the user
following parameters of
determines which values
the graph: Title, Legend,
will be shown on the Scale, Grid, Table and
graphs. Take a photo of the chart by storing it
on the clipboard. Dimensions.
Figure 1001 – Synchronism – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variations.

Minimum, maximum or
Figure 1002 – Synchronism – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
38.12 Synchronism Tab

The figure below shows the synchronoscope with the synchronism region (light
blue). The dimensions of this region depend on m relay settings.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1003 – Synchronism – Synchronism Tab
38.12.1 Trigger
This test aims to allow the user to test whether a system can be synchronized to
another, according to the values of voltage, frequency and angle, respecting the adjusted
differences.
Figure 1004 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trigger
The previous figure shows the result of a Trigger test. For a better explanation of this
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows V, f and θ Values of V, f and θ Values of V, f and θ It shows the expected

of System 2 and and their differences and their differences response, the
the difference of at the moment of the at the moment of the effective response,
these quantities circuit breaker closing effective closing of the synchronism time
command. the circuit breaker. and the final status.
for System 1.
Figure 1005 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting – Options
As an example, leaving only the “Resp” option in the previous figure, the following
ones are shown.
Test point Expected Effective Time for Final test

number. answer. response synchronism. result.
.
Figure 1006 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trigger – Test set Points

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
points are done.
Edit a point
already tested.
Creates a
new point
for test.
Creates a
Sequence of
points. Removes the
selected
point.
Removes all
tested points.
Figure 1007 – Synchronism – Main screen – System Simulation – Insert / Edit Points
When the user clicks on “New Point” the voltage, frequency and angle adjustments
must be entered. The user first adjusts the values of system 1 and can choose between two
options: enter the value of the difference between system 1 and 2, or enter the absolute
values of voltage, frequency and angle of system 2.
System 1 System 1 System 1 System 2 System 2 System 2

voltage. frequency. angle. voltage. frequency. angle.
Angle difference
Voltage difference Frequency between the two
difference between
Cancel the
between the two Systems.
the two Systems. point.
Systems.
Confirm
the point.
Figure 1008 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – New Point

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
By clicking “Sequence” the user sets the following values
Angle
pitch.
Total points
calculated
automatically.
Voltage Cancel the

Confirms the Cancels the
value. point.
Sequence of Sequence of
points. points.
Figure 1009 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting - General Options – Sequence
The following figure shows the plot of the points before they are Test set. The
moment they are Test set they turn green if they pass or red if they fail.
Figure 1010 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting – Graph
The next illustration shows If the area where the timing is possible. The green arrow
shows the moment of the circuit breaker closing command. If the arrow is red it means that
with the current values of the two systems, synchronism is not allowed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test points and Colors representing

untested icons. status of points:
Orange: Not Tested;
Green: Approved;
Angle synchronism region Red: Failed.
highlighted in blue
according to tension and
angle criteria. In order for
the synchronism to occur
effectively, the frequency
criterion must also be
obeyed.

mouse position when on
the previous graphic. Difference in voltage,
angle and frequency.
Figure 1011 – Synchronism – Main screen – Shooting –Legend
38.13 Search Test

The purpose the test search is to find the edge of the sync region. For this test the
user can insert a line or a sequence of lines, the data entry are values of
voltage, frequency and angle, the software calculates for each line the transition region
between the region where synchronism is not possible for the region where synchronism is
possible. The user sets the binary outputs to “higher voltage” (V>); “Minor voltage” (V
<); “Higher frequency” (f>) and “lower frequency” (f <). At the end of the search, it is
possible to define an angle interval for the software to check the synchronism.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1012 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test
The previous figure shows the result of a test of search. To facilitate the
understanding, each tab of this test will be shown in detail in the next figures. For each row
the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the table according to the figure
below.
It has two Voltage, Voltage, Values of V, f Values of V, f It shows the

types: Points frequency frequency and and θ and their and θ and their expected
and Lines. and angle angle values differences at differences at response, the
When enabled values expected for the moment of the moment of effective
the effective the effective response, the
for Line, it expected for synchronism closing closing of the synchronism
shows values of the region. command of circuit breaker. time and the
the Start and synchronism the circuit final status.
End Point. region. breaker.
Figure 1013 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test– Options
For example leaving Only Smarter and the "Reply" option of the previous figure are
shown the following data:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test Test Test’s Synchronism Test

point expected effective actuation validati
number. response. response. time. on.
Figure 1014 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
points are done.
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a
sequence of
lines.
Removes
Removes all selected line.
added lines.
Figure 1015 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines
available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1016 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options
To facilitate the visualization and explanation of each field, the previous figure was
divided in two. In the figure below, the insertion of the starting point of a new test line is
detailed.
Voltage, frequency and angle values Difference in voltage and Absolute voltage and
frequency between the two
for System 1. They are configured in frequency values for the
Systems for the starting
“Settings”> “General”> “Reference point of the search. System 2 start point.
Values”.
Figure 1017 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options – First Half
In the figure below, the end point of the added line is shown, as well as the enabling
of the synchronism check feature after searching.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Enables / disables the Difference in voltage and Absolute voltage and

synchronism check. frequency between the frequency values for
Parameterizes the angle two Systems for the end the System 2 end
difference of the two Systems. point of the search. point.
Figure 1018 – Synchronism – Main screen –Search Test – General Options – Second Half
By clicking “Sequence” the user sets a value of voltage and frequency and just pick
one step to the angle different s lines are inserted automatically.
Step
angle.
Number of lines calculated

automatically.
Enables the synchronism check.

Parameterizes the angle difference of
the two Systems.
Figure 1019 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence
moment they are Test set they become green dots if they pass, or red dots if they fail.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1020 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Graph
The following figure details the legend along with the synchronoscope.
Test points and

Colors representing
untested icons.
status of points:
Orange: Not Tested;
Green: Approved;
Angle synchronism region Red: Failed.
highlighted in blue
according to tension and
angle criteria. In order for
the synchronism to occur
effectively, the frequency
criterion must also be
obeyed.

mouse position when on
the previous graphic. Difference in voltage,
angle and frequency.
Figure 1021 – Synchronism – Main screen – Search Test – Legend
38.14 Trajectory
This test aims to allow the user to test whether a system reaches synchrony even if
there is a variation in voltage over time and / or variation in frequency over time. Voltage,
frequency are defined for system 1. For system 2, a voltage, frequency and an initial and
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
final angle are defined . Finally, the values of the variation of voltage and frequency over
time are adjusted.
Figure 1022 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory
Generator Generator Voltage, Values of V, f Values of V, f It shows the

model, frequency and θ and their and θ and their expected
model,
values of and angle differences at differences at response, the
values of the moment of
voltage voltage and values and the moment of effective
the circuit
current their breaker closing the effective response, the
and current variation variations for closing of the synchronism
command.
variation over time. the initial circuit time and the
over time. System. breaker. final status.
Figure 1023 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – Options
In the figure below, all the items that appear in the Test set route line table are
detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test Expected Effective Time for Test

point answer. response. synchronism. validation.
number.
Figure 1024 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – Test set Points
The figure below shows how the insertion, partial / total removal and the editing of
test path lines are carried out.
Edit a line that

has already been
tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a line
group.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
tested lines.
Figure 1025 – Synchronism – Main screen – Tajectory – Insert / Edit Lines

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1026 – Synchronism – Main screen – Trajectory – General Options
To facilitate the visualization and explanation of each field, the previous figure was
divided in two. In the figure below, the insertion of the conditions of the initial system of the
path test is detailed.
Voltage, frequency and angle Difference in voltage, frequency Voltage, angle and
and angle between the two frequency values for
values for System 1. They are
Systems for the starting point of the System 2 start
configured in “Settings”> the search.
“General”> “Reference Values”. point.
Figure 1027 – Synchronism – Main screen –Trajectory – General Options – First Half
In the figure below, the insertion of the conditions of the final system of the route test
is detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Variation of voltage Difference in voltage and Valores de tensão e

and frequency from frequency between the frequência para o
the starting point to two Systems for the end ponto final do
the ending point. point of the search. System 2.
Figure 1028 – Synchronism – Main screen –Trajectory – General Options – Second Half
In the next figure, the region within the square of the full line is the region of
synchronism and the external region is of non-synchronism . The region defined between the
two squares of dotted lines represents the tolerances given by the manufacturer
of each relay.
Figure 1029 – Synchronism – Main screen –Tajectory – Graph
The following figure details the legend along with the synchronoscope.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Colors representing
Tested and line status:
untested points Blue: Not Tested;
icons and search Green: Approved;
line. Red: Failed.
Synchronism region
highlighted in blue according
to tension and angle criteria.
In order for the synchronism
to occur effectively, the
frequency criterion must also
be obeyed.

mouse position when on Difference in voltage,
the previous graphic. angle and frequency.
Figure 1030 – Synchronism – Main screen – Route – Legend
38.15 Test Settings

enabling up to two pre- simulation conditions and one post- simulation condition. It is also
in this tab that the user defines the amplitude and angle values of the pre- simulation and
post- simulation situations and the duration of each one.
To test the search set up the values of the tolerances frequency is relative or absolute,
both voltage tolerance relative to absolute time waiting between each increment and reset
time.
In this window the user sets the Binary Inputs (actuation interfaces) to f>, f<, V> and
V<. Another option is to adjust the simulation, pre- simulation and post-simulation
situations for the Binary and GOOSE outputs associated with each condition. Stop and
trigger interfaces are also selected, which, like other CE-600X software, can be performed
by one of the Binary Inputs, GOOSE, or by logical combinations.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1031 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings
A greater detail of the previous figure is shown below. The figure below shows how
to insert pre-and post-fault conditions, in addition to, of course, the designations of each
voltage channel.
1 and 2 and post-
Designates the Module and angle values of each Module and angle values of
generation channels channel for pre-simulation each channel for post-
for each System. condition - 1 and 2. simulation condition.
Figure 1032 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel– Pre-

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The figure below shows how to insert the pre and post fault timings and also how to
change the state of the binary and GOOSE outputs .

configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Post-
Simulation 1 cycle. Simulation cycle 2. Simulation cycle.
the Simulation cycle.
Figure 1033 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and
In the figure below, specific settings for the search test and the general reset
time are detailed.
Absolute Relative Absolute

frequency of frequency of voltage of the Relative
the search test. the search test. search test. voltage of
the search
test.
Time
between
increments.
Time to
restart.
Figure 1034 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test
In the figure below, the direction of the V>, V <, f> and f <interfaces (Important for
the search test) and the software stop / start interface is detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Stop interface for High frequency stop Stop interface for

high voltage. interface. reduced frequency.
Stop interface
for reduced
voltage.
Stopwatch stop
interface. By a
single binary or by
binary logic.
Stopwatch trigger interface by: Insert logic between binary Trigger time
software, GPS, or by binary logic. inputs or GOOSE messages. delay.
Allows “AND” or “OR” logic.
Figure 1035 – Synchronism – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
VOLTS P
HERTZ
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING
OVEREXCITATION RELAYS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
39 VoltsPHertz - Software for testing Overexcitation relays

This software performs automatic tests on overexcitation relays. It allows the user to
adjust the ranges of variation and / or frequency and check if there is performance and if it is
within the predicted time.
the voltages, can also enable Pre-Simulation conditions 1 and 2 and a Post-Simulation
condition.
The tests performed are: Time Test, Search Test and Course Test. For all tests, it is
possible to view the performance curves. To facilitate the understanding s SAS
curves can m be maximized s and have also a button to transparency effect.
The software allows the VoltsPHertz trip and pick-up interfaces to be directed to the
Binary outputs.
is active, when starting the VoltsPHertz software the Settings screen is active immediately,
this feature is interesting since, before starting the tests it is Important to specify the
Figure 1036 – VoltsPHz – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1037 – VoltsPHz – Settings Screen
The options on the Settings screen are described in detail in chapter 21. The Volts /
Hertz field will be discussed throughout this chapter.

A Figureabaixo mostra de forma detalhada cada função da barra padrão de
série.
test file.
Bar.
Equipment used
Size, Minimize,
Maximize and
Close.
Figure 1038 – VoltsPHz – Quick Access Bar


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Creates a new
test file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Simulation mode;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 1039 – VoltsPHz – Resources General Button
39.4 Home Menu
Figure 1040 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Orientation for Hardware generation generation. next point.
screen. Configuration. process.
Clean the spot

Connects between Opens a screen for Clears all spots
GPS Setup.
selected and returns
software and and returns to the to the status of Not
hardware. status of Not Tested. Tested.
Figure 1041 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms, phasors) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General Settings and
Volts / Hertz ). Access to the report is also displayed, options for viewing the units involved
(time and module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to

Waveform Phasor Tab. time in time in the standard
Tab. seconds. cycles. layout.
Enables /
disables
tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Opens the
report
Calls the configurati Shows values Shows
Settings on based on the absolute Shows relative
Figure 1042 – VoltsPHz – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
39.5 Display Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
for viewing.
below or as a
document.
Figure 1043 – VoltsPHz – Display Menu – Windows and Layout

settings. current.
Figure 1044 – VoltsPHz – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 1045 – VoltsPHz – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Synchronism.
In Volts / Hertz mode, the user sets curve 1 and can insert points, adjust the pick-up
value and time dial. In curve 2, the user adjusts the pick-up value and the actuation time if
using a defined time curve.
In this screen, the voltage and frequency limits are set as well as the relative and
absolute tolerances for both voltage, frequency and time.
There are also two tabs for viewing the timed curve (V/f x t) and another for viewing
the pickup (V/f / Vn/Fn x t)

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Connections.
Displays the tab

for adjusting the
Volts / Hertz
function.
Figure 1046 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – General – General Information
39.8 Settings Screen – Volts / Hertz

Then the screens where the adjustments for the Volts / Hertz function are made.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1047 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz
To facilitate understanding, the previous figure will be divided into parts. In the
figure below, parameterizes if the type, pick up and dial curve time.
Curve type. “Defined time” or Curve type: “Defined time”

“Other”, defined by the user. In or “Other” defined by the
this example, a curve called user.
Overexcitation was inserted.
Curve 2 pickup.
Curve 1
pickup.
Timed curve Time in seconds.

time dial.
Figure 1048 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz – Part 1
In the figures below, you can enter the voltage and frequency limits of a given relay,
all in conjunction with the tolerance of time, voltage and frequency.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Minimum phase- Maximum phase-

to-phase voltage. to-phase voltage.
Minimum
Maximum
frequency.
frequency.
Relative tolerance Absolute

of time. tolerance of
time.
Figure 1049 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen – Volts / Hertz – Part 2
Relative voltage Absolute voltage

tolerance. tolerance.
Absolute
Relative frequency
frequency tolerance.
tolerance.
Figure 1050 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Part 3
The following figures show the graph of the curve (V/f) x t and the graph of the
frequency x voltage pick-up.
Figure 1051 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Graph (V/Hz) x t

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1052 – VoltsPHz – Adjustment Screen Volts / Hertz – Graph Pickup
39.9 Graphics Tab

After entering the settings, these are shown in the Graphics tab.
Figure 1053 – VoltsPHz – Graph Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1054 – VoltsPHz – Maximized Graph Tab

Insert a new
test point.
Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
Shows or hides the test.
simple scale, the values
on the X axis, the values
on the Y axis and the
grid.
Figure 1055 – VoltsPHz – Graph Tab - Resources
39.10 Waveform Tab

In this tab, the user visualizes the signals of each channel for each test point / line
added. It features scroll bar features on the time axis and instantaneous value verification.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1056 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 1057 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab - Resources
options:
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.
Chama a Phasor Tab. Shows the variation of

analog signals.
Figure 1058 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
39.11 Phasor Tab

Figure 1059 – VoltsPHz – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

related lag.

Figure for more
details.

Figure 1060 – VoltsPHz – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:
Enables or disables
the display of the
following values:
value, imaginary
value, lag,
instantaneous
and frequency
variation.
Minimum, maximum or
Figure 1061 – VoltsPHz – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns
39.12 Time Test

This test aims to allow the user to test points of the thermal characteristic curve in
order to verify if the overexcitation function has acted when it should and if it was in the
correct time.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1062 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test
The previous figure shows the result of this time. For a better explanation of this test,
this figure is divided into parts.
Shows the Test Voltage values in Shows whether or not it Shows the nominal
mode and the volts and is an operating region. time and the
multiple (In / End) frequency in hertz And finally it shows measured time in
of the Tested whether the operation
of the tested point. seconds.
took place or not.
Points.
Figure 1063 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test– Options
For example leaving the Options “General Info” and “Performance” of the previous
figure enabled the following data are shown:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test Constant Ratio Expected If the Final test

performance
point frequency Vn / fn. situation. result.
took place.
number. or voltage.
Figure 1064 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Test set Lines
In the following figure are detalhad the insertion, the editing or the removal test
lines.
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a
sequence of
lines.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
tested lines.
Figure 1065 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Insert / Edit Lines
When the user clicks on “New Line” he defines between voltage or constant
frequency as the test mode, the multiple of the division between nominal voltage and
frequency and the value of phase-phase voltage or frequency.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Use constant voltage

or frequency.
Multiples of the rated voltage

by the rated frequency.
Phase voltage calculated

according to the multiple.
Confirm or Cancel
Frequency value. the line for test.
Figure 1066 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test - General Options – New Line
When clicking on “Sequence” the user defines the test mode, an initial and final
multiple, as well as the step. The different lines are created automatically.
Figure 1067 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test - General Options – Sequence
The following figure shows a zoom of the lines before being Test set. At the
moment to that are Test set are torn am up green if approved, or red s if they disapprove.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1068 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test – Graph
The next illustration shows the legend with the icons of the test line and the points
Test set. There is also a color legend and finally the current point value as the user moves
the mouse over the previous graph.
Colors representing
status of points:
Test line icons Orange: Not Tested;
and tested points. Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Multiple and time

value of what is
pointed by the mouse
in the previous graph.
Figure 1069 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Time Test –Legend
39.13 Search Test

The goal of the search is to find the test region of pick-up of overexcitation. For this
test the user can enter a line or a sequence of lines, the data inputs are test mode: frequency
or constant voltage and the value of the phase-to-phase voltage or frequency depending on
the test mode for the desired point test.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1070 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test
Shows the Test Shows nominal Shows frequency

Mode. Constant voltage and frequency and voltage values
frequency or values according to found by the test.
constant voltage. the theoretical curve.
Figure 1071 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test– Options
As an example, leaving the three options enabled in the previous figure, the
following data are shown:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test point Constant Theoretical Theoretical Measured Measured Final

number. phase-to- frequency phase-to-
voltage or frequency evaluation
phase value. phase
frequency. voltage voltage value. of each
value. value. tested line.
Figure 1072 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Test set Points
In the figure are detailed following the insertion, the editing or the removal test lines.
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Creates a
sequence of
lines.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
tested lines.
Figure 1073 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Insert / Edit Lines
available.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1074 – VoltsPHz – Main screen –Search Test – General Options
By clicking "Sequence" the user sets the test mode and inserts the value initial, final
and the step and the number of points is calculated automatically by the software. The
following figure shows a case for the constant frequency.
Figure 1075 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – General Options - Sequence
The following figure shows a zoom of the lines before they are Test set. The moment
they are Test set they become green points if they pass or red points if they fail.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1076 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Graph
Colors representing
status of points:
and tested points. Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Voltage and
frequency value of
the point pointed by
the mouse in the
previous graph.
Figure 1077 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Search Test – Legend.
39.14 Trajectory
This test is intended to allow the user to test the function overexcitation for situations
where occur variations voltage and variation in frequency at the same time.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1078 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory
Shows initial Shows final Shows if the Shows the

voltage and voltage and performance is dV/dt, df/dt
frequency frequency expected and if it and the total
values. really took place. simulation
values.
time.
Figure 1079 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Options
As an example, leaving the option “Def. Route” of the previous figure, the following
data are shown:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test point Test definition Variation of Variation of Total time Shows the
mode: final
number. voltage frequency of the tested
dV / dt, df / dt or Evaluation of
time. over time. over time. line.
the tested line.
Figure 1080 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Test set Points
In the figure are detailed following the insertion, the editing or the removal test lines.
Edit a line that

has already
been tested.
Creates a new
line.
Not available
for this test.
Removes
selected line.
Removes all
tested lines.
Figure 1081 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Insert / Edit Lines

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Initial frequency. Final frequency.
Phase-to-phase
Phase-to-phase
voltage.
voltage.
Mode: dV / dt, df
Voltage variation / dt or time.
over time.
Total simulation Frequency

time. variation
over time.
Figure 1082 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – General Options
In the next figure, the region within the square of the full line is the region of
synchronism and the external region is of non-synchronism. The region defined between the
two squares of dotted lines represents the tolerances given by the manufacturer of each
relay.
Figure 1083 – VoltsPHz – Main screen –Trajectory – Graph

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Colors representing
status of points:
and tested points Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Voltage and frequency

value of the point
pointed by the mouse in
the previous graph.
Figure 1084 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Trajectory – Legend
39.15 Test Settings

In the Test Settings tab, the user directs the voltage generation channels, enabling up
to two pre-simulation conditions and one post-simulation condition. It is also in this tab that
the user defines the values of amplitude and angle (Independent Mode) of the pre-simulation
and post-simulation situations and the duration of each one.
For the search test, the values of the frequency tolerances are adjusted, either relative
or absolute, voltage tolerance both relative and absolute, the waiting time between each
increment for the time test there are fields to enter the restart time and the waiting time for
the timed curve.
In this window the user sets the Binary Inputs (actuation interfaces) to “Interface of
Stop” and to “Interface of Pickup”. Another option is to adjust the simulation, pre -
simulation and post-simulation situations for the Binary and GOOSE S outputs associated
with each condition. The interfaces stop and shooting as well as in other software CTC can
be made by the action of one of the Binary Inputs, GOOSE, or logical combinations.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1085 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings
A greater detail of the previous figure is shown below. In the figure below it is
detailed all the fields of pre and post fault, as well as the designation of the channels.
1 and 2 and post-
Designates the Module and angle values of each Module and angle values of
generation channels channel for pre-simulation each channel for post-
for each phase. condition - 1 and 2. simulation condition.
Figure 1086 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction of Generation Channel– Pre-
In the figure below, the initial status of the binary outputs and GOOSE outputs, pre /
post fault times is detailed.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Pre- configured) in the Post-
Simulation 1 cycle. Simulation cycle 2. Simulation cycle.
the Simulation cycle.
Figure 1087 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Pre-Simulation, Post-Simulation Time and
In the figure below, all the specific configurations of the search test and other tests
are detailed.
Absolute Relative Absolute

frequency of frequency of voltage of the Relative
the search test. the search test. search test. voltage of
the search
test.
Time
between
increments.
Extra time.
Time to
restart.
Figure 1088 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Search Test
In the figure below, all the pickup, stop and trip interfaces required in the tests are
detailed, as well as the access of their respective logics.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Stop interface for overexciting pick-up. It allows the creation of

“And” or “OR” logic
Stop interface for when enabled.
overexcitation trip.
Allows triggering by
binary, software,
logic or GPS.
Figure 1089 – VoltsPHz – Main screen – Test Settings – Enable Interfaces

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
TRANSDUT
SOFTWARE FOR TESTING TRANSDUCER

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
40 Transdut - Software for testing transducer

This software performs automatic tests on transducers of electrical quantities. Allows
the user to verify that the transducer is responding within its accuracy class. Otherwise, it
allows the user to calibrate the transducer.
The user can inject the following quantities: active power, reactive power, apparent
power, frequency, current, voltage, power factor, angle between voltages, angle between
voltage and current, angle between currents, average current, DC current, DC voltage, DC
power and line voltage. Measuring the transducer output, either current (+ 25mADC) or
voltage (+ 10VDC).
When performing the test it is possible to view the graph of the signal injected by the
output signal, errors, waveform, phasors and harmonics.
menu), if it is active, when starting the Transdut software the Settings screen is active
Figure 1090 – Transdut – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1091 – Transdut – Settings Screen
Transducer field will be discussed throughout this chapter.

test file.
Bar.
Equipment used
Restore, Move, Size, number.
Minimize, Maximize
and Close.
Figure 1092 – Transdut – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new Open a saved

test file. file.
Password protect Saves the current

certain file.
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Load, Export or Simulation mode;
open a reference Open Settings at Start.
table for transducer Enable AGC.
errors.
Shut down the displayed.
software.
Figure 1093 – Transdut – Resources General Button
40.4 Home Menu
Figure 1094 – Transdut – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
point / line, deletion of one or all of the Tested points.
Clean the
spot
Selected
and returns
to Untested
status.
Connects between Opens a screen Setup of sample Clears all spots

software and for GPS Setup. value and goose and returns to the status of
hardware. messages. Not Tested.
Figure 1095 – Transdut – Home Menu – Hardware and Generation
(waveforms and phasors) are displayed, as well as the adjustment options (General Settings
and Transducer). Access to the report is also displayed, options for viewing the units
involved (time and module) and general options for restoring and viewing the layout.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Shows the Shows the Shows the Shows the Returns to Enables /
Waveform Phasor Tab. time in time in the standard disables
Tab. seconds. cycles. layout. tabs for
viewing.
Shows
values
based on the
secondary.
Calls the Opens the report Shows values Shows

Settings configuration based on the absolute Shows relative
Figure 1096 – Transdut – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout
40.5 Display Menu


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
below or as a
document.
Figure 1097 – Transdut – Display Menu – Windows and Layout

settings. current.
Enables /
Disables
automatic
control gain.
Figure 1098 – Transdut – Software Options Menu – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Figure 1099 – Transdut – Adjustments button
There are two viewing modes: General and Transducer.
In the General mode, there is the “General Information” tab, where the user enters all
the data relating to: the Test, the Test set Device and the person responsible for the
Test. There is also the tab “Reference Values” where the user informs the nominal values of
voltage, current and power for system 1. There is also a tab for “Notes and Observations”. In
the other tab, “Explanatory Figures”, it is possible to insert up to 3 figures in the most used
image extensions, such as: Bitmap; JPGE; PNG; JPG; etc.
In Transducer mode, there is the “Transducer Adjustment” tab. In it, the user chooses
the type of transducer, the minimum and maximum values of input and output of these
transducers. There is the possibility, depending on the transducer, to register it as single-
phase or three-phase. You must adjust a tolerance and choose the type of curve behavior
between: Linear, Composite or Quadratic.
Other features are as to the transducer output if it is given by voltage or current, the
closing of the star point of the CT if it is facing bar or line, how the angle is calculated if
voltage minus current or current minus voltage and finally, the stabilization time for
the transducer software to acquire the Test value.
40.8 Settings Screen – Transducer – Transducer Adjustment
The figure below shows all transducer test options, once a specific type of transducer
is chosen, a new tab with the name of the transducer is created with parameters that vary
from transducer to transducer.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1100 – Transdut – Transducer – Transducer Adjustment
40.9 Graph Tab

After adjusting a transducer, its behavior is shown in the “Graph” tab.
Figure 1101 – Transdut – Graph Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1102 – Transdut – Maximized Graph Tab

Insert a new
Test point.
Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
test.
Shows or hides the
grid.
Figure 1103 – Transdut – Graph Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
40.10 Errors Tab

By double clicking on the “Errors” tab, this screen is maximized. The following
figure shows the errors: absolute, relative and total of a test performed.
Figure 1104 – Transdut – Maximized Errors Tab
40.10.1Resources of the Errors Tab

Zooms in or out for

easy viewing of the
test.
Shows or hides the
grid.
Figure 1105 – Transdut – Errors Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
40.11 Waveform Tab
Figure 1106 – Transdut – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 1107 – Transdut – Waveform Tab – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:

of the analog signals. shown as a waveform.

Shows the angles of
the analog signals.
the analog signals.

the Harmonics tab. the frequency of the
analog signals.
Figure 1108 – Transdut – Waveform Tab – Resources – Display
40.12 Phasor Tab

Figure 1109 – Transdut – Phasor Tab


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

related lag.
Figure for more
details.
Shows the
Trajectories. It allows changing the
following parameters of
Opens the Assign Signals the graph: Title, Legend,
window where the user Scale, Grid, Table and
determines which values Dimensions.
will be shown on the Take a photo of the chart by storing it
graphs. on the clipboard.
Figure 1110 – Transdut – Phasor Tab – Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variation.
Figure 1111 – Transdut – Phasor Tab – Show Columns
40.13 Harmonic Tab

By double-clicking on the “Harmonics” tab, this screen is maximized.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1112 – Transdut – Harmonics Tab
40.13.1Resources of the Harmonics Tab.

It allows 4 different sizes for

visualization of the graphs.
Opens the Assign following parameters of
Signals window where a single graphic or all of
the user determines them: Title, Legend,
which values will be Scale, Grid, Table and
shown on the graphs. Dimensions.
Allows you to Insert or Take a photo of the chart

Figure 1113 – Transdut – Harmonics Tab – Resources
40.14 Test
The test of the transducer aims to inject the quantity at the input and measure the
output value and compare it with the expected value as theoretical plus the tolerances.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1114 – Transdut – Main screen – Test
The previous figure shows the result of a test of an active power transducer. For a
better explanation of this test, this figure is divided into parts.
For each tested point the user can choose what type of data will be shown in the table
according to the figure below.
Reports the Shows the Shows the errors: Shows the standard Shows the voltage
nominal input deviation errors: absolute,
actual absolute, relative and current values
and output relative and total of the
value in the and total of the tested point. injected in the test.
values. output. tested point.
Figure 1115 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Options
As an example, leaving the options “General Info” and “Actual Value” of the
previous figure marked, the following data are shown:

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Test point Theoretical Number of Nominal Final and Final

values of input measurements reference Evaluation of
number. from the tested
frequency.
and output. value. the Test.
point.
Figure 1116 – Transdut – Main screen – Test
Below is an analysis of the features of the “Insert / Edit Points” field.
Edit a point that has

already been tested.
Creates a new
Creates a Sequence point.
of points.
Removes
Removes all selected point.
added points.
Figure 1117 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Insert / Edit Points
When the user clicks on “New Point” the following fields can be parameterized.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Transducer input value Number of

is power, voltage, repetitions of the
current, etc. measurements of the
output variable.
Fundamental frequency
Possibility of
of the input variable.
inserting harmonics
of up to 50th order.
Confirms the point to

be tested. Cancels the point to
be tested.
Figure 1118 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – General Options
The following figure shows the plot of the points before they are tested. The moment
they are tested they turn green if they pass or red if they fail.
Figure 1119 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Graph
The next illustration shows the legend for the graph of the performance of the inverse
curve and the time defined in the software.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Colors representing
status of points:
Orange: Not Tested;
Green: Approved;
Red: Failed.
Input quantity value and

theoretical output value.
Figure 1120 – Transdut – Main screen – Test – Legend
40.15 Test Settings

channels, controls the binary outputs, directs the measurement acquisition channels, has the
option of considering the total RMS value in the calculations, adjusts the trigger interface
and you can load a reference table for generation errors.
Figure 1121 – Transdut – Main screen – Test Settings

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Associates hardware Load table to use as a Clears the table used Enables the loaded
channels with software. reference. as a reference. table.
Figure 1122 – Transdut – Main screen – Test Settings – Direction Generation Channels

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
TRANSIENT
VIEW
SOFTWARE FOR VISUALIZATION OF
MEASUREMENT SIGNALS IN TRANSIENT
REGIME

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41 TransientView - Software for viewing measurement files on a transient

basis - COMTRADE files

This software visualizes signals measured in the field, stored in files in the
COMTRADE format (.cfg), allowing to verify the performance of relays on real
measurement conditions. The software allows simultaneous visualization of up to one
hundred voltage signals and one hundred current signals. The user can also view up
to digital signals.
What matters for the software are the waveforms. Thus, even if a given analog
channel (branch) of the file is current, for example, it can be directed to be viewed as a
voltage signal. When directing a signal for visualization, the user indicates a transformation
relationship for this signal, which allows the control of the amplitude of that signal.
menu) , if it is active, when starting the Transient software, the Settings screen is active
Figure 1123 – TransientView – Open Settings at Start

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1124 – TransientView – Main screen
Distance, Synchronism, Import and Export fields will be discussed throughout this chapter.

Creates a new Opens a new Saves the Customize the

file. file. current file. Quick Access
Bar.
Opens the
options:
Restore,
Move, Size, Software name and
Minimize,
version.
Maximize
and Close.
Figure 1125 – TransientView – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Creates a new
file.
Open a saved
file.
Password protect
certain
parameters of the
test file.
Saves the current
file.
Saves the current

file with a
specific name.
options for:
Enable AGC;
Shut down the
displayed.
Figure 1126 – TransientView – Resources General Button
41.4 Home Menu
Figure 1127 – TransientView – Home Menu

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
figures.


hardware. or end.
Figure 1128 – TransientView – Home Menu – Hardware and Sequence
Calls the Shows the Shows the Shows the Opens the report Shows the time in
Settings Waveform Phasor Harmonics configuration seconds or in
Screen. Tab. Tab. Tab. window. cycles.
Returns to
the standard
layout.
Enables / disables
tabs for viewing.
Shows the Shows the Impedance Shows values

synchronoscope based on the Shows Shows
Trajectory plan
tab primary. absolute relative
tab. configuration.
values. values.
Figure 1129 – TransientView – Home Menu – Options, Report, Units and Layout

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.5 View Menu

document.
Figure 1130 – TransientView – View Menu – Windows and Layout
Insert password in Enables / disables Enables / disables the

the Test file so as the option to open option of thermal
not to allow the the Settings Screen monitoring of the
editing of certain generation channels.
when starting the
settings. software.
Figure 1131 – TransientView – Software Options Menu – General


CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1132 – TransientView – Adjustments button
There are three viewing modes: General, Distance and Synchronism.
data related to the test, the tested device and the person responsible for the test, there is the
the user to structure all connections between the test case and the equipment to be tested.
to read .RIO files. Some distance relays record line, zone and operating time settings in this
format. Importing this file, Transient reads automatically so that the user does not need to
adjust it manually. Another option would be to export a .RIO file once the feature has been
enable the option to Remove Arc Resistance. If the relay does not generate a .RIO file, there
is the option to design the zone to be tested or to choose between predefined

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Distance
Connections.
Displays the
tab for
adjusting the
sync function.
Import
Files
.RIO.
Export
Files
.RIO.
Figure 1133 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen – General

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

primary. current.
Choose the
mode of the
earth factor:
(Mod;Ang)
(R;X)
(R0;X0)
(K0)
(Rt/Rl;Xt/Xl)
(Z0/Z1).
Shows which
zones are
available.
new zone.
Figure 1134 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Adjustment

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1135 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment - Insert
- Zone
To facilitate the visualization of the previous figure, it was divided into parts.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Zone description.
Extended or Block.
specific type of
of Impedance.
Trip time of the
zone.
Absolute tolerance
(more or less) in
time of operation.
Points inserted
when using the
option to draw.
Figure 1136 – TransientView – Parameters Screen – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert
– Zone

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

entered. predefined
zone.
Insert segment
drawing. and Xf for
making the
design.
Deletes the last

inserted
segment.
Deletes the
entire drawing.
Finalizes the
drawing
process.
– Zone
The following figure shows a quadrilateral zone that was drawn using straight line
segments.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
– Drawn Area

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1139 – TransientView – Parameters – Distance – Distance Protection Adjustment – Insert – Zone
Quadrilateral
Then the screen where system data 1 and 2 and the settings for synchronism are
inserted.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1140 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems
To facilitate understanding, the previous figure will be divided into two parts.
Single-phase or Voltage used as a Pulse breaker start

three-phase reference. Phase-to- signal, continuous or
neutral is chosen.

Figure 1141 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism – Systems – Part 1

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


Figure 1142 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen - Synchronism - Systems - Part 2

angle given by the manufacturer for reporting purposes, that is, validation of the tested
points.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1143 – TransientView – Adjustment screen - Synchronism - Synchronization adjustment


synchronism to occur. for synchronism to occur
Figure 1144 – TransientView – Adjustment Screen – Synchronization Adjustment – Part 1



CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


dead zone.

tolerances given by manufacturer.
the relay
manufacturer.

given by the relay
manufacturer.

by the relay
manufacturer.
41.9 Sequence Tab

41.9.1 Node Output (NO) Sub tab

As discussed in the section Channels Direc the sequence s will only exist for each
node if voltage channels / chain are associated with them. That is, if there are two nodes and
one of them does not have any associated channels, the strings s will not exist for that
node. Note in the following figure, that there are 2 nodes and 3 sequences, however, no

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1148 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - NODE sub tab - Two Nodes and three Sequences
41.9.2 COMTRADE/ATP Mode

Unlike Sequenc and Master software, there are only two sequence modes in
Total time of the

name. (not configurable).
Choose between
COMTRADE
file (.cfg
extension) or Access button for
ATP file (.lis parameterizing the
extension). comtrade / ATP file.
Figure 1149 – TransientView – Sequence Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.9.3 COMTRADE mode features - Output targeting
When clicking on the access button for the parameterization of the COMTRADE
mode and loading a .cfg file, the following screen appears:
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the file
box. loaded.



node.

Picture box.
Directing the file
up to six binary outputs
node to the
generation channels. outputs.

Picture box.
Figure 1150 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - Channel Direction

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.9.4 ATP mode features - Output targeting
When clicking on the access button for the parameterization of the ATP mode and
loading a .lis file, the following screen appears:
Shows information
Picture Search for file to upload. about the file
box. loaded.


Directing the file

node.

Picture box.
Figure 1151 – TransientView – Sequence Tab - Channel Direction

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Sequence duration
time.
Sequence name.
Voltage and
current module.
Figure 1152 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Output Analog. DC Sub tab – General Description

state.
Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Figure 1153 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Binary Outputs sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Sequence duration
time.
Sequence
name.

Figure 1154 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – GOOSE Outputs sub tab – General Description

the set of sequence s will be started.

answered first) and time prevent the change
or key (which is from being too sudden.
answered first).
Way to trigger the set
of parameterized
Sequences. (It only
Sequence).
Figure 1155 – TransientView – Sequence Tab – Time and Advance sub tab – General Description

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.9.9 Waveform Tab
Figure 1156 – TransientView – Waveform Tab



Table and
on the graphs.
Dimensions.
Extract the
COMTRADE or CSV
clipboard.
Figure 1157 – TransientView – Waveform Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
options:


Shows the angles of
the analog signals.

Figure 1158 – TransientView – Waveform Tab – Resources - View
41.9.11Phasor Tab
inserted or edited in the test. The following screen is for a line tested using Search Test.
Figure 1159 – TransientView – Phasor Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL


related lag.
Figure for more
details.

Figure 1160 – TransientView – Phasor Tab- Resources
options:

display of the
following values:
lag, instantaneous
and frequency
variations.

Minimum, maximum or
Figure 1161 – TransientView – Waveform Tab – Resources – Show Columns

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.9.13Trajectories tab
Figure 1162 – TransientView – Trajectories tab


visualization of
graphs.
values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 1163 – TransientView – Trajectories tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
41.9.15Harmonics Tab
Figure 1164 – TransientView – Harmonics Tab


visualization of
graphs.
values in module,
imaginary value.
Opens the Assign
Table and
Dimensions.
the clipboard.
Figure 1165 – TransientView – Harmonics Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

Choice of voltages
that represented
System 1 (to be
synchronized) and
Synchronoscope System 2 (already
of cursor 1 and 2. synchronized).
Figure 1166 – TransientView – Synchronoscope tab
41.9.18 Plane Z Tab

You can add sequences pre-fault, fault and post missing insert n of them directly in
the Z plane, displayed together with the function of protection feature 21.
Type of fault
to be inserted.

Button to
can be inserted.
Figure 1167 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
When clicking on the insert button, the following screen wills appear:
Fault insertion

post-fault modes.
Figure 1168 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab - Resources
Confirmation
of the chosen
chosen and their
Figure 1169 – TransientView – Plane Z Tab - Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
STATISTICAL
ANALYSIS
SOFTWARE FOR STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF
A DATA SET

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
42 Statistical Analysis -Software for Statistical Analysis of a data set

This software is able to perform the analysis statistics of a set of data (storage in files
with format .CSV (comma separated values)) enabling the visualization of the results,
through graphic types: XY, bar or pizza. The software allows the display to quickly and easy
as parameters: values maximum, value minimum , average are arithmetic’s, average
geometrics, average, deviation are standard and variance are of a data group.
42.2 Initial Screen

When booting analysis software Statistics the following tell to is shown. In this
window, there is a Ribbon menu with the main features of the software, the “File” menu and
the “Tables” and “Analysis” tabs where the parameterization and data manipulation made
possible by the software will be carried out.
Figure 1170 – Statistical Analysis – Initial screen

toolbar. The user can insert or delete a table, he can choose between three types of graphical
analysis , he can generate a report automatically, insert general information and restore the
default layout of the software.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Insert a file with a Creates an Creates an Opens a window

.csv extension to analysis with XY- analysis with pie where General
be analyzed. type graphs. charts. Information can be
entered.
Delete a .csv file Creates an Automatically Returns the

with a group of analysis with bar displays the software windows
data. graphs. report. to the default
position.
Figure 1171 – Statistical Analysis– Quick Access Bar
42.4 Accessing the File Button options

By clicking the File button , options will be available to create new ones, save, open
or close analysis files, as shown in the figure below. In addition, a history of the last used
files will be shown.
Creates a new Opens a file. Saves the current

file. file.
History of the last

used files.
Saves the file Closes the

with a specific current file.
name.
Figure 1172 – Statistical Analysis– File Button Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
42.5 Definition of General Information

By clicking on the “General Information” button on the Ribbon menu, the user has
the possibility to define information that can later be included in the report generated by the
software. The window for filling in this information is shown below.
Figure 1173 – Statistical Analysis– General Information – Identification of the Analysis and Responsible
42.6 Tables Tab

In this tab, all imported files will be made available, organized in table format. The
user can define labels for each of the tables.
42.6.1 Adding new tables - Add Table button

Clicking on the Add Table button, you must choose a file in the format .CSV to be
loaded.
Figure 1174 – Statistical Analysis– Adding a Table

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In order for a table to be successfully imported, the file . The chosen .csv must
contain at least two defined lines. The first line must be filled with the set of descriptions of
the constants and variables to be analyzed and the later lines will represent the values or
labels assumed by the constants / variables in each test. In cases where these requirements
are not met, the software returns the message below to the user.
Figure 1175 – Statistical Analysis – Error opening file
It is Important to note that all lines in the file. Imported CSV must contain the same
number of columns (this number is defined by the number of columns observed when
reading the first line of the file .CSV), that is, every constant / variable must be associated
with a value / label in each test. Thus, if a line with a different number of columns is read, it
will be neglected.
After you add a file, table will be generated with all their values. Each column of
data can be classified as: Variable, Constant or None. When a column is defined as
"Constant", the software will perform a processing in order to check all the possibilities
of values assumed by the constant in the tests of the inserted table, aiming to make available
such values for use in Plot XY analysis, if the constant is selected. When a column is
defined as "Variable", the data in this column will be part of the sample space used by the
software. Thus, it can be used s in all kinds of software analysis. Finally, if the option
chosen is “None”, the column data will be neglected during the analysis. The figure below
illustrates the import of a file .CSV , where the “LocFalta” and “SIR” columns were selected
as constants, the “TRIPZ1”, “TRIPZ2” and “TRIPZ1B” columns as variables and the “X /
R” column was neglected.
Figure 1176 – Statistical Analysis – Table Tab

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
It is Important to note that the software performs a special treatment when importing
non-numeric values (defined by labels) and blank gaps. This treatment is performed in a
window where the user will define values for the labels found in the file .CSV. For example,
suppose the following content in a file .CSV.
Line Column 1 2 3
1 Nº Protection Zone Time TRIP
2 1 ZONA 1 0,053
3 2 ZONA 1 0,055
4 3 ZONA 1 0,000
5 4 ZONA 2 0,212
6 5 ZONA 2 0,214
7 6 ZONA 2 0,218
8 7 ZONA 3 0,311
9 8 ZONA 3 0,316
10 9 ZONA 3 0,314
When importing this file .CSV the software will identify both the blank gap (row 3
(counted from the description lines), column 3) and the values in column 2 that were defined
by the labels: ZONE 1, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3. The user must then define numerical values
for both blank gaps and for values defined by labels, thus enabling subsequent analyzes to be
carried out. The open window will be, in this case, the one shown below.
Definition of
the initial row
and column for
reading the .csv
file.
List of labels
found in the
.csv file and
their respective
values to be
defined.
List of blank
gaps in the .csv
file and their
respective
values to be
defined.
Figure 1177 – Statistical Analysis – Tables Tab - Definition of values for variables not defined or defined
by labels.
Assuming that the filling was done according to the figure above, the software will
import the file and build the table as shown in the figure below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1178 – Statistical Analysis– Tables Tab - Imported table.
Note that the blank space was filled by the value “0” chosen by the user. The
variables defined by labels follow their respective values in parentheses for user recognition.
42.6.2 Deleting Tables - Delete Table button

By clicking on the Delete Table button, the table that is selected will be deleted and
its influence will be neglected in all analyzes that have already been carried out in the
software.
42.7 Analysis Tab

In this tab, the “Analysis List”, “Filter / Weights List” and “Results” windows will
be available for manipulation and visualization of the results obtained from the analyzes
in the software.
42.7.1 “Analysis List” window

In this window, all analyzes created by the user are listed. Note that the list is made
up of the “Type” and “Description” columns. The “Type” column will show the user
through a drawing the type of analysis entered and the “Description” column will allow the
user to name the analyzes. The buttons above the analysis list will allow the user to organize
the order of the analyzes, as well as to delete them.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Move down. Move to first. Move to last.
Move up.
Delete Analysis.
PlotXY Analysis icon.
Bars Analysis Icon.
Pizza Analysis Icon.
Figure 1179 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Analysis List
42.7.2 Window List Filters / Weights

In tab "Filters" in this window the user can filter r which values of each "constant"
will be used in the analysis . There are the buttons "Mark All" and "Deselect All" to make
general selections and, for specific selections, the user must open the combo for each
constant and select the desired values. In addition to the constants, the user will be able to
define which tables will be considered in the analyzes in the item with the description “**
Tables**”. Finally, the software calculates the number of tests that are part of the sample
space defined by selecting the constant values, as well as the total number of tests defined by
the inserted tables.
Figure 1180 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Filters / Weights List - Filters Tab
In the "Weights" tab, each value of a "Constant" can have an assigned weight. In this
way, it is possible to assign a relevance to certain data directly influencing the resulting

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
graph. If for example, we have only one test with the constant LocFalta assuming the value
10 and its assigned weight is 3, the software will consider that this test was repeated 3 times.
Figure 1181 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis Tab - Filters / Weights List - Weights Tab
42.7.3 Results Windows

What will appear in this window will depend on the type of analysis selected.
If an analysis of the selected type " Graph PlotXY " , the displayed screen will be
similar to shown below.
Figure 1182 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - PlotXY Graph
On this screen we will have all the options for handling XY graphics. Such options
are listed below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
In this option, choose which “Constant” will be shown on

the X axis (all variations of this). Here we will have all the
columns defined as “Constant” in the “Tables” tab.
For the X axis, a unit can be defined.
In this option, choose which “Variable” will be shown on

the Y axis. Here we will have all the columns defined as
“Variable” in the “Tables” tab.
For the Y axis, a unit can be defined.
Statistical processing options for the selected variable (each

checked option will generate a curve on the XY chart).
Option to reference the selected Constant and Variable, a

third constant in the table. If the user selects “All”, there
will be no reference to a third constant in the elaborated
curves.
Figure 1183 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - Results - Definitions PlotXY Chart
Assuming the situation above, where the selected constant was “LocFalta”, the
selected variable was “TRIPZ1”, all statistical options were marked and the option to plot
curves was chosen as “All ”, we will have the following situation:
1) - The X axis will consist of all possible variations of the “LocFalta” constant, in
ascending order.
2) - Each checked statistical option will give rise to a different curve. The
“Maximum” curve, for example, at point X = 0 (LocFalta = 0) will have on the Y axis the
maximum value found for the variable “TRIPZ1” in all tests where the constant “LocFalta”
assumes a value equal to 0 The point X = 10 (LocFalta = 10) will have on the Y axis the
maximum value found for the variable “TRIPZ1” in all tests where the constant “LocFalta”
assumes a value equal to 10. And so on until all are found the maximum values for all
variations of the “LocFalta” constant.
3) - The procedure will be the same for the generation of the Minimum, Arithmetic
Average, Geometric Average, Median, Standard Deviation and Variance curves.
Finally, assuming the same situation as above, where the selected constant was
“LocFalta”, the selected variable was “TRIPZ1”, all statistical options were checked, but
now the option to plot curves was chosen as “SIR” (or any other constant available in the
table ), we will have the following situation:
1) - The X axis will consist of all possible variations of the “LocFalta” constant, in
ascending order.
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
2) - Each statistic option checked will give rise to a curve , for each possibility of
constant change "SIR", i.e. in this case will be 8 options for statistical calculations are
multiplied s by two variation possibilities for the constant "SIR" , which will result in a total
of 16 curves plotted on the graph .
3) - The “Maximum” curve, for example, at point X = 0 (Missing Loc = 0) with the
value of the constant “SIR” equal to 5, will have on the Y axis the maximum value found for
the variable “TRIPZ1” in all tests where the “LocFalta” constant assumes a value equal to
0 and the “SIR” constant assumes a value equal to 5 . At point X = 10 (LocFalta = 10) the
maximum value found for the variable “TRIPZ1” will be on the Y axis in all tests where the
constant “LocFalta” assumes a value equal to 10 and the constant “SIR” assumes a value
equal to 5 . And so on until you found all the maximum values for all variations
of s constant s "LocFalta" and "SIR" .
4) - The procedure will be the same for the generation of the Minimum, Arithmetic
Average, Geometric Average, Median, Standard Deviation and Variance curves.
Clicking on the “Table ” sub-tab, you can see in which table and line each point was
removed to compose each curve of the graph.
Figure 1184 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis - Results ( PlotXY Graph ) - Sub Tab Table
It is also Important to point out that all the variations of the Constants that are used
for the construction of the curves respect what was defined in the Window “List Filters /
Weights”, that is, if in the Filters window the value “0” of the constant “LocFalta” is
disabled, it will be disregarded for all curves in the current analysis.
If an analysis of the selected type " Graph of bars ", the displayed screen will look
as shown below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1185 – Statistical Analysis– Analysis – Graphic Bar
On this screen we will have all the options for handling bar graphs. Such options are
listed below.
Visualization of the Shows the number of
graph in 2D or 3D. occurrences on the graph.
If it is changed to Class
Types of analysis: Interval in this setting,
1 Variable 1 Interval; the user starts to define
2 Variables 1 Interval; the number of classes no
2 Variables 2 Intervals. longer, but the period of
each interval.
The user will have two
possibilities to define the Here the user defines the
number of intervals for the Variable to be analyzed
selected variables. With the as well as its unit.
Number of Classes option,
the difference between the
highest and lowest value of Here the user can define
the analyzed variable will minimum and maximum
be defined and this value values of the selected
will be divided by the value variable that will be
considered in the analysis.
defined in the text box by
the user. The result will be
the number of bars shown in
Results obtained by the
the graph (defined
software with the
intervals).
processing of the
selected variable.
Figure 1186 – Statistical Analysis – Bar Graph– Definitions for graph construction
CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Assuming the above situation, where the selected variable was “TRIPZ1”, the
interval defined by the number of classes equal to 5, 3D graphic, showing the number of
occurrences and the limitation of the variable between the values -1000000 and 1000000, we
will have the following situation.
1) - All values assumed by the variable “TRIPZ1” will be acquired in all tests of all
inserted and enabled tables.
2) - In possession of these values, values that are not in the defined range of -
1000000 to 1000000 will be disregarded. The disregarded values are also counted and can
be viewed in the bar graph later as “Out of Range” values.
3) - With the remaining values, the maximum and minimum values will be checked,
with the result of subtracting them divided by 5 (number of classes) and with this final
result, the period of each interval to be represented in the bar graph.
4) - If the final result is equal to 2, for example, the intervals of the bar graph would
be: Interval 1 {0 to 2}, Interval 2 {2 to 4}, Interval 3 {4 to 6}, Interval 4 {6 to 8}, Range 5
{8 to 10}.
5) - With the definition of the intervals, all values of the variable “TRIPZ1” are
traversed and their distribution is carried out between such intervals, so that the user can
view a frequency distribution through the bar graph .
6) - Finally, statistical calculations are performed with the sample space of the
selected variable and the results are made available to the user.
If selected an analysis of the " Graphic Pizza ", the displayed screen will be similar
to the one below.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1187 – Statistical Analysis – Analysis – Pizza Chart
On this screen we will have all the options for handling the pie charts. Such options
are the same as those observed for the bar graph, however, this type of analysis does not
allow the user to represent two variables on the same graph as is made possible by bar graph
analysis.
Assuming the same selection observed for the example of the bar graph, where the
selected variable was “TRIPZ1”, the interval defined by the number of classes equal to 5,
3D graph, showing the number of occurrences and the limitation of the variable between the
values -1000000 and 1000000, we will have the same processing situation for building the
graph.
42.8 Report Presentation

After all analyzes have been completed, the user has the possibility to generate a
report by clicking on the Ribbon menu button “Present Report”. Once this is done, the
following window will open.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1188 – Statistical Analysis – Present Report - Configure Presentation
The user will be allowed to choose which analyzes will be presented, if graphs and /
or tables will be included, if the sample space of each analysis will be detailed and if the
general information will also appear in the report. Having made the choice of what will be
included in the report, the user just needs to select the language of the report and click OK.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
AUTODIAG-
NÓSTICO
SOFTWARE FOR ANALYZING THE
OPERATION OF THE TEST SET

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
43 Autodiagnóstico- Software for analyzing the operation of the Test set

This software is able to check if there is any kind of problem like the test case. He
initially evaluates the minimum settings of the computer used, then checks the test bag's
firmwares. For the next tests it is necessary that the user make the connections shown by the
software itself. At that moment, the analog voltage and current outputs, the input binaries,
the output binaries, the auxiliary source, the sending and receiving of GOOSE messages and
the sending and receiving of Sample Value (SV) messages are analyzed.
43.2 Initial Screen

When starting the Self-Diagnosis software, the following screen is shown. Note that
the software automatically creates a test file that varies according to the test bag tested.
Figure 1189 – Autodiagnóstico– Initial Screen
43.3 Save Test File

The post create the file must choose a name and a graze to save the test file.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
Figure 1190 – Autodiagnóstico – Saving File
43.4 Initial File

The figure below shows the file with all the tests already created.
Figure 1191 – Autodiagnóstico –Initial File

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

toolbar. The user can create, save or open a new test , can start the generation, can stop the
generation, can clear a specific test, can clear all tests and can call a report.
Create, open or save a The generation starts, generates Clears a selected run, clears all
new file. from or only the selected test and runs and creates a report.
for generation.
Shows all Displays the Shows the general Shows the list of errors
rehearsals. history of settings and parameters in the test set.
problems. of the test set.
Figure 1192 – Statistical Analysis – Quick Access Bar

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
REMOT
ACCESS
SOFTWARE TECHNICAL SUPPORT FROM
CONPROVE GET REMOTE ACCESS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
44 Remote Access - Software Technical Support Conprove gain remote

access
This software allows technical support to gain remote access from the customer's
computer. Allowing the visualization of the test case settings, relay settings and
even full control of the test. This access can be done in two ways. Through the internet or if
the computers are on the same network locally.
44.2 Initial Screen

When starting the Remote Access software, the following screen is shown.
Figure 1193 – Remote Access – Initial Screen

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
44.3 Initial File

Connection over the Computer
Internet (Cloud) or identification. It
locally (Local). must be reported to
technical support.
For security reasons

The user can create a
password to allow
remote access.
Initiate remote
access to the
computer.
Figure 1194 – Remote Access – Resources

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
GPS
INSTRUCTIONS ON OPERATING THE
CE-GPS

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
45 GPS - CE-GPS operation instructions
45.1 Description
The CE-GPS is a lightweight and portable device, to receive the signals from the
GPS Satellites (24 satellites in total) specially thinking about End -to- End tests , to be used
with the Conprove Test Bag model CE600X . It allows programming the firing with up to
100 na in seconds of resolution allowing synchronization of two or more units at a distance
with an accuracy equal to or better than 1 micro second. The unit has a cable 15 meters long
for connection with its antenna, as well as a communication cable between the test case and
the CE-GPS. The equipment is controlled by the test bag operation software itself,
simplifying the adjustments for the user.
45.2 Configure GPS Screen

The following figure shows the screen that opens when you click on the Configure
GPS icon present in all software.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
APPENDIX A
POWER AMPLIFIER USAGE MANUAL CE-4000

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
A1 - Introduction
In this manual the user finds all the information necessary to work with the External
Amplifier CE-4000. It was designed in an objective way, aiming to put the user immediately
in contact with the equipment.
The external single-phase current amplifier CE-4000 was designed to work with the
CE-6000, the CE-6006 and the CE-6003, allowing greater current and power in the tests.
Some software of the CE-6006/3 has been changed to work with the amplifier, they
are:
 CALIBRAC. The new version allows calibration of the amplifier with a standard
user-defined ammeter, similar to the calibration process of the CE-6006/3.
 MANUAL. In the new version, the user will be able to work with the amplifier,
having total freedom of signal generation and control of the range.
 TRANSIENT. In this version, the amplifier can be easily used in tests that require
higher currents and power.
 SEQUENC. In the new version, the user will be able to work with the amplifier,
having total freedom of signal generation and control of the range.
 RAMP. In the new version, the user will be able to work with the amplifier, having
total freedom of signal generation and control of the range.
 MASTER. In this version, the amplifier can be easily used in tests that require higher
currents and power.
 SOBRECOR. In this version, the amplifier can be easily used in tests that require
higher currents and power. The software automatically controls the amplifier's range,
switching it, in order to better adjust to the needs of the in-process tests

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
A2 - Hardware
A.2.1 General features:
The CE-4000 Current Amplifier allows the generation of up to 100 A. For better
quantization of the signal and use of power, the amplifier has several tapes. The maximum
power value is achieved when the current generated is equal to the maximum value of the
selected tape. Thus, the user must select the tape whose maximum value is closest to the
value of the current that will be generated.
The CE-4000 also has two power modes switched by key, which allows the
equipment to work with 200 W in steady state or up to 400 W transient. The figure below
shows the transient power curve.
Figure 1195 – Transient power curve
NOTE: The above graph is valid for s frequency fundamental s 60 and 50 Hz, measures the current output
terminal. For frequency s harmonics the power drops considerably.

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
The available tapes are:
 7 A Tape: Generation range from 0 to 7 A

The CE-4000 panel layout is shown in the figure below, each panel field is
commented below..
Figure 1196 - CE-4000 panel layout
In the CE-4000 panel, the output field is located that informs the user which tape the
amplifier is working on, that is, which tape is selected: 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, 80 or 100
THE.
On the left part of the panel, there is the terminal where the communication cable
with the CE-6006/3 (CE-6006/3 EXCITATION) is connected , reset push- button and the
OVERLOAD indicator led, the power switch. output, 200 W permanent or 400 W transient
and the light indication whether the amplifier is on or not (ON).
The output terminals are: CURRENT , which is live, and COMMON

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL
A2. 2 Important information:

To work with the amplifier, the user must connect it to the CE-6006/3, through the
interfaces: EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER INTERFACE, of the CE-6006, and EXITATION of
the CE-6006/3, in the amplifier. And configure the Hardware Settings screen of the CE-
6006/3 software to the CE-4000 External Hardware mode.
When configuring the Hardware to work with EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER, six
external outputs are enabled for the generation of External Hardware, in the case of the CE-
4000, only one of the six external outputs will be used.
All the CE-6006/3 software that has access to the Hardware Configuration Screen
can be used to work in Connection mode with External Hardware.
For the best response from the CE-4000 amplifier, strictly follow the indications
below:
 Turn on the Amplifier and always wait a minute before starting the generation. This
time is necessary for the amplifier to stabilize itself thermally.
 Never change the current range on the Hardware Settings Screen, with the amplifier
turned off or cooled down.
 Always check the voltage before connecting it to the mains.
 Always try to transport the equipment in its box, thus avoiding bumps and bumps.

Manual CTC - Enus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual CTC - Enus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual CTC - Enus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CTC SOFTWARE MANUAL

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 1

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 2

CTC Software Usage Manual

Copyright per CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA, 2022.

All rights reserved.

Prohibited the total or partial reproduction.

No part of this work,

These software were developed and produced in Brazil

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 3

Version Descriptions Date Author Reviewer

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 4

4.5.3 ANÁLISE ESTATÍSTICA ......................................................................................................... 80

5.10.1 Features of the Waveform Tab ................................................................................................. 109

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 7

10.12.1 Resources of the Waveform Tab .......................................................................................... 159

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 8

13.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................219

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 9

16.9 TC Tab .................................................................................................................265

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 10

27.9 Phasor Tab ...........................................................................................................339

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 11

29.9.7 Interharmonic Resources .......................................................................................................... 398

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 12

30.9.11 Ramp Mode Resources – Power ........................................................................................... 446

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 13

31.9.27 Ramp Mode .......................................................................................................................... 495

33.2 Main screen ..........................................................................................................552

35.11 Waveform Tab .....................................................................................................622

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 16

37.12 Trajectories tab ....................................................................................................695

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 17

40.1 General features ...................................................................................................777

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 18

42.1 General features ...................................................................................................827

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 19

Figure 56 – Manual – Pre-fault tab – Resources .............................................................................................. 100

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 21

Figure 112 – Test Plan – General Button Resources ........................................................................................ 141

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 22

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 23

Figure 224 – CT – Sub tab - Low Power Ratio ................................................................................................ 212

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 24

Figure 280 – Resistance – Hardware, Results and Generation ......................................................................... 249

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 25

Figure 336 – PMaster – Transformer – Sub tab – Insulation ............................................................................ 284

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 26

Figure 392 – Multim – Open Settings at Start .................................................................................................. 329

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 27

Figure 448 – Transient – Waveform Tab ......................................................................................................... 367

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 28

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 29

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 30

CONPROVE INDÚSTRIA E COMÉRCIO LTDA 31

Figure 672 – Master – Waveform Tab – Resources - View ............................................................................. 514